Home

Yaskawa E7 Drive O&M - Coward Environmental Systems

1. FRONT VIEW MOUNTING HOLES rs FOR SIZE SCREW ps 4 AIR 1 Ln i zx o H1 H ANNAN om T q Df dices L i E zs AIR W2 m w1 J lt D1 R Le w 1 D iat q A g e rh e 19 RATED ais Mobil DIMENSIONS IN INCHES APPROX INPUT CIMR E7U anes HP H w H2 w2 D D1 A LBS 20370 162 50 22 64 9 84 23 62 14 76 49 2 46 11 81 3 94 3 8 125 20450 192 60 22 64 9 84 23 62 14 76 49 2 46 12 99 5 12 3 8 139 208V 20550 215 75 27 56 12 80 28 54 17 72 49 2 46 13 78 5 12 3 8 189 20750 312 100 27 56 12 80 28 54 17 72 49 2 46 13 78 5 12 3 8 191 20900 360 125 32 28 14 57 33 46 19 69 59 2 56 14 17 5 12 3 8 238 21100 415 150 33 66 17 52 34 84 22 64 59 2 56 14 96 5 51 3 8 330 20370 162 50 60 22 64 9 84 23 62 14 76 49 2 46 11 81 3 94 3 8 125 230V 20450 192 75 22 64 9 84 23 62 14 76 49 2 46 12 99 5 12 3 8 139 20750 312 100 125 27 56 12 80 28 54 17 72 49 2 46 13 78 5 12 3 8 191 20900 360 150 32 28 14 57 33
2. o 8 H1 H ot p Ja lt gt fh ke mt fk Y W2 ul wi L w1 Ww D1 D 9 RATED DIMENSIONS IN INCHES pare woot Eu INPUT CIMR E7U AMPS HP ar UNTIN w H w He we D Di A LBS 41850 414 300 350 50 00 1063 51 38 2795 79 335 1634 494 3 8 572 480V 42200 515 400 40 50 00 10 63 5138 2795 79 335 1634 494 3 8 616 43000 675 500 5670 1437 5807 3606 79 366 1634 494 3 8 891 FOR REFERENCE ONLY UNLESS PROPERLY ENDORSED IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE ADEQUATE COOLING YW YASKAWA THE DRIVE MUST BE POSITIONED TO ALLOW A MINIMUM OF FREE AIR OF 1 2 INCHES ON SIDES AND 5 INCHES TOP AND BOTTOM RIP 8 02 APPVL TBS 9 5 02 Physical Installation 1 10 Heat Loss Data Table 1 3 200V Class Heat Loss Data Drive Rated Cooli int Inverter Output Fin Side Unit Sid Cooling CIMR E7ULI Capacity Current TM e ees Method kVA W 923 ee a 3s 6 46 2 20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 23P7 25P5 27P5 2011 2015 2022 2030 2037 2045 2055 2075 2090 2110 19 26 48 Cs 106 e 19 328 us xm 399 39 42 50 59 74 84 168 182 208 25
3. 9 1 3 JF c See H Ground terminal Ground terminal Fig 1 7 Terminal Arrangement Terminal Cover Removed Physical Installation 1 6 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions DIMENSIONS E7 NEMA 1 208 240V 3 6 74 8 AMPS 480V 1 8 40 0 AMPS FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW MOUNTING HOLES AIR FOR SIZE SCREW H2 gone 1 38 DIA 2 HOLES SIZE J 87 DIA Ht P we _ wi F b BOTTOM VIEW RATED DIMENSIONS IN INCHES RATED MODEL OUTPUT NOMINAL WEIGHT INPUT CIMR E7U CURRENT HP MOUNTING LBS AMPS Hi wi H w He we D D1 A B F J 20P41 3 6 1 2 3 4 1047 4 96 11 02 551 28 630 1 54 335 473 197 110 66 20P71 46 1 1047 4 96 1102 551 28 28 630 1 54 335 473 197 1 10 66 21P51 78 2 1047 496 1102 551 28 eso 154
4. DC Reactor Optional Measures for power supply harmonics ings Outputrat Powersupplycharacteristics 12 pulse Rectification Not possible Controlcharacteristics Table C 1 480VAC Drive Specifications Continued Rated output capacity kVA 59 0 73 0 95 0 120 0 140 0 180 0 2300 315 0 390 0 Motor HP 460V 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 Rated output current A 77 0 96 0 125 0 156 0 180 0 240 0 304 0 414 0 515 0 Max output voltage V 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480VAC Proportional to input voltage Max output frequency Hz 120 Hz Max voltage V Rated frequency Hz Outputratings 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480VAC 50 60 Hz Rated input current A 106 134 172 198 264 334 Allowable voltage fluctuation 10 15 Powersupplycharacteristics Allowable frequency fluctuation 5 DC Reactor Built in Measures for power supply harmonics 12 Pulse Possible Controlcharacteristics Rectification Note The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole motor When selecting the actual motor and Drive be sure that the Drive s rated output current is applicable for the motor s rated current A 3 wire phase shifting transformer is required on the power supply for 12 pulse rectification Specificat
5. 1 14 Removing and Attaching the Terminal 1 15 Removing Attaching the Digital Operator and Front 1 16 Chapter 2 Electrical Installation eese 2 1 Terminal Block Configuration 2 2 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals iori asp 2 3 Control UI 2 12 Chapter 3 Digital Operator oci eee renun e nnne an eni aee 3 1 Digital Operator s eter ters oe odi adde 3 2 Digital Operator Keys csc tria Letra ra iore 3 3 Drive Mode IndiGalors rettet eret p aane gute pean deal aes 3 5 Main so to two 3 7 Quick Setting Menu 2 3 12 Programming Menu ADV iioii bU tender Aaa 3 13 Example of Changing a Parameter 3 15 Table of Contents v Chapter 4 Starts UD REIP 4 1 Drive Start Up Preparation 4 2 Drive Start Up Procedures 1 0 2 eraot t Dow Nd 4 5 Chapter 5 Basic nnana 5 1 AT InitiallZatiOri 5 2
6. Control circuits 4075 to 4160 and CIMR _ 4185104300 125 Hp to 500 Hp 1 29 S1 L21 1 131 d 1 q 00 200 C 4 4 9 14 E H Lear Power Control supply circuits Notel Input fuses or molded case circuit breakers are required for proper branch circuit protection for all Drives Failure to use recommended fuses circuit breakers See Appendix E may result in damage to the wiring Drive and or personal injury 2 Control power is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power supply for all Drives 3 Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12 pulse rectification Electrical Installation 2 10 Cable Length between Drive and Motor The E7 should be installed as close as possible to the motor to minimize the length of load side power cable needed between the Drive and the motor If the cable between the Drive and the motor is long the high frequency leakage current will increase causing the Drive output current to increase as well This may affect peripheral devices To prevent this reduce the cable length whenever possible or if necessary adjust the carrier frequency set in C6 02 as shown in Table 2 6 The line side power cables load side power cables and the control wiring should all be run in a separate condu
7. E CDI 5 4 b2 DG Braking ose sede Etro tn pausa te e e faded 5 10 695221 2 seda esie ita edere era Tod dur ena a EU uade e 5 12 D5 PLEUncti ni sete esee eek Y CREER ER QEON 5 16 b8 Energy Savings us rire tet id ee Pes Eo d OR Re n Ha e la Deo S en RR RE A 5 25 C1 Cc DECI ET 5 26 d2 Reference Speed Command 5 27 d3 Jump Frequencies eiie RELIER ERR COR EAE EXER Ce Y CEA FA CE cies 5 28 ET VI Patena b 5 29 E2 Motor ssa ees 5 32 F6 Com OPT Setup applies only to the LonWorks option 5 33 F3 Analog Inputs rm uc det betae ioco pct ente Pre p deeds 5 34 L2 Momentary Power Loss Ride thru Function 5 40 Stall Prevention e 5 41 L4 Speed Command Loss 5 45 eS Fault RESTA i secret rese e Fo n ree ener ne Re ERE RES 5 46 L6 Torque Detection eerta n e b ee m ERE ERE Ee E Ee E ERE ERR EP do 5 48 L8 Hardware 99 Hmm 5 50 o1 Monitor Configuration vette pite eq ped Soe UM NE 5 52 O2 de ECON FE 5 56 03 Digital Operator Copy Function nnne 5 58 T4 Auto T hlfig idee e er pip
8. During running During zero speed During reverse During reset signal input Drive Operation Status Int Ctl Sts 1 During speed agree Drive operation ready During fault detection Minor fault During fault detection Major fault Parameters A 26 Table A 2 Monitor List Continued Parameter Parameter Name icu Digital Operator Display Description Cumulative Operation Time Elapsed Time Displays total operating or power on time of the Drive Software Number FLASH ID Displays Drive s software number 0115 Terminal A1 Input Voltage Displays the input voltage on Terminal 1 as a percentage of Term A1 Level 10V DC UL 16 Terminal A2 Input Voltage Displays the input current or voltage on Terminal A2 as a Term A2 level percentage of 20mA or 10 V DC Motor Secondary Current 14 Displays the amount of current being used by the motor to Mot SEC Current produce torque Iq Output Frequency After Soft Start Displays the frequency reference speed command after the SFS Output accel and decel ramps units changeable via 01 03 PI Feedback Value E 7 PI Feedback Displays the feedback signal when PI control is used CPU Number scs CPU ID Displays control board hardware revision kWh kWh Lo 4 Digits Displays the accumulated kWh MWh kWh Hi 5 Digits Displays the accumulated MWh First Parameter Causing an
9. D 4 Parameters eese A 11 A 18 D 4 Run Command sese 5 4 Self Diagnosis Function esses D 14 Station Address esee D 5 Stop Dils zs t eee e D 1 SerialNumber sis es Rees 1 3 Setpoint PI Function sse 5 20 A 27 Boost Setting oett 5 21 A 6 Display 5 17 6 Selection eee ee 5 15 5 19 A 6 5 20 6 SHIET RESBET Key 5e en ts 3 3 Shield Wire Grounding sss 2 12 2 18 Shipping Damage Re REIS 1 3 Short Circuit Protection E 2 E 3 Index 7 Sinking Sourcing Mode sse 2 17 Skip Frequency sse 5 27 6 19 6 20 A 9 DAVE uote pine MN Henn D 2 Sleep Function eee te in 5 19 A 6 Snooze Function 5 21 5 22 A 6 Soft Charge Contactor Alarm eo SER te i eei 6 11 Checking iude Ree Osee 6 22 EI 6 8 Soft Charge Resistor Checking setenta etes 6 22 Preventive Maintenance 2 7 3 Soft CLA Selection A 22 rore toe pena b s A 7 Software Number 1 A 27 SPEC iet rp EU 1 3 1 4 Specifications i C 1 Design us Re ERR 1 4 A 25 General cb ket da eti d OP odd C 4 Standard Drive 208 240 VAC 2 480 VAC niin ntti ect d er eis C 3 Nameplate itd rn etate eet 1 3 Speed Agreement ds sone api tpi 5 46 A 15
10. eese D 4 Ramp to StD iseen Re eter tete tir etre ed unes 5 6 Selection OE tees 5 48 A 22 Storage Temperature eren C 4 Switching Frequency Carrier Frequency 2 11 8 3 T Technical Inside Back Cover Technical Training sssssss Inside Back Cover Temperature Ambient Operating 1 13 C 4 Ambient Setting essen A 22 Effect on Frequency Accuracy C 4 SIKO Le Getestet ee Pe C 4 Troubleshooting 2 6 18 Terminal Control Inspectmng o rt Rh eon edo 7 2 Removing and Mounting 0 7 6 Terminal Al uer RET 2 14 2 18 5 33 A 16 Terminal 2 2 14 2 18 5 35 5 38 A 16 Terminal 2 14 2 18 A 17 A 18 Terminal FM sess 2 14 2 18 A 17 A 18 Terminal 1 2 20 0 0 0 2 14 2 18 A 15 Terminal 3 2 14 2 18 A 15 Terminal R 5 8 2 2 2 14 2 18 D 3 Terminal S1 82 2 14 2 18 5 3 5 5 Terminals S3 to S7 2 14 2 18 A 12 to A 14 Terminal essere nennt 1 5 1 6 2 2 Configuration sess 2 2 ConnectOons eg 2 18 Control 22 2 12 2 14 2 18 Main Circuit eR Se
11. 6 6 Pre Operation Considerations ito iv 1 1 2 1 4 1 Preset Speeds oon niet tai e tay A 8 Preventive Maintenance 7 1 Programming 5 1 to 5 60 Error OPE Saepe bee EH 6 12 MU eal eccrine e dede ete tee 3 7 to 3 16 Protective Functions ne ere ehe Rei OG C 4 Encl SUte a 4 ihn eet oath C 4 Parameters eet tie A 22 PWM Frequency See Carrier Frequency A 8 Q Quick Setting 3 7 3 12 R hen 5 6 A 4 Rated Current Motor 4 6 5 31 6 13 A 11 A 25 B 4 Ready eee ein et eee 3 2 Reactors Preventive Maintenance 7 3 READ erp eo e Er dies 5 56 A 25 Ready Display 2 2 4100004440000000400000000000000000000 3 2 Recelying c st Uu Te P e 1 3 REF Indicator 3 2 3 5 3 6 Reference Limits see Frequency 5 26 6 19 A 9 Reference Selection Pun 3 3 his de Se rei tee 3 4 Reference Source ettet 3 6 5 4 A 4 Relays Digital Output 2 12 2 14 2 18 7 3 A 15 RESET Keys in iet erts 3 3 Resistance Motor 0 1 11 RESONANCE nece te eio 5 27 6 19 6 20 A 9 REV Indicator osse eee eee 3 5 Reverse 5 8 4
12. Table B 2 Parameters Affected by 02 04 Parameter Name Parameter Number 63 Digital Operator Display b8 04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value Energy Save COEF Carrier Frequency Selection ie e CarrierFreq Sel E2 01 Motor Rated Current Motor Rated FLA E2 03 Motor No Load Current No Load Current E2 05 Motor Line to Line Resistance Term Resistance 12 02 Momentary Power Loss Ride thru Time 7 PwrL Ridethru t 12 03 Momentary Power Loss Minimum Base Block Time i PwrL Baseblock t 12 04 Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time 2 PwrL V F Rampt L8 02 Overheat Pre Alarm Level g OH Pre Alarm Lvl 18 06 Input Phase Loss Detection Level j Ph Loss In Lvl 2 04 Drive kVA Selection s Inverter Model Capacity Related Parameters B 3 Capacity Related Parameter Values The following tables detail the factory default settings for the parameters that are affected by the setting of parameter 02 04 Table B 3 208 240VAC Drives Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory DriveModel Nominal Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default CIMR Hp for for for for for for for for for for b8 04 C6 02 E2 01 E2 03 E2 05 L2 02 L2 03 L2 04 L8 02 L8 06 20P4 0 5 0 75 288 2 10kHz 1 9 1 2 9 842 0 1 0 1 0 3 95 C 5 20P7 2 223 7 10kHz 3 3 1 8 5 156 0 1 0 2 0 3 95 C 7 5 21P5
13. sess 7 6 Peripheral Devices AC and DC reactor sss E 4 Magnetic Contactor ccccccceccesseesseseeeseeseceteeeeeneeens E 4 Molded Case Circuit Breaker MCCB E 2 Noise filter eiie nots tate edens E 4 Troubleshooting 2 6 18 Phase Loss Detection Inp tz awe retire ambe emis 6 7 A 22 Phase to Phase 6 5 6 7 6 10 Physical Installation See Installation Physical 1 1 PI Function Accel Decel 22 5 19 A 6 Block 5 15 5 15 to 5 18 6 4 6 10 6 Differential 5 15 16 Loss Detection 5 18 A 6 Loss Detection 5 18 A 6 Reference Missing Detection 5 18 A 5 Square Root Activation 5 23 A 6 Integral Limit Setting sess 5 16 A 5 Integral Time Setting sss 5 17 A 5 Maximum Boost 5 22 A 6 Offset 2 5 17 5 wae ative eee 5 17 5 Gain Setting esee 5 18 A 5 Level Selection 5 17 A 5 TAM onere teer ttr te s 5 17 A 5 Primary Delay Time Constant 5 17 A 5 Square Root
14. m 0 5 to 600 0 180 0sec Quick Setting L5 01 Number of Auto Restart Attempts Num of Restarts Auto Restart Operation Selection Restart Sel Maximum Restart Time After Fault Max Restart Time Determines the number of times the drive will perform an automatic restart Determines if the fault contact activates during an automatic restart attempt 0 No Fit Relay fault contact will not activate during an automatic restart 1 Relay Active fault contact will activate during an automatic restart If the restart fails or is not attempted due to a continuing fault condition e g an OV fault the Drive waits L5 03 seconds before attempting another restart C TES Torque Detection SS Torque Detection Selection 1 Load Detection Determines the drive s response to an overtorque undertorque condition Overtorque and Undertorque are determined by the settings in parameters L6 02 and L6 03 0 Disabled 1 OL SpdAgree Alm Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Operation continues after detection OL At RUN Alm Overtorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection OL SpdAgree Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault OL At RUN Flt Overtorque Detection is always active and drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault LL SpdAgree Alm Undertorque Detection is only ac
15. 5 23 A 6 Parameters 5 15 to 5 23 A 5 A 6 Proportional Gain 5 14 A 5 e e 5 15 6 Boost Setting 222 2 5 21 6 Display 5 20 6 Selections c o terae 5 19 A 6 5 20 6 Delay Tie iss seinen ede 5 19 A 6 Function evene RE 5 19 Function Start 5 19 A 6 Input Sources nner 5 21 A 6 Snooze Deactivation Level 5 21 A 6 Delay etes 5 21 6 Feedback 5 22 6 925 an BADER RE AO eu 5 21 A 6 Square Root Gat eerte e ees 5 23 A 6 on eon n pes 5 15 A 5 PI Monitors Feedback 71 24 5 20 27 Output U 1537 ne Ie tits 5 19 A 27 Setpoint U1 38 sse 5 20 A 27 PLC Programmable Logic Controller Serial Com Using Modbus Protocol D 2 Plenum Rated eidem 1 13 Potentiometer Connection 2 12 2 18 Power Energy Saving 222222 5 24 A 7 Output FIS Vide 2 e amener 2 14 2 18 Loss Ride thru 2 222221 5 39 A 19 C 4 PCB Inspecting 7 2 Supply Specifications sess C 2 C 3 Power Factor Correction Capacitors
16. 3 2 Digital Operator bye ec etree 3 3 Drive Mode Indicators sa usce erroe nete tae poe tain 3 5 Drive Main a ree 3 7 Quick Setting Menu QUICK 3 12 Programming Menu 2 2 4 3 13 Example of Changing a 3 15 Digital Operator 3 1 Digital Operator Display The Digital Operator is used for programming operating and monitoring drive operation By default the E7 Drive will not run unless the digital operator is securely attached to the Drive The various items included on the Digital Operator are described below lt a Drive Mode Indicators FWD REV seo ALARM See Table 3 2 Menu Display DRIVE Rdy 4 Ready Display See Table 3 7 Frequency Ref Drive can operate when a drive command is input U1 60 00uz 01 02 60 00Hz 4 Data Display U1 03 10 05A Displays monitor data parameter numbers and settings 1 line x 13 characters 3 lines x 16 characters 125 RESET HAND lt a Key Descriptions See Table 3 1 RUN RUN amp STOP Indicators See Tables 3 5 and 3 6 Fig 3 1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions The digital operator can be used to operate start the Drive Incorrect programming and or improper key WARNING selection on the digit
17. UL Specification No Voltage 3 phase 208 240Vac 3 phase 480Vac Fig 1 2 Drive Model Number Structure Drive Enclosure and Revision Code The Drive SPEC number on the nameplate indicates the voltage Drive rating enclosure type and the revision code of the Drive in alphanumeric codes 20111A Voltage L__ eraware Revision 2 Enclosure Type Open chassis IEC 00 NEMA Type 1 IEC IP20 Fig 1 3 SPEC Number Structure Open Chassis Type IEC 00 Protected so that parts of the human body cannot reach electrically charged parts from the front when the Drive is mounted in a control panel also called protected chassis TERMs NEMA Type 1 IEC IP20 The Drive is shielded from the exterior and can thus be mounted to the interior wall of a building not necessarily enclosed in a control panel The protective structure conforms to the standards of NEMA Type 1 in the USA All protective covers Fig 1 4 must be installed to conform with IEC IP20 and NEMA Type 1 requirements Physical Installation 1 4 Component Names Models CIMR E7U20P4 thru 2018 25HP 208V 240V and 40P4 thru 4018 30HP 480V The external appearance component names and terminal arrangement of the Drive are shown in Fig 1 4 and 1 5 Top protective cover Front cover Mounting hole p Diecast Heat Sink Digital Operator Nameplate Terminal cover Bottom protecti
18. DRIVE Main Menu Operation DRIVE Rdy Frequency Ref Description Press the INCREASE key to display C1 02 Decel Time 1 Press the DATA ENTER key to access setting display Press the SHIFT RESET key to move the flashing digit to the right Press the SHIFT RESET key to move the flashing digit to the right Press the INCREASE key to increase the set data Press the DATA ENTER key to enter the set data Entry Accepted is dis played for 1 0 sec after the data setting has been confirmed The monitor display for C1 02 returns Press the MENU key to scroll to Operation menu Press the DATA ENTER key to enter Operation menu Digital Operator 3 16 Chapter 4 Start Up This chapter describes the procedures to prepare the Drive for start up and the procedures to conduct a Drive start up Drive Start Up 4 2 Drive Start Up 4 5 Start Up 4 1 Start Up In order to provide the most reliable Drive available and to avoid any extra costs related to loss or reduction of warranty coverage an authorized Yaskawa service representative should complete this start up procedure Please complete the following checklist and maintain it in a secure location as technical service personnel may request information from this checklist Drive Start Up Preparation Date Start Up Person Company N
19. V 15VDC 20mA External 2kQ Frequency x 4 1 0 10VDC 20k Q Reference N 4to20mA A2 H3 08 4 20m A 250K Q 0 to 10V 20K Q Signal Terminal Connections 0 10Vdc Al to AC 4 20mA or 0 10Vdc AC P Pair V A2 to AC Fig 2 3 Analog Input Terminal Configuration Table 2 7 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes Same for all Drives Tightening Terminal Torque Screws Ib in AWG mm mm Possible Recommended Wire Sizes Wire Size AWG Wire Type 2 Terminals S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 SN SC SP V Al A2 AC MI M2 M3 M4 Stranded Phoenix 4 2 to 5 3 wire 3 0 5 to 0 6 26 to 16 0 14 to 1 5 Shielded twisted pair wire Shielded polyethylene covered vinyl sheath cable MA MB MC FM AM R S S IG 7 0 to 8 8 20 to 14 12 E G MO 0 8 to 1 0 0 5 to 22 1 25 Use shielded twisted pair cables to input an external speed command 2 Yaskawa recommends using straight solderless terminals on digital inputs to simplify wiring and improve reliability 3 Yaskawa recommends using a thin slot screwdriver with a 3 5 mm blade width Electrical Installation 2 12 Wiring Checks After all wiring is completed perform the following checks 1 Isall wiring correct 2 Have all wire clippings screws or other foreign material been removed from the D
20. Attempting to write read only data Writing during main circuit undervoltage UV fault Writing parameters to the Drive during UV main circuit undervoltage alarm Writing via Enter commands during UV main circuit undervoltage alarm 2 Writing error during parameters processing Attempting to write parameters while processing parameters in the Drive Slave Not Responding Data setting error Upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing parameters When writing parameters the parameter setting is invalid 01H 02H 03H 21H 22H 23H 4H In the following cases the slave will ignore the write function When a communication error overrun framing parity or CRC 16 is detected in the command message When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Drive do not agree When the data that configures the message and the data time length exceed 24 bits When the command message data length is invalid If the slave address specified in the command message is 0 all slaves execute the write function but do not IMPORTANT return response messages to the master Communications D 13 Modbus Self Diagnosis The Drive has a built in function for self diagnosing the operations of serial communication interface circuits The self diagnosis function connects the communication parts of the send and receive terminals receives the data sent by the Drive and
21. Press the ESC once Press DATA ENTER once Press A key twice to display b1 02 Run Source This parameter selects where the Drive will receive the run command Press the DATA ENTER key once Use the A or W keys and the DATA ENTER key to set this parameter for the application Table 4 4 Run Command Selection Parameter Parameter Name 1 Setting Factory Digital Operator Display ME Setting 11 Operator ick Setti Run Command Selection Terminals 0 3 1 z or Run Source Serial Com Programming Option PCB Ensure the DATA ENTER key is pressed to enter the selection in the Drive Entry Accepted briefly appears and the display 1s now not flashing Press the W key once to display b1 01 Reference Source This parameter selects where the Drive will receive the speed command Press the DATA ENTER key once Use the A or W keys and the DATA ENTER key to set this parameter for the application Start Up 4 6 Table 4 5 Speed Command Selection Parameter Parameter Name Setting Setting Factory M E No Digital Operator Display Choices Range Setting Frequency Reference 0 Operator Quick Setting Selection 1 Terminals 0 3 1 or Reference Source 2 Serial Com Programming 3 Option PCB Ensure the DATA ENTER key is pressed to enter the selection in the Drive Entry Accepted briefly appears and the display is now not flashing 12 Press the A key twice to display b1 03 Stopping Method This parameter se
22. A 25 Capacity Related B 1 Carrier Freq C6 02 6 05 A 8 Com OPT Setup F6 01 6 05 COPY Function 03 01 03 02 A 25 DC Braking b2 01 62 09 A 4 Delay timers b4 01 64 02 A 5 Digital Inputs H1 01 H1 05 A 12 to A 14 Digital Outputs H2 01 2 02 A 15 Energy Saving b8 01 8 06 A 7 Example of Changing 3 15 3 16 Factory Reset Initialize esses A 2 Fault Restart L5 01 1 5 03 A 21 Hdwe Protection L8 01 L8 19 A 22 High Slip Breaking n3 01 3 04 A 23 Hunting Prevention n1 01 1 02 A 23 Initialization A1 00 1 05 A 2 Jump Frequencies d3 01 43 04 A 9 Key Selections 02 01 02 15 A 24 A 25 Disting Of tee cd 1 to A 29 Modified essere 3 7 3 14 Monitor Select 01 01 01 08 A 23 A 24 MOP Trim Control 04 01 d4 02 A 9 Motor Overload L1 01 1 1 05 A 19 Motor Setup E2 01 2 05 11 PI
23. Control circuit damage Replace the Drive Cycle power off and on to the CPF09 CPU ASIC Mutual Diagnosis Fault Drive COY ontrol circuit damage Replace the Drive Raters 2 Fault Control circuit damage Replace the Drive Option card connector connec Remove all inputs to the option tion fault board Perform a factory initialization CPF20 Option Card Fault Cycle power off and on to the fault Replace the option board Replace the Control board Perform a factory initialization Noise or spike on the commu Cycle power off and on to the CPF21 Self diagnosis Fault of Communication SR Drive Option Card nication line defective option Option CPU Down board Replace the option board Replace the control board Remove any option boards Cycle power off and on to the Dri CPF22 Communication Option Card Code Number Unirecogriizable opti n board ST is connected to the control seek eee Option Type Err Fault board Perform a factory initialization Replace the option board Replace the control board Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 3 Table 6 1 Fault Displays and Processing Digital Operator Display Description Cause Corrective Action Remove power to the Drive Connect the option board once An option board is not MAS Communication Option Card correctly connected to the con Perform a factory initialization CPF23 Tnterc nnection Fault trol board or an option board Option DPRAM Err that is not made for
24. Place the positive red meter lead on terminal V T2 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal W T3 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal U T1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal V T2 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Output Transistors Place the positive red meter lead on terminal W T3 Q1 Q12 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal U TI Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal V T2 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal W T3 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal U TI Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal V T2 Expect
25. s mms The setting of parameter A1 00 determines which international language the Drive will use to display non numerical text The A1 00 parameter will not be changed by an Initialization of the drive A1 03 1110 User Initialize 2220 2 Wire Initial or 3330 3 Wire Initial If the Drive is accidentally set to a language unfamiliar to the operator locating the parameter to change the operator language can be done by performing the following 1 Press the MENU key until the ADV MENU is shown in the upper left corner of the digital operator Press the DATA ENTER key to enter the programming menu The first parameter shown is A1 00 Select Language 3 Pressthe DATA ENTER key again and use the INCREASE and DECREASE arrow keys to choose the preferred language from the list below English Japanese Deutsch German Francais French Italiano Italian Espafiol Spanish Portugues Portuguese ON iR WN YK c B 1 01 Access Level Selection Operation Only Advanced Level factory default A1 01 can be used to allow access to and permission to change all Drive parameters If the Drive is programmed for Operation Only A1 01 0 Operation Only then only the OPERATION and the PROGRAMMING menus are accessible Within the PROGRAMMING menu only parameters A1 01 and A1 04 are adjustable Programming 5 2 If A1 01 is configured for Advanced Access A1 01 2 Ad
26. 5 46 C Cable Ienpth cni RO 2 11 6 18 C apacitors isi ER e Ye hae estate eds 7 2 Capacity Rated Output C 2 C 3 Capacity Related Parameters B 1 Carrier Frequency eet ue ete Gn E CHEER S bees eet 6 12 Lower Emitte ste th ep ER A 8 Parameters ese n eere eee eee eee A 8 Proportional Gain esee A 8 Selection A 8 Upper hat uode e e A 8 B 3 Vs Cable Length 2 11 6 18 Characteristic Frequency 0 6 19 Charge Indicator LED 1 6 2 2 4 5 C 4 Circuit Breakers ej ette es 2 9 E 2 E 3 Clearances aina ic ss a isn cee ees 1 14 s netto rot edo wean teases a 5 6 5 32 5 48 A 4 A 11 A 18 A 19 A 22 Com Setup Parameters sss 5 32 A 11 Communications Modbus Serial D 1 to D 14 Errots eee ein tete 6 2 to 6 4 6 9 Parameters o diee e etd nt ete ed ere e ne A 18 COMPONENTS euet riter EE 1 5 1 6 3 2 7 2 Configuration Electrical arisini nren 1 5 1 6 2 18 Physical d ig 1 7 to 1 10 x ette o 2 2 2 14 2 18 Preventive Maintenance 7 3 Connectors Inspection inserere E 7 2 NAM M n 2 3 to 2 7 Contactors o tsi ERR dea by E 4 Soft Charge eec ea lees 6 8 6 11 6 22 In
27. 805 Liberty Lane West Carrollton OH 45449 U S A Phone 937 847 6200 Fax 937 847 6277 Internet http www motoman com YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION New Pier Takeshiba South Tower 1 16 1 Kaigan Minatoku Tokyo 105 0022 Japan Phone 81 3 5402 4511 Fax 81 3 5402 4580 Internet http www yaskawa co jp YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL COMERCIO LTDA Avenida Fagundes Filho 620 Bairro Saude Sao Paolo SP Brasil CEP 04304 000 Phone 55 11 5071 2552 Fax 55 11 5581 8795 Internet http www yaskawa com br YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH Am Kronberger Hang 2 65824 Schwalbach Germany Phone 49 6196 569 300 Fax 49 6196 888 301 MOTOMAN ROBOTICS AB Box 504 538525 Torsas Sweden Phone 46 486 48800 Fax 46 486 41410 MOTOMAN ROBOTEC GmbH Kammerfeldstrabe 1 85391 Allershausen Germany Phone 49 8166 900 Fax 49 8166 9039 YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD 1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods Cumbernauld G68 9LF Scotland United Kingdom Phone 44 12 3673 5000 Fax 44 12 3645 8182 YEA Document Number TM E7 01 08 01 2008 Rev 08 08 Data subject to change without notice Yaskawa Electric America Inc 77 YASKAWA YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION Paik Nam Bldg 901 188 3 1 Ga Euljiro Joong Gu Seoul Korea Phone 82 2 776 7844 Fax 82 2 753 2639 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SINGAPORE PTE LTD Head Office 151 Lorong Chuan 04 01 New Tech Park Singapore 556741 Singapore Phone 65 282 3003 Fax 65 289 3003 TAIPEI OFFICE AND YATEC ENGINEERIN
28. Ferraz A60Q10 2 600V 10A Ferraz A070GRBO06T 13 700V 6A Ferraz A70QS16 14F 690V 16A 41P5 Ferraz A60Q12 2 600V 12A Ferraz 6 900CPGRC 14 51 25 690V 25A Ferraz 700520 14 690V 20A 42P2 Ferraz A60Q15 2 600V 15A Ferraz 700525 22 700 25 Ferraz 700520 14 690 20 43 7 Ferraz A60Q20 2 600V 20A Ferraz 700520 14 700V 20A Ferraz 700525 14 690 25 44P0 Ferraz A60Q30 2 600V 30A Ferraz 700532 14 700 32 Ferraz 700540 14 690V 40A 45P5 Ferraz A60Q30 2 600V 30A Ferraz 700532 14 700 32 Ferraz 700540 14 690V 40A 47 5 Ferraz A60Q30 2 600V 30A Ferraz 700540 14 700 40 49 0 Ferraz 70 50 4 700 50 Ferraz 500550 4 500 50 Bussmann FWH 80B 500V 80A 4011 Ferraz 70 50 4 700 50 Ferraz 500550 4 500 50 Bussmann FWH 80B 500V 80A 4015 Ferraz 70 70 4 700 70 Ferraz 500580 4 500 80 Bussmann FWH 100B 500V 100A 4018 Ferraz 70 80 4 700 80 Ferraz 5005100 4 500 100 Bussmann FWH 125B 500V 125A 4022 Ferraz 70 80 4 700 80 Ferraz 5005100 4 500 100 Bussmann FWH 125B 500V 125A 4024 F
29. High Slip Braking 00 ccc eeeceeceeeseeeeceeeeeeeceseeeseeeeeenee A 23 H O A Hand Off Auto cesses 3 2 to 3 6 Horsepower converting to 5 59 cette e hene Ra 1 13 Ambient Operating C 4 Hunting Prevention Parameters see OA eode bemus A 23 Troubleshooting sse 6 19 TEC TROO nee eee ER 1 2 1 4 C 4 20 iere o e etevn 1 2 1 4 IGBT Transistor Module Inspecting xis ne Ot ERE NE DS 7 2 Testing sente n ER 6 23 INCREASE Key sese eene 3 3 5 54 Troubleshooting sese 6 15 Indicators 2 2422221 3 2 3 5 3 6 4 5 Initialization Ree ES 5 1 A 2 Mode Selection sss 5 3 2 24 USt 5 3 5 54 A 24 Input Diodes 6 21 6 22 7 2 lu X 2 9 2 10 E 2 E 3 Multi function Terminals Analog Inputs ete eene i eda m 2 12 2 14 2 18 5 33 5 38 A 4 A 9 A 16 Digital Inp ts eidcm ee 2 12 2 14 2 18 6 15 6 19 A 12 to 14 Phase Loss Detection Level 6 7 A 22 Er e E eR 2 18 C 2 Terminal Status U1 10 sss A 26 Voltage ue eae Eae 10 2 C 3 Settings accede trea Ge 4 5 5 22 A 10 Inspection Periodic idonei a 7 2
30. It does not match at EEPROM write Fower AUD Orr Parameter is reset repeatedly Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 12 Verify program settings H1 01 H1 05 Verify that the board is installed Remove power to the Drive and connect the option board once more Check parameters b5 01 b5 15 and b1 03 and correct the error Check parameters E1 04 E1 11 A minimum frequency voltage value may be set higher than the maximum frequency voltage Check the program settings and correct the errors Cycle power off and on to Drive factory initialization A1 03 Auto Tuning Faults Auto tuning faults are shown below When the following faults are detected the fault is displayed on the digital operator and the motor coasts to a stop during operation The fault contact is not activated Table 6 4 Auto Tuning Displays and Processing Digital Operator Display Probable Cause Corrective Action Er 01 Fault Er 02 Minor Fault Er 03 STOP key Er 04 Resistance Er 12 I det Circuit Er 13 Leakage Inductance Fault End 3 Data Invalid There is an error in the data input for autotuning There is an error in the relationship between the motor output and the motor rated current A minor fault is detected during auto tuning The STOP key is pressed during auto tuning and the auto tuning is interrupted Auto tuning is not completed within the specified time The
31. Noise or spike on the control circuit input terminals Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 2 Corrective Action Check all connections verify all user side software configurations Check all connections verify all user side software configurations Remove the digital operator once and then reinstall it Cycle power off and on to the Drive Replace the Drive Remove the digital operator once and then reinstall it Cycle power off and on to the Drive Replace the Drive Perform a factory initialization Cycle power off and on to the Drive Replace the control board Perform a factory initialization Cycle power off and on to the Drive Replace the control board Table 6 1 Fault Displays and Processing Digital Description Cause Corrective Action Operator Display Perform a factory initialization CPF04 CPU Internal A D Converter Fault Noise or spike on the control Cycle power off and on to the Internal A D Err circuit input terminals Drive Replace the control board Perform a factory initialization 05 CPU External A D Converter Fault Noise or spike on the control Cycle power off and on to the External A D Err circuit input terminals Drive Replace the control board Cycle power off and on to the CPF07 ASIC Internal RAM Fault Drive are ieee Control circuit damage C Control circuit damage Replace the Drive Cycle power off and on to the CPF08 Watchdog Timer Fault Drive E WAT WAT Err
32. Parameter b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection is set to digital Off operator as indicated below b1 01 0 Operator Run Indicator The status of the RUN indicator is shown in Table 3 5 when the Drive is in either the Hand or Auto mode Stop Indicator The status of the STOP indicator is shown in Table 3 6 when the Drive is in either the or Auto mode Table 3 6 STOP Indicator Drive is decelerating to a stop or stopped Blinking Drive is in a run condition but the frequency reference is zero or Drive is running in Auto mode and OFF has been pressed Digital Operator 3 6 Drive Main Menu The Drive s parameters and monitoring functions are organized into menu groups that make it easier to read and set parameters The Drive is equipped with five menu selections The five selections and their primary functions are shown in Table 3 7 and are directly available by pressing the MENU key Table 3 7 Drive Main Menu Main Menu Primary Function s The Drive can be run in this menu Use this menu for monitoring values such as frequency reference or output current displaying fault his tory or displaying the fault traces Operation DRIVE uick Settin The Drive can be programmed in this menu g prog QUICK Use this menu to set read the most commonly used parameters Programming The Drive can be programmed in this menu ADV Use this menu to set
33. Programming 5 59 VYE VERIFY ERROR The digital operator will not display which parameters did not match only that the verification found discrepancies in some parameter values NOTE In order to properly use the COPY or VERIFY functions the following Drive specifications must be identical between the Drive that the parameters were read from and the Drive that the parameters are to be written to Model Number e g CIMR E7U2015 Software Number e g 03011 also known as FLASH ID Yaskawa offers DriveWizard software that can also READ COPY and VERIFY Drive parameter values DriveWizard lists all discrepancies between the Drive and a pre saved parameter file when verifying is performed To use DriveWizard first select 02 15 0 Disabled and select 02 06 0 Disabled then remove the digital operator keypad and attach the DriveWizard cable in its place Programming 5 60 T1 Auto Tuning Performing auto tuning energizes the motor so that identification of key motor characteristics can be deter mined Output filters may affect the accuracy of measured characteristics and or result in drive damage Therefore it may be necessary to remove output filters completely prior to executing tuning procedures Consult the factory with questions regarding filter compatibility IMPORTANT B T1 02 Motor Rated Power Setting Range 0 00 to 650 00 kW Factory Default Model Dependent B T1 04 Motor Rated Current
34. kVA Dependent 0 00Hz 0 00Hz 0 00Hz 0 00Hz 6 00Hz Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory Menu No Setting Location Reference Limits caesar eae Determines maximum speed command set as a percentage of Frequency Reference Upper Riss parameter E1 04 If speed command is above this value actual drive 42 01 Limit 0 0 to 110 0 100 0 Quick Setting speed will be limited to this value This parameter applies to all speed Ref Upper Limit command sources Lower ermines minimum speed command set as a percentage of wal y parameter E 1 04 If speed command is below this value actual drive 4 42 02 Limit 2 0 0 to 110 0 0 0 Quick Setting ee speed will be set to this value This parameter applies to all speed Ref Lower Limit command sources ermines the minimum speed command set as a percentage of Master Sp eed Reference arameter E1 04 If speed command is below this value actual drive A A d2 03 Lower Limit 0 0 to 110 0 0 0 Programming speed will be set to this value This parameter only applies to analog Refl Lower Limit inputs Al and A2 Jump Frequencies Jump Frequency 1 85 01 Jump Freq 1 These parameters allow programming of up t
35. see 7 3 DC Bus Fuse Checking m deb ue eb eR 6 22 Fault PUE uote eter SATE Bes 6 7 DC Bus Voltage Checking i Ee hee 6 21 Overvoltage sse 6 6 6 10 C 4 Safety RE deae 1 7 2 Undervoltage sess 6 7 6 11 C 4 DC Injection Braking Curfentzs 6 s UR en 5 9 4 Start Prequeney dero ere 5 9 Time at Start and 5 10 6 20 A 4 DC 2 2 7 4 4 7 4 0 000000 2 8 2 4 DCInj to Stop ccc ak An eine 5 7 ee dt 6 18 DDLY Waiting to 5 8 A 4 Deadband Prohibited Jump Frequency 5 27 A 9 Deceleration Stopping 2 0 5 6 Stop Indicator sese 3 6 Stall Prevention during ssss 5 40 A 20 Mc 5 25 A 7 C 4 2 6 6 6 10 6 18 Decimal converting to A 30 DECREASE Key eee 3 3 5 37 Troubleshooting sse 6 15 Delay Timer Parameters eee A 4 A 5 Diagnostics ssai er a 6 1 to 6 25 D 14 Digital Inputs Connection 2 18 Control Circuit Terminals 2 12 2 14 Parameter conset die eeu A 12 to A 14 Sinking Sourcing 2 17 Troubleshooting esee 6 9 6 15
36. 0 Disabled A communications loss will NOT cause a communications fault 1 Enabled If communications is lost for more than the time specified in parameter H5 09 a commu nications fault will occur Chapter Ref Menu Location Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Enables or disables request to send RTS control 0 Disabled Oorl 1 Programming 1 Enabled Selects the communication protocol 0 Modbus 1 N2 Metasys 0to2 Programming 2 FLN APOGEE Determines how long communications must be lost before a fault is annunciated Works in conjunction 0 0 to 10 0 2 0sec Programming with parameters H5 05 and H5 04 After these parameters are changed drive power must be cycled before the changes will take effect Modbus communication can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1 01 and b1 02 1 Monitoring operation status of the Drive Setting and reading Drive parameters 2 3 Resetting faults 4 Input multi function commands An OR operation is performed between the multi function command input from the DDC and the command IMPORTANT input from multi function digital input terminals S3 to S7 Communications D 4 B Message Format In Modbus communication the master sends commands to the slave and the slave responds The message format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below The length of the data packets is changed by
37. 06H Command Message Response Message Response Message During Normal Operation During Error Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Function code 06H Function code 06H 80H Function Code 86H Register Upper 00H Register Upper 00H Error code 21H Address Lower 01H Address Lower 01H Upper 82H 3 CRC 16 Setting Upper 00H Setting Upper 00H Lower 78H Data Lower 03H Data Lower 03H Upper 98H Upper 98H CRCI Lower 0 CREIG Lower 0BH Fig D 7 Function Code 06H Message Example Communications D 7 Loopback Test 08H The loopback test returns the command message directly as the response message without changing the contents to check the communications between the master and slave Set user defined test code and data values The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave 1 Drive command Messade Response Message Response Message 9 During Normal Operation During Error Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Function code 08H Function code 08H Function code 89H Higher 00H Higher 00H Error Code 01H Test Code Test Code Lower 00H Lower 00H Higher 86H CRC 16 Higher ASH Higher ASH Lower 50H Data Data Lower 37H Lower 37H Higher DAH Higher DAH CRC 16 CRC 16 Lower 8DH Lower 8DH
38. 2 18 Main Menu E ticliOns rre a o ees 3 7 SETUCLUEG atte ep PC die ER 3 8 to 3 14 Maintenance 3 iei titi p e 7 1 Mass Drive Weight sus 1 3 1 7 to 1 10 Master Frequency Reference Terminal Selection QD 5 39 A 16 iE e Er D 2 to D 14 Mechanical Vibration 5 27 6 19 6 20 A 9 Mechanical Resonance 5 27 6 19 6 20 A 9 MENU nennen 3 3 3 7 Menu Trees Digital Operator 3 8 to 3 14 Me t sySs ede iet ert ce iet s lii iv A 18 D 1 A 23 Modbus D 1 to D 14 Baud Rate eee eet 6 9 A 18 2 2 12 2 14 Mode Select ete e rae UNUS 3 3 to 3 6 Model Number sese 1 2 to 1 4 Modified Constants Parameters Menu 3 7 3 14 Molded Case Circuit Breaker MCCB E 2 E 3 Momentary Power Loss RT 5 11 5 39 A 5 A 19 B 3 C 4 Monitor eene 5 50 Parameter 181 022422211 3 9 A 26 A 27 Index 4 Power On Monitor esee 5 51 A 23 User Monitorin 5 51 A 23 A 24 MONITOR Key rer
39. 2 3 to 2 8 Inspecting 5 oodd keds oa Sern PERI 7 2 WALI Bs 2 3 to 2 7 SCEEW SIZES tas itte sient n OD RS 2 3 to 2 7 Terminating Resistance sese 2 15 D 3 Three Wire Operation esses 5 5 Timers Delays ionge tette e diets A 5 Timers 5 55 25 Timer Om Delay nes e 5 9 A 4 Torque Compensation A 8 Torque Detection oo c 6 6 Level xi i ia 5 46 5 47 Nulis n e dee eue tg reram 5 46 Pat ineters E Eae 21 Selection un ocu tentis 5 46 5 47 Tine sioe in 5 46 5 47 Torque Output tene essere treten 6 17 Transformers Preventive Maintenance 7 3 Transistor Module Inspecting Lee entities cies etl ees 7 2 m 6 23 Trim Control Level eere A 9 Troubleshooting eene 6 1 to 6 25 Two Wire Operation eese 5 5 Twelve pulse rectification 2 9 C2 C 3 U Ul Monitor List odd eee 3 9 A 26 A 27 U2 Fault Trace List eter tete 3 10 A 28 U3 Fault History List esse 3 11 A 29 UL File Number 1 3 Undertorque Detection UL 5 46 5 47 Alarm Pault rrr ettet eet eoe tese 6 8 6 11 Parameters ise e eade A 21 Undervolt
40. DCInj Time Start Sets the time length of DC injection braking at start in units of 1 second When b1 03 2 actual DC Injection time is calculated as follows b2 04 10 Output Frequency E1 04 When b1 03 0 this DC Injection Braking Time at parameter determines the amount of time DC Injection is applied to Stop the motor at the end of the decel ramp This should be set to a DCInj Time Stop minimum of 0 50 seconds when using HSB This will activate DC injection during the final portion of HSB and help ensure that the motor stops completely Parameters A 4 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued iid _ Parameter Name Setting Factory Menu f b1 13 1 this parameter instead selects whether the AUTO reference is retained as the new HAND reference setting 0 or the drive will ramp from the AUTO reference to the existing HAND reference setting 1 Motor Pre heat current in of drive rated current This is used to Motor Pre Heat Current keep the motor warm to prevent condensation and is used 0 to100 0 Programming Preheat Current conjunction with a digital input data 60 t2 10 Motor Pre Heat Current 2 Sets the DC preheat current for multi function output setting 80 0 to 10 5 Prosramain Preheat Current2 Motor Preheat 2 as a percentage of Motor Rated Current E2 01 5 5 pent TTUETET a Enables disables and selects the speed search function at start 0 SpdsrchF Disable Speed search at
41. E1 07 E1 08 E1 09 E1 10 E1 11 E1 12 E1 13 E2 01 E2 03 E2 05 F6 01 F6 02 F6 03 F6 05 Factory Setting Factory Setting 2 k i 1 5 10 8 180 L6 01 L6 02 L6 03 L8 01 L8 02 kVA Dep kVA Dep kVA Dep ES o kVA Dep kVA Dep L8 11 L8 12 3l 0 A a 18 18 18 19 n1 01 n1 02 n3 01 n3 02 n3 03 n3 04 01 01 01 02 01 03 1 05 2 01 2 02 3 02 3 03 3 08 3 09 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 N o 0 100 T rz ri zxizxizixiziziz zx xixixixia Ea ba ba AJ ojl N H4 01 01 05 100 01 06 H4 04 01 08 02 01 02 02 02 03 02 04 02 05 02 06 02 07 02 08 02 10 02 12 02 14 02 15 03 01 03 02 T1 02 T1 04 4 05 4 06 4 07 4 08 5 01 5 02 5 03 kVA Dep 5 06 5 07 5 08 5 09 L1 01 kVA Dep kVA Dep r r m T o olo a o eo o o L1 03 L1 04 L1 05 L2 01 L2 02 L2 03 L2 04 L2 05 L3 01 L3 02 L3 04 L3 05 L3 06 L4 01 kVA Dep kVA Dep kVA Dep Voltage Dep EN r i ie ii id Pp o N oj e User Setting Warnings and Cautions This Section provides warnings and cautions pertinent to this product that if not heeded may result in personal injury fatality or equipment damage Yaskawa is not responsible for consequences of ignoring these instructions AWARNING YASKAWA manuf
42. Fig D 8 Function Code 08H Message Example Write In Several Holding Registers 10H Write the specified data to the registers from the specified addresses The written data must be consecutive starting from the specified address in the command message Higher 8 bits then lower 8 bits in storage register address order The following table shows an example of a message when a forward run command has been set at a speed command of 60 0 Hz in the slave 1 Drive by the PLC Command Message Response Message Response Message 9 During Normal Operation During Error Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Function Code 10H Function Code 10H Function Code 90H Start Higher 00H Start Higher 00H Error code 02H Address Lower 01H Address Lower 01H Higher CDH Quanti Higher 00H Olan Higher 00H Lower Lower 02H mara Lower 02H No of data 04H Higher 10H CRC 16 Higher 00H Lower 08H Lead data Lower 01H Higher 02H Next data Lower 58H No of data 2 x quantity Higher 63H CRC 16 Lower 39H Fig D 9 Function Code 10H Message Example IMPORTANT Set the number of data specified using command messages as quantity of specified messages x 2 Handle response messages in the same way Communications D 8 Modbus Data Tables The data tables are shown below The types of data are as follows Reference data monitor data a
43. Hand Hand Mode Sel Hand Auto Selection Closed Hand Open Auto Bypass Drv Enbl Same as 6A except a run command is accepted Motor Preheat 2 Closed Enable motor preheat with the current level as set by b2 10 EmergOverrideF WD Closed Forward Emergency Override Command EmergOverrideREV Closed Reverse Emergency Override Command Terminal S7 Function Selection Parameters A 14 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name 22 Setting Factory Menu ME E NL 1 Setting Location Bir ougus a During RUN 1 Closed when a run command is input or the drive is outputting voltage Zero Speed Closed when drive output frequency is less than Fmin E1 09 Fref Fout Agree 1 Closed when drive output speed equals the speed command within the bandwidth of L4 02 Fref Set Agree 1 Closed when the drive output speed and the speed command are equal to the value in L4 01 within the bandwidth of L4 02 Freq Detect 1 Closed when the drive output speed is less than or equal to the value in L4 01 Terminal M1 M2 Function with hysteresis determined by L4 02 Selection Freq Detect 2 Closed when the drive output speed is Piosrammin Term M1 M2 Sel greater than or equal to the value in 5 5 14 01 with hysteresis determined by 14 02 Inverter Ready Closed when the drive is not in a fault state and not in program mode DC Bus Undervolt Closed when the DC bus
44. If another engineered unit such as fpm or gpm is desired set 1 03 xxxx where Digit5 Digit4 Digit3 Digit2 Digit 1 Digits 1 through 4 set the desired number to be displayed at 10096 speed Digit 5 determines the number of decimal places in the displayed number IfDigit5 2 0 number formatis XXXX IfDigit5 1 number format is XXX X IfDigit5 2 2 number format is XX XX IfDigit5 2 3 number format is X XXX Programming 5 54 For example If 01 03 10425 then at full speed the digital operator will display 42 5 Configuring parameter 01 03 for displaying in terms of an engineering unit is only appropriate if the actual display units have a linear relationship with the actual output speed B 01 05 LCD Contrast Adjustment Setting Range 1 3 or5 Factory Default 3 The contrast setting of the LCD display of the digital operator can be adjusted by the setting of parameter 01 05 The higher the number programmed into 01 05 the darker the background will become Set 01 05 to the value that makes the LCD the easiest to view at the normal viewing distance and angle B 01 06 User Monitor Selection Mode 3 Mon Sequential factory default 3 Mon Selectable B 01 07 Second Line User Monitor Setting Range 1 to 53 Factory Default 2 B 01 08 Third Line User Monitor Setting Range 1 to 53 Factory Default 3 Normally the monitors shown directly below the active monitor are the next two sequential moni
45. Prolibiting 5 8 6 17 4 Reverse Run Stop 2 14 2 18 Ride thru Momentary Power Loss sees 5 11 5 39 A 5 A 19 B 3 C 4 Right Arrow Key nci ette tenete 3 3 R53 485 422 toa ROSE OE 5 5 Communication Wiring eese D 3 Control Circuit Terminals 2 14 2 18 Parameters 5 4 5 32 A 4 A 18 Terminating Resistance eee 2 15 D 3 RTS Control Selection sess A 18 Run Command During Programing seen 5 8 A 4 External Troubleshooting sess 6 16 Selection 3 5 4 6 5 4 4 SOUE e 3 4 5 4 4 Terminals eee ees sie 2 14 2 18 3 1 3 6 Running Signal output 2 14 Stall Prevention during ssss 5 42 A 20 S Safety Circuit sse ted 4 3 4 4 2 14 A 14 Scaling Display Digital Operator esser 5 52 A 23 PI Setpoint 5 20 A 6 Schematic 2 9 2 10 2 17 2 18 S Curve Characteristic essere A 7 SEQ een ore LR RH TOt 3 2 3 5 Sequence Parameters A 4 Serial D 1 to D 14 Address xs eh a E D 4 Baud Rate sess 6 9 A 18 D 2 D 4 Drive Node Address
46. Setting Range Model Dependent Factory Default Model Dependent Auto tuning is required for optimum performance In addition the Drive requires Line To Line Resistance auto tuning before it can properly perform the Estimated Speed Search method This method of speed search allows for bi directional speed search The T1 parameters are found under the Auto Tuning menu To perform auto tuning follow these steps 1 In T1 02 enter the rated power in kilowatts kW of the motor attached to the Drive If the motor nameplate lists the rated power in terms of horsepower HP use the following formula to convert to kW before setting the value of T1 02 kW HP x 0 746 2 In T1 04 enter the Full Load Amps FLA as stamped on the motor s nameplate 3 Press the INCREASE key once to display this ATUNE Rdy Auto Tuning OHz 0 00A Tuning Ready Press HAND key 4 Ifready press the HAND key once to start auto tuning This process will last for approximately 15 seconds Once auto tuning is finished the digital operator will display this ATUNE Tune Successful OHz 0 00A 5 To exit the Auto Tuning menu press the MENU key once NOTE It is possible to a get a Data Invalid error if the either T1 02 or T1 04 fall outside the range of what the Drive will accept as reasonable levels for the programmed size of drive 02 04 Programming 5 61 Notes Programming 5 62 Chapter 6 Diagnostics amp Troubleshooting
47. This chapter describes diagnostics and troubleshooting for the Drive Pat 6 2 Alarm Detection Ires erectis iod e ieee 6 9 Operator Programming Errors 6 12 Auto Tuning Faults ui 6 13 Digital Operator COPY Function 6 14 Troubleshooting eren tee ea od 6 15 Main Circuit Test 1122221 6 21 Drive Date Stamp 6 25 Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 1 Fault Detection When the Drive detects a fault the fault information is displayed on the digital operator the fault contact closes and the motor coasts to stop However a fault with selectable stopping method will operate according to the stopping method selected Ifa fault occurs take appropriate action according to the table by investigating the cause To restart reset the fault with any of the following procedures Turn ON the fault reset signal Set 14 Fault Reset to a multi function digital input H1 01 to H1 05 Press the RESET key of the digital operator Shut off the Drive input power once and then turn on again The Run Command Start Command needs to be removed prior to resetting a fault Resetting a fault by WARNING removing and reapplying power to the
48. Wake Up Level PI Setpoint Boost Setting Setpoint Boost PI Maximum Boost Time Max Boost Time PI Snooze Feedback Level Snooze Feedback Sets the amount of time for a filter on the output of the PI controller Determines whether the PI controller will be direct or reverse acting 0 Normal Output 1 Reverse Output 0 0 limit when PI output goes negative Drive stops 1 Reverse when PI goes negative Drive reverses 0 limit automatic when reverse prohibit is selected using b1 04 0 Disabled 1 Alarm 2 Fault Sets the PI feedback loss detection level as a percentage of maximum frequency E1 04 e PI feedback loss detection delay time in terms of seconds e sleep function start frequency Depends on b5 20 Set display setting Unit of b5 19 U1 24 and U1 38 Input Source Selection for Sleep function Mode 0 PI Setpoint 1 SFS Input This is near the PI output 2 Snooze Sets the PI snooze function start level as a percentage of maximum frequency E1 04 Sets the PI snooze function delay time in terms of seconds When the PI feedback drops below this level normal PI operation starts again Set as a percentage of maximum frequency E1 04 Temporary increase of PI setpoint to create an overshoot of the intended PI setpoint Sets a time limitation for reaching temporarily boosted PI setpoint intended PI setpoint b5 25 PI snooze mode will be activated when PI feedback is above this l
49. detected Main circuit undervoltage UV 1 control power supply error UV2 inrush prevention circuit error UV3 power loss Bit D Missing output phase LF Bit E Modbus communications error CE Bit F Operator disconnected OPR Data link status Bit 0 Writing data Bit 1 Not used Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 Upper and lower limit errors Bit C Bit 4 Data integrity error Bits 5 to F Not used Frequency reference 1 01 Output frequency 1 02 Output voltage reference U1 06 1 03 1 08 1 09 Output current Output power U U U U U U Torque reference Not used Not used Communications D 10 Table D 5 Monitor Data Register No Sequence input status Bit 0 Input terminal S1 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 1 Input terminal S2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit2 Multi function digital input terminal S3 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 3 Multi function digital input terminal S4 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 4 Multi function digital input terminal S5 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 5 Multi function digital input terminal S6 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 6 Multi function digital input terminal S7 1 ON 0 OFF Bits 7 to F Not used Drive status Bit 0 Operation Operating Bit 1 Zero speed Zero speed Bit 2 Frequency agree Matched Bit 3 Desired frequency agree Matched Bit 4 Frequency detection 1 Output frequency L4 01 Bit 5 F
50. output frequency Output Freq 100 max output frequency Output Current 100 drive rated current Output Voltage 100 230V 100 460V DC Bus Voltage 100 400V or 100 800V Output kWatts 100 drive rated power Term Al Level Term A2 Level Terminal FM Monitor Selection Mot SEC Current 100 Motor rated secondary Terminal FM Sel current 1 to 53 2 Programming SFS Output 100 max output frequency PI Feedback Not Used PI Input PI Output 100 max output frequency PI Setpoint Auto Mode Fref 100 max output frequency Hand Mode Fref 100 max output frequency PI Feedback 2 NOTE 100 10V DC output FM gain setting H4 02 H4 02 Terminal FM Gain Setting Sets terminal FM output voltage in percent of 10V 0 0 to 100 0 Prosrammin Terminal FM Gain when selected monitor is at 100 output 1000 0 ds 5 5 H4 03 Terminal FM Bias Setting Sets terminal FM output voltage in percent of 10V 110 0 to 0 094 P Terminal FM Bias when selected monitor is at 0 output 110 0 AR Selects which monitor will be output on terminals and AC Frequency Ref 100 max output frequency Output Freq 100 max output frequency Output Current 100 drive rated current Output Voltage 100 230V or 100 460V DC Bus Voltage 100 400V or 100 800V Output kWatts 100 drive rated power Term Al Level Term A2 Level Terminal AM Monitor
51. ratings Peripheral Devices E 2 Table E 2 Recommended Fuse and Circuit Breaker Ratings per NEC 480Vac Input T ONE Fuse Circuit Breaker m Rae Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Model Hp i d Maximum Maximum CIMR E7U Maximum Continuous Continuous Mons mee Rating A Rating Fuse Rating A Fuse Rating A Input and Output Amps are based on the Normal Duty ND current rating Consult the Specification section for details on the Heavy Duty HD and Normal Duty ND ratings Peripheral Devices E 3 Table E 3 Semiconductor Fuses for Drive I t Protection and Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection 200V Series Drive Recommended Alternate 1 Alternate 2 ModelNo CIMR E7 Model No Rating Fuse Mfr Model No Fuse Mfr Model A60Q12 2 600V 12A Ferraz A070GRB006T13 700V 6A Bussmann 20 500V 20A A60Q12 2 600V 12A Ferraz A070GRB006T13 700V 6A Bussmann 20 500V 20A A60Q15 2 600V 15A Ferraz 700525 22 700A 25A Bussmann FWH 20A14F 500 20 A60Q20 2 600V 20A Ferraz 6 900CPGRC14 51 25 690V 25A Bussmann FWH 25A14F 500V 25A A60Q30 2 600V 30A Ferraz 700532 14 700 32 Bussmann FWH 45B 500V 45A 50 50 4 500V 50A Ferraz 700550 14 700 50 Bussmann FWH 80B 500V 80A 50 80 4 500V 80A Ferraz A50QS70 4 500V 70A Bussmann FWH 80B 500V 80A 50 80 4 500V 80A Ferraz 5005100 4 500V 1
52. refer to the section covering the PI parameters for more information regarding specifying the setpoint source PI parameters are listed in section b5 Parameters H3 10 Terminal A2 Gain and H3 11 Terminal A2 Bias can be used to configure the A2 analog input to match the signal from the Feedback Transmitter The U1 24 monitor PI Feedback can be used to check the PI Feedback level with the digital operator Function Frequency Bias 2 Setting D By setting H3 09 D Frequency Bias 2 the A2 analog input will serve as a bias signal to the Al Speed Command This setting functions the same as a setting of H3 09 0 Frequency Bias 79 v o c 3E RE ae BE NS 8 9 H3 02 H3 02 H3 03 H3 03 10V 1 Voltage 10V A1 Voltage 10V A1 Voltage Factory Default 2 y With H3 03 applied With both H3 03 and analog input bias H3 09 D applied Fig 5 30 Frequency Bias 2 Applied to Analog Speed Command Programming 5 38 Function PI Differential Setting 16 Normal PI operation will adjust the Drive output in order to match the measured feedback value to a desired setpoint When is operated in the differential mode however the Drive output is adjusted in order to maintain a desired differential between two feedback signals When the A2 analog input is configured as a PI Differential H3 09 16 PI Differential the A1 analog input becomes the other PI Differential input The desired differential i
53. 000002 Control circuit terminals 4 oooooooc0oo0000 Main circuit terminals LISLATL3 O 81 he ABCDE 2 HE Charge indicator Ground terminal Ground terminal Models 2018 25 HP 208Vy 4018 30 HP 480V and smaller SN SC SP A1 A2 V ac p MB MC E G 51 52 53 54 55 56 S7 IG 5 S M3 4 M1 M2 E G Ex BEEEEEEPITREI beep ES D U T Control circuit terminals 9 e o o o o o o 9 0 OO aooaa 2 B eS CAUTION XE CHARGE Q Refer to manual for connections Terminal tightening torque Use to 186 Cu wires or equiva
54. 06 or adjust the C1 02 or C1 04 settings for a quicker deceleration Programming 5 44 L4 Speed Command Loss Detection B 14 01 Speed Agreement Detection Level Setting Range 0 0 to 200 0 Hz Factory Default 0 0 Hz B 14 02 Speed Agreement Detection Width Setting Range 0 0 to 20 0 Hz Factory Default 2 0 Hz Parameters L4 01 and L4 02 are user specified levels for use with the Fref Fout Agree 1 Fref Set Agree 1 and Freq Detect and 2 digital output functions Please refer to the H2 Digital Output Parameters in the Programming Manual for more information 14 05 Frequency Reference Loss Detection Selection 9 Pisis Enabled of PrevRef factory default L4 06 Frequency Reference at Loss of Frequency Reference Setting Range 0 0 to 100 0 of previous speed command Factory Default 80 096 of previous speed command The Drive can be configured to compensate for the loss of its external speed command An external speed command is considered lost if it drops 90 of its value in 400115 or less Frequency Reference Output Frequency Fig 5 36 Loss of Frequency Reference Timing Diagram To enable Frequency loss detection set L4 05 1 Enabled a of PrevRef If Frequency Reference Loss Detection is enabled and the reference is lost the Drive continues to operate at the speed commanded by parameter L4 06 When the speed command returns the Drive again follows the speed command Sett
55. 1 5 2 169 4 10kHz 6 2 2 8 1 997 0 2 0 3 0 3 95 C 10 22P2 3 156 8 8kHz 8 5 3 0 1 601 0 3 0 4 0 3 100 C 12 23P7 5 122 9 10kHz 14 0 4 5 0 771 0 5 0 5 0 3 95 C 12 25P5 7 5 94 75 15kHz 19 6 5 1 0 399 1 0 0 6 0 3 95 10 27 5 10 72 69 15kHz 26 6 8 0 0 288 1 0 0 7 0 3 95 C 17 2011 15 70 44 8kHz 39 7 11 2 0 230 1 0 0 8 0 3 95 C 21 2015 20 63 13 10kHz 53 0 15 2 0 138 2 0 0 9 0 3 90 C 17 2018 25 57 87 10kHz 65 8 15 7 0 101 2 0 1 0 0 6 100 C 15 2022 30 51 79 10kHz 77 2 18 5 0 079 2 0 1 0 0 6 90 C 24 2030 40 46 27 10kHz 105 0 21 9 0 064 2 0 1 1 0 6 90 C 20 2037 50 38 16 5kHz 131 0 38 2 0 039 2 0 1 1 0 6 95 C 18 2045 60 35 78 5kHz 160 0 44 0 0 030 2 0 1 2 0 6 100 C 20 2055 75 31 35 8kHz 190 0 45 6 0 022 2 0 12 0 1 105 C 17 2075 75 100 23 10 2kHz 260 0 72 0 0 023 2 0 1 3 0 1 110 C 16 2090 125 20 65 2kHz 260 0 72 0 0 023 2 0 1 5 0 1 100 C 18 2110 150 18 12 2kHz 260 0 72 0 0 023 2 0 1 7 0 1 95 C 20 C6 02 Carrier Frequency E2 01 Motor Rated Current E2 03 Motor No Load Current E2 05 Motor Line to Line Resistance L2 02 Momentary Power Loss Ride Thru Time Note b8 04 Energy Savings Coefficient L2 03 Momentary Power Loss Minimum Base Block Time L2 04 Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time L8 02 Overheat Pre Alarm Level L8 06 Input Phase Loss Detection Level Capacity Related Parameters B 4 Table B 4 480VAC Drives Factor
56. 1 Parameter List Continued Enables or disables the motor thermal overload protection 0 Disabled 1 Std Fan Cooled Enabled 2 Std Blower Cooled 3 Vector Motor Determines how much time will elapse prior to a motor overload fault OL1 when motor amps exceed the value set in parameter E2 01 by 10 Actual OL1 trip time will vary depending on severity of overload Operation selection when the motor temperature analog input H3 09 E exceeds the OH3 alarm level 1 17V 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop 3 Alarm Only Stopping method when the motor temperature analog input H3 09 E exceeds the OH4 level 2 34V 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop Delay Time applied to motor temperature analog input H3 09 E for filtering purposes PwrLoss Ridethru Enables and disables the momentary power loss function Disabled Drive trips on UV1 fault when power is lost PwrL Ride Thru t Drive will restart if power returns within the time set in L2 02 CPU Power Active Drive will restart if power returns prior to internal power supply shut down In order for a restart to occur the run command must be maintained throughout the ride thru period Determines the power loss ride thru time This value is dependent on the capacity of the drive Only effective when L2 01 1 Used to allow the residual motor voltage to decay before the drive output turns back on After a power loss if
57. 2 0 0 7 1 0 95 C 15 4220 400 450 27 13 2kHz 370 0 96 0 0 020 2 0 0 8 1 0 100 C 15 4300 500 21 76 2kHz 500 0 130 0 0 014 2 1 0 9 1 0 95 C 15 Note b8 04 Energy Savings Coefficient C6 02 Carrier Frequency E2 01 Motor Rated Current E2 03 Motor No Load Current E2 05 Motor Line to Line Resistance L2 02 Momentary Power Loss Ride Thru Time L2 03 Momentary Power Loss Minimum Base Block Time L2 04 Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time L8 02 Overheat Pre Alarm Level L8 06 Input Phase Loss Detection Level Capacity Related Parameters B 5 Notes Capacity Related Parameters B 6 Appendix C Specifications This appendix details the standard Drive Specifications Standard Drive C 2 Specifications C 1 Standard Drive Specifications The standard Drive specifications are listed in the following tables 208 240VAC Table C 1 208 240VAC Drive Specifications 3 phase 200 208 220 230 or 240VAC Proportional to input voltage 201 Rated voltage Rated frequency Hz 3 phase 200 208 220 230 240VAC 50 60 Hz T9 T9 T5 T 22 10 15 Allowable Allowable frequency fluctuation fluctuation DC Reactor Optional Built in Measures for power supply harmonics 12 Pulse Not possible Possible Rectification Note
58. 2 87 5 500 x 13 x 1 875 22P2 55972 18 07 18A 13 141 x 330 x 46 3 23P7 3 09 5 500 x 13 x 1 875 5 25P5 PRODUNT TS 1 4 141 x 330 x 46 7 5 6 61 8x 14x 2375 27P5 55973 60 07 60 3 206 x 355 x 60 10 aa 10 8 9 3125 x 16 x 3 125 2 X X 2 2015 5973 100 07 100 A 49 236 x 408 x 80 20 2018 25 2022 9 48 3 5315 x 14 40625 x 7 30 2030 BUA 4 3 90 x 366 x 180 40 13 23 4 750 x 17 750 x 6 6875 2037 FS5973 160 40 160 A 6 120 x 451 x 170 50 2045 24 25 5 125 x 24x 9 4375 60 2055 DISCE 11 130 x 610 x 240 480 Vac 40P4 2 43 5 500 x 13 x 1 875 0 5 0 75 40P7 10 1 1 141 330 46 1 41 5 1 5 2 e 2 87 5 50x 13 x 1 875 x X 1 43P7 55972 18 07 18A 13 141 x 330 x 46 5 45P5 7 5 47P5 10 4 63 8 125 x 14x 1 9375 49P0 4011 35 9 55972 35 07 35A 2 1 206 x 355 x 50 15 4015 8 82 9 250 x 16 x 2 50 25 4018 pore M oga 4 236 x 408 x 65 30 7 5 3x 13 x 7 250 4024 4030 70 FS5972 70 52 70 A 34 80 x 329 x 185 40 50 an 10 36 3 5x14 375x 7 x 4045 5972 130 35 130A 47 90 x 366 x 180 75 4055 100 13 23 4 750 x 17 750 x 6 6675 4075 5972 170 40 170 A 6 120 x 451 x 170 125 4090 24 25 5 125x 24x 9 4375 150 4110 Foe M 11 130 x 610 x 240 200 EMC Compatibility F 3 oS Ground clip Ground plate Fig G 1 Grounding Surface Layout The grounding surfaces must be highly conductive bare metal Remove any varnish or paint from grou
59. 24 3 94 1 4 4 98 6 50 7 87 1 73 5 91 2 44 1 97 1 10 53 20301 115 40 17 13 8 66 24 21 10 98 30 1 16 10 24 3 94 1 4 4 98 6 50 7 87 1 73 5 91 2 44 1 97 1 10 59 40241 52 0 40 17 18 8 66 21 06 10 98 30 1 16 1024 3 94 1 4 4 98 6 50 7 87 173 5 91 1 97 1 97 1 10 53 40301 67 2 50 17 13 8 66 21 06 10 98 30 1 16 10 24 3 94 1 4 4 98 6 50 7 87 1 73 5 91 1 97 1 97 1 10 53 40371 77 0 60 21 06 10 24 25 00 12 95 30 1 36 11 22 4 13 1 4 5 18 6 69 8 07 1 73 6 69 1 97 1 97 1 10 88 480V 40451 96 0 75 21 06 10 24 28 15 12 95 30 1 36 11 22 4 13 1 4 5 18 6 69 8 07 1 73 6 69 2 44 1 97 1 10 88 40551 125 100 21 06 10 24 28 15 12 95 30 1 36 11 22 4 13 1 4 5 18 6 69 8 07 1 73 6 69 2 44 1 97 1 10 88 FOR REFERENCE ONLY UNLESS PROPERLY ENDORSED IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE ADEQUATE COOLING THE DRIVE MUST BE POSITIONED TO ALLOW A MINIMUM OF FREE AIR SPACE OF 1 2 INCHES ON SIDES AND 5 INCHES TOP AND BOTTOM V YASKAWA DR BY RIP 10 04 APPVL TA 10 04 Physical Installation 1 8 DIMENSIONS E7 PROTECTED CHASSIS 208 230V 162 415 AMPS 480V 156 304 AMPS
60. 5 45 cde ine eter e t AR 3 11 A 29 Listthg Of i 6 2 epi D ABD S Db 3 3 A 13 A21 dlc 3 10 28 Feedback PI 5 15 A 5 Differential 5 36 16 Loss 2000 011 5 18 A 6 Square Root Function Activation 5 23 A 6 Field Service sss Inside Back Cover Field Wiring hee Te 2 3 2 12 FLA Motor eee 4 6 5 31 6 13 A 11 B 3 Flash ID eo eee A 27 Floating Point Up Down Control 6 14 A 12 Forward Run Stop 2 14 2 18 Programming seen 5 4 5 5 A 4 Frequency 15 Frequency Output Pure C 4 Command Selection 5 4 Lower Lit iu recs 5 26 A 9 Max Output eie ere 5 29 A 10 C 2 Meter Analog Monitor sss A 17 Mid Output eee ette pee ea A 10 Minimum Output sese 6 16 A 10 Monitor U1 02 sse A 26 Prohibited sess 5 27 6 19 6 20 A 9 Rated see ne eie i ete C 2 Setting C 4 Setting Signal Speed C 4 Troubleshooting 2 5 27 6 20 Upper Limit cete 5 26 6 20 A 9 Frequency Reference speed command Analog 2 12 2 18
61. 6 1 Date Stamp Location PRON 00 722 4 Manufacture Date 5 Inspector Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 25 Notes Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 26 Chapter 7 Maintenance This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection of the Drive Please refer to these instructions to ensure that the Drive receives the proper maintenance to maintain overall performance Periodic Inispectioni o rre b YR eo 7 2 Preventive Maintenance enn 7 3 Heatsink Cooling Fan 7 4 Removing and Mounting the Terminal Card 7 6 Maintenance 7 1 Periodic Inspection Check the following items during periodic maintenance The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises There should be no abnormal heat generation from the Drive or motor The ambient temperature should be within the Drive specification of 10 C to 40 C 14 F to 104 F The output current value shown in parameter U1 03 should not be higher than the motor rated current for an extended period of time The cooling fan in the Drive should be operating normally Always turn OFF the input power before beginning inspection Confirm that the digital operator indicators on the front cover have all turned OFF and then wait an additional five minutes before beginning the inspection Be sure not to touc
62. 9 10 Most Recent Fault Fault Message 10 Cumulative Operation Time at 518 Most Recent Faul Elapsed Time 5 Cumulative Operation Time at 6 Most Recent Faul Elapsed Time 6 Cumulative Operation Time at 748 Most Recent Faul Elapsed Time 7 gth Cumulative Operation Time at 8 Most Recent Fauli Elapsed Time 8 Cumulative Operation Time at 9 Most Recent Fauli Elapsed Time 9 Cumulative Operation Time at 10 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 10 Note Faults such as CPF00 CPF01 CPF02 CPF03 UV1 and UV02 are not stored in fault history Parameters A 29 Decimal to Hex Conversion Decimal Hex 33 Parameters A 30 Appendix B Capacity Related Parameters This appendix lists the parameters affected by the Drive Capacity setting of 02 04 Drive Capacity ep ate B 2 Capacity Related Parameters B 1 Drive Capacity Parameter 02 04 sets the Drive capacity according to the model number Parameter 02 04 will need to be adjusted when replacing a control board If a Control PCB is changed the first time the Drive is powered up parameter 02 04 must be set to the appropriate value listed in Table B 1 for the Drive model number After properly setting parameter 02 04 a 2 wire or 3 wire initialization must be per formed by setting par
63. Contact Yaskawa Electric America Inc as required Documents may include the following TM E7 02 Programming Manual included on CD ROM with product TM E7 11 Modbus Manual included on CD ROM with product TM E7 20 LONWORKS Manual included on CD ROM with product TM E7 21 APOGEE Manual included on CD ROM with product TM E7 22 Metasys Manual included on CD ROM with product TM E7B 01 Bypass This manual should be used when the E7 Drive is packaged with Bypass Control DriveWizard Software and Manual Included on CD ROM with product Option Instructions Included on CD ROM with product Introduction iv Table of Contents Quick Reference Parameter 08 ne Inside front cover Warnings and CalltiOlis erm he tance ies ass as el heu qua ae ae ep iii Chapter 1 Physical Installation 1 1 E7 Model Number and Enclosure Style 1 2 Confirmations upon dtu tute eee Uden pont 1 3 Component vi aree quo Gau usd 1 5 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions 1 7 H at Loss EUR 1 11 Checking and Controlling the Installation 1 13 Installation Orientation and
64. Cubic M Hr Oto 11 eue LPH Liters Hr LPS Liters Sec Bar Bar 9 Pa Pascals 10 C DegCelsius 11 Mtr Meters Energy Saving REDI Energy Saving Control Energy Savings function enable disable selection b8 01 Selection 0 Disabled Oorl Quick Setting Energy Save Sel 1 Enabled Energy Saving Coefficient 0 0 to kVA b8 04 Value 655 00 Dependent Programming Energy Save COEF Power Detection Filter Time B kW Filter Time Used to fine tune the energy savings function 0 to 2000 Search Operation Voltage Limit 0 to 100 0 Programming Search V Limit Accel Decel Grol Acceleration Dime Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequenc 30 0858 Quick Settin Accel Time 1 4 y 5 02 Deceleration Time 1 0 0 30 0sec 2 Decel Time 1 Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero ose Quick Setting s the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency when 6000 0 30 0sec MARC Programming ected via a multi function input s the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero when 30 0sec 2 Programming ected via a multi function input Fast Stop Time e time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero for the Fast Stop Time Stop function Accel Decel Sets the frequency for automatic switching of accel decel times Switch Frequency Fout lt CI 11 Accel Dece Time 2 0 0 to 0 0Hz Programming Ace Dec SW Freq Fout gt 11 Accel Decel Time 1 200 0 Y Multi function input Multi Acc De
65. Drive while the Run Command is applied may cause the Drive to start unexpectedly Therefore make sure all personnel are clear from the Drive motor and machine prior to reset ting the Drive Table 6 1 Fault Displays and Processing Digital Operator Display ee ell Option Communication Error BUS rint 25352 After initial communication was Option Com Err 6 established the connection was lost CE Modbus Communication Error Memobus Com Err Control data was not received correctly for two seconds Operator Communication Fault 1 Transmission between the Drive and the digital operator cannot be established COM ERR OP amp INV within 5 seconds after supplying power External RAM of CPU is defective Operator Communication Fault 2 01 After communication started with the COM ERR OP amp INV digital operator a communication fault occurred for 2 seconds or more CPF02 Baseblock Circuit Fault BB Circuit Err Baseblock circuit fault at power up CPF03 EEPROM Fault EEPROM Error EEPROM fault check sum not valid Cause Connection is broken master has stopped communicating Connection is broken master has stopped communicating Digital operator cable not securely connected digital operator defective control board defective Control circuit damage Digital operator cable not securely connected digital operator defective control board defective Gate array hardware failure during power up
66. For some applications reverse motor rotation is not applicable and may even cause problems e g air handling units pumps etc Setting parameter b1 04 to 1 or 3 will cause the Drive to ignore any inputs for reverse operation Setting parameter b1 04 to either 2 or 3 will change the motor shaft rotation when a Forward Run command is given by exchanging the order of the output phasing The factory default setting of parameter b1 04 is 1 Disabled When b1 04 1 Disabled reverse operation is prohibited and no exchanging of output phasing occurs Drive terminal S2 is a dedicated input for reverse Run Stop B b1 07 Local Remote Run Selection Sating 0 24 Cycle Extern Run factory default When the Drive is switched between the Local Hand mode the digital operator to the Remote Auto mode determined by b1 01 and b1 02 there is the possibility that a Run command is already present i e a contact closure between S1 and SN when b1 02 1 Terminals Parameter b1 07 determines whether the Drive will Ignore the external Run command until it is removed and re instated b1 07 0 Cycle Extern Run OR Accept the already present Run command and immediately begin acceleration to the commanded speed b1 07 1 Accept Extrn Run Programming 5 8 When switching from local mode to Auto mode when b1 07z 1 Accept Extrn Run the Drive may start IMPORTANT unexpectedly if the Run command is already applied Be sure
67. Loss Ride thru An equivalent setting is L2 01 1 PwrL Ride Thru t with L2 02 set to a time longer than the control power supply can be maintained after power is lost Note The run command must be held during power loss for any power loss ride thru capability to be possible It is for this reason that 3 wire control is not recommended for use with the Momentary Power Loss function L3 Stall Prevention 13 01 Stall Prevention Selection During Accel General Purpose factory default Inciligen 13 02 Stall Prevention Level During Accel Setting Range 0 to 200 of Drive rated output current Factory Default 120 of Drive rated output current The stall prevention during acceleration function adjusts the acceleration time in order to prevent OC fault trips during acceleration If L3 01 0 Disabled stall prevention is disabled If the load is large enough and the acceleration time short enough the Drive may fault and stop If L3 01 1 General Purpose then the standard stall prevention function is enabled When the output current exceeds the level set by the L3 02 parameter the Drive will discontinue accelerating and maintain speed If during acceleration the output current comes within 15 of the level set by parameter L3 02 the acceleration time is lengthened Once the output current level has dropped below the L3 02 level acceleration will begin again with the acceleration rate reach
68. Motor Rated Current 1 kVA Motor Rated FLA Set to the motor nameplate full load amps Quick Setting 2 03 No Load Current Sets the magnetizing current of the motor Dependent Dependent Programming Motor Line to Line Phase to phase motor resistance normally set by the autotuning 0 000 to kVA E2 05 Resistance Programming routine 65 000 Dependent Term Resistance Com OPT Setup Sets the stopping method for option PCB communications error BUS fault Active only when a communications option PCB is Operation Selection after installed and when b1 01 or b1 02 3 Communication Error 0 Ramp to Stop Comm Bus Fit Sel 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop 3 Alarm Only Stopping Method for Ramp to Stop External Fault from Coast to Stop Communication Option Card Fast Stop EFO Fault Action Alarm Only Current Monitor Display Unit Selection Current Unit Sel A Display Amps Display 100 8192 Drive Rated Current Detection Selection of Exter nal Fault from Communica Always detected Piosrammim tion Option Card Detected only during run 5 5 EF0 Detection Parameters A 11 Terminal S3 Function Selection Terminal S3 Sel Terminal S4 Function Selection Terminal S4 Sel Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory Menu 52 Seng er Digital Inputs aaa ice mera 3 wire control FWD REV selection for 3 wire sequence Local Remote Sel Hand Aut
69. Option PCB A Display factory default 100 8192 Drive Rated Current A communication option card can read the Drive s DPRAM to access the current monitor The format of the current reading in the DPRAM will be determined by parameter F6 05 F6 05 0 A Display gt Current is a decimal number corresponding to actual Amperes 6 05 1 100 8192 Drive Rated Current gt Current reading is a number where 8192 100 of Drive rated output current H3 Analog Inputs H3 02 Terminal A1 Gain Setting Setting Range 0 0 to 1000 0 Factory Default 100 0 B H3 03 Terminal A1 Bias Setting Setting Range 100 0 to 100 0 Factory Default 0 096 In order to have the Drive properly interpret an analog input it may be necessary to apply a gain and or a bias to the signal The analog inputs have a resolution of 11 bits 1024 steps Using the factory default settings for the analog input s gain and bias the 0 10Vdc or 4 20mA signal at the analog input will yield a 0 100 speed command span Note 11 bits if 0 to 10 Vdc A1 A2 A3 and 10 bits if 4 20mA A2 only Gain 100 Output Frequency Bias 0 ov 10V 4mA 20mA Analog Input Signal Fig 5 23 Output Frequency as Commanded Via Analog Input If a different span of analog input signal is desirable it will be necessary to adjust the gain the bias or both to allow the analog input level to generate the desired frequency co
70. Output Freq ee s Output Current at Most Recent Fault 12209 Output Current Output Voltage at Most Recent Fault Output Voltage DC Bus Voltage at Most Recent Fault DC Bus Voltage Output Power at Most Recent Fault Output kWatts Input Terminal Status at Most Recent Fault The format is the same as U2 11 for 01 10 Input Term Sts U2 07 U2 08 U2 09 Output Terminal Status at Most Recent Fault The format is the same as for U1 11 Output Term Sts Drive Operation Status at Most Recent Fault The format is the same as U2 13 for U1 12 Inverter Status U2 14 Cumulative Operation Time at Most Recent Fault Elapsed time Note Fault trace is not executed at CPF00 CPFO1 CPF03 UVI and UV2 Parameters A 28 Fault History List Table A 4 Fault History List Fault History Most Recent Fault Last Fault 254 Most Recent Fault Fault Message 2 344 Most Recent Fault Fault Message 3 4 Most Recent Fault Fault Message 4 Cumulative Operation Time at Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 1 Cumulative Operation Time at 2 4 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 2 Cumulative Operation Time at 34 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 3 Cumulative Operation Time at 4 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 4 5 Most Recent Fau Fault Message 5 6 Most Recent Fau Fault Message 6 7 Most Recent Fault Fault Message 7 8 Most Recent Fault Fault Message 8 9th Most Recent Fau Fault Message
71. Peripheral Devices E 1 Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection The following peripheral devices may be required between the AC main circuit power supply and the Drive input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T Refer to applicable codes to determine the devices necessary for a given installation Use Table E 1 or E 2 when selecting fuses and circuit breakers per the NEC When selecting semiconductor fuses to provide Drive input 121 protection and comply with UL CSA NEC and CEC branch circuit short circuit protection requirements select one of the fuses in Table E 3 or E 4 Fuse Type UL designated Time Delay or Non Time Delay Fuse Class CC J T RK1 or RK5 Designators typical KTK FNQ FRS LPJ LPS JKS JJN or JJS Voltage Rating 250V for Drives with 208 240V input 600V for Drives with 480V input Circuit Breaker Type Inverse Time MCCB or Instantaneous Trip MCP Voltage Rating 600V Table E 1 Recommended Fuse and Circuit Breaker Ratings per NEC 208 240Vac Input Input Output Fuse Circuit Breaker Amps Amps Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Model H 1 CIMR E7U 1 24 Maximum Continuous Continuous Time Delay Non Time Delay Rating Rating Fuse Rating A Fuse Rating A Maximum CB Rating A 0 5 0 75 75 100 1 P 125 50 457 1 Input and Output Amps are based on the Normal Duty ND current rating Consult the Specification section for details on the Heavy Duty HD and Normal Duty ND
72. System Programming 5 5 If b1 01 3 Option PCB but a network card is not installed in 2CN an 05 operator programming IMPORTANT 3 e error will be displayed on the digital operator and the Drive will not run B b1 03 Stopping Method There are four methods of stopping the Drive when the Run command is removed Sating 0 22 Ramp to Stop factory default DC Injection to Stop 0 Ramp to stop When the Run command is removed the Drive will decelerate the motor to 0 rpm The rate of deceleration is determined by the active deceleration time The factory default Decel Time is in parameter C1 02 When the output frequency has dropped below the DC Injection Start Frequency in b2 01 Default 0 5HZ DC current will be injected in the motor at a level determined by b2 02 50 Default The DC Injection condition will occur for the time specified by b2 04 0 0 Default to establish the end point of the ramp DC injection can be used to insure the motor is at zero rpm prior to the Drive shutting off ON CLOSED Run Command OFF OPEN 100 b2 01 Output Frequency Deceleration Time C1 02 ___ gt 0 TIME 44 0204 gt Fig 5 4 Deceleration to Stop The actual deceleration time can be determined by the following formula Output Freq at time of stop command Time to Stop x Setting of active Decel Time 02 or C1 04 Maximum Frequency El 04 If
73. Terminal Status Monitor U1 11 A 26 Transistors IGBT Inspecting eie er ee 7 2 Testing iet ect ate e ioa eee Eats 6 23 Voltage Monitor 01 06 A 26 Outputs 2222 2 2222 2 14 2 18 A 17 A 18 Outputs Digital 0 022 2 0 2 12 2 14 2 18 A 15 Over Current eee reete 5 7 5 45 6 5 Overheat OH Alarms Faults gens 5 45 5 48 6 5 6 6 6 10 A 19 A 22 B 3 And Auto Restart sess 5 45 Cooling Fin Heatsink 5 49 6 5 6 10 C 4 IDEIV S et aive mec epp REI 1 13 A 22 Motor isse 6 6 6 10 6 18 A 19 Parameters ace ctore rt er A 19 A 22 Pre Alarnz 4 ese 6 10 A 22 Overload Alarms Faults nes eae 5 45 6 6 And Auto Restart 5 45 Capacity x ene ee rei ei ee ie C 4 Bing ER 5 31 6 5 Motor bise ern 6 6 A 15 A 19 PrOtGGtlOfi c xac rte teet A 19 C 4 Overtorque See Torque Detection 5 46 A 21 Overvoltage Protection 5 28 6 6 6 10 C 4 And Auto Restart 5 45 DC Bus See DC Bus Voltage 6 6 6 10 C 4 Index 5 P Parameters Accel Decel C1 01 C1 11 sss A 7 Analog Inputs H3 02 13 A 16 Analog Outputs H4 01 H4 08 A 17 A 18 Auto Tuning T1 02 T1 04
74. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole motor When selecting the actual motor and Drive be sure that the Drive s rated output current is applicable for the motor s rated current A phase shifting transformer is required on the power supply for 12 pulse rectification Outputratings Powersupply characteristics characteristics Table C 1 208 230VAC Drive Specifications Continued 2085 m zo kVA 60 no w n LECERRICLI 150 mw ilm gt 1 mo 380 150 Proportional to input Volts 12012 Rated voltage V Rated frequency Hz 3 phase 200 208 220 230 240VAC 50 60 Hz Rated input curent 3 amp 25 39 7 Allowable voltage fluctuation 1095 Allowable frequency fluctuation 5 DC Reactor Built in Outputratings Powersupply characteristics Measures for power supply characteristics harmonics 12 Pulse Rectification Possible Note The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole motor When selecting the actual motor and Drive be sure that the Drive s rated output current is applicable for the motor s rated current A phase shifting transformer is required on the power supply for 12 pulse rectification Specifications C 2 480VAC Table C 1 480VAC Drive Specifications 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480VAC Proportional to input voltage 120 Hz
75. a CIMR E7U2030 4055 Drive and smaller in a panel to obtain the 113 F 45 C ambient operating temperature Observe the following precautions when installing the Drive inaclean location which is free from oil mist and dust inan environment where metal shavings oil water or other foreign materials will not get into the Drive enclosure ina location free from radioactive materials ina location free from harmful gasses and liquids in a location free from excessive vibration ina location free from chlorides in a location away from direct sunlight on a non combustible surface Controlling the Ambient Temperature To enhance the reliability of operation the Drive should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature variations If the Drive is installed in an enclosure use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 113 F 45 C Protecting the Drive from Foreign Matter During Drive installation and project construction it is possible to have foreign matter such as metal shavings or wire clippings fall inside the Drive To prevent foreign matter from falling into the Drive place a temporary cover over the Drive Always remove the temporary cover from the Drive before Start Up Otherwise ventilation will be reduced causing the Drive to overheat Physical Installation 1 13 Installation Orientation and Clearances Install the Drive vertically s
76. analog input can be programmed to perform many different functions The setting of parameter H3 09 determines which of the following functions the A2 analog input will perform Function Frequency Bias Setting 0 By setting H3 09 0 Frequency Bias the A2 analog input will serve as a bias signal to the Al Speed Command The effect of using A2 for a frequency bias is that the level of the A2 analog input will be summed with the level of the Speed Command analog input A1 For example if H3 02 100 H3 03 0 and the A2 analog input level is 1 Vdc the Speed Command profile will look like the figure below If Al 0 Vdc the Speed Command would be 10 of the programmed maximum frequency because A1 0 Vdc A2 1 Vdc 1 Vdc Speed Command 10V 40 7 Bias Input Terminal A1 Voltage ov 1V 9V 10V Fig 5 28 Effect of Frequency Bias Function on Speed Command It should be noted that the bias applied by the A2 analog input functions differently than the level set by the H3 03 If both biases are used simultaneously they will sum together The level of the A1 analog input as a percentage of the maximum input either 10 Vdc or 20 mA can be viewed by the U1 15 monitor The level of the A2 analog input as a percentage of the maximum input can be viewed by the U1 16 monitor The bias applied by setting H3 09 0 Frequency Bias can be used in conjunction with the parameter bias H3 03 In that case the H3 03
77. are tight Inspect the control circuit connections including the shield and determine if a motor safety circuit is connected If normally closed these contacts may be wired in series with the RUN command contacts which are between terminals S1 and SN of the Drive No special programming is required Refer to Chapter 2 Electrical Installation Fig 2 7 Alternately these contacts could be wired between terminals S3 and SN as External Fault Inputs and may be either normally closed or normally open contacts Record any other connections to the Drive using the blank terminal connection drawing in Chapter 2 Electrical Installation Fig 2 7 to determine if special programming is required for the following Multi function Inputs refer to Appendix A Parameter List Multi function Outputs refer to Appendix A Parameter List Multi function Digital Inputs refer to Appendix A Parameter List Multi function Analog Outputs refer to Appendix A Parameter List Serial Communications refer to Appendix A Parameter List THIS COMPLETES THE DRIVE START UP PREPARATION Start Up 4 4 Drive Start Up Procedures 1 O 2 O 3 O 4 1 55 O 6 E13 Confirm that all three phases are present and that the input voltage is correct for the Drive being set up Measure the voltage on the line side of the Drives Molded Case Circuit Breaker disconnect and record below Table 4 1 Input Voltage Che
78. band and only accelerate past it when the commanded speed rises above the upper end of the dead band for increasing references Similarly the Drive will clamp the frequency reference just above the dead band and only decelerate past it when the command speed falls below the lower end of the dead band for decreasing references Output Frequency User Frequency Reference Fig 5 21 Jump Frequency Characteristics Setting the center point of the dead band with the d3 01 through d3 03 parameters and setting the width of the dead band with parameter d3 04 determines the dead band characteristics The programmer can set up to three Jump Frequencies If multiple Jump Frequencies are programmed the following rule applies d3 01 d3 02 lt d3 03 Programming 5 28 E1 V f Pattern B 1 01 Input Voltage Setting Setting Range 155 0 to 255 0V 208V 240V Models 310 0V to 510 0V 480V Models Factory Defaults 208 0V 208V Models 240 0V 240V Models 480 0V 480V Models Set the Input Voltage parameter E1 01 to the nominal voltage of the connected AC power supply This parameter adjusts the levels of some protective features of the Drive 1 e Overvoltage Stall Prevention etc E1 01 also serves as the Maximum Base Voltage used by the Preset V Hz curves E1 03 0 to D B E1 03 V f Pattern Selection Sating The Drive operates utilizing a set V f pattern to determine the appropriate output voltage level for eac
79. because the support associate may refer to this e Complete nameplate information from the drive and the motor Confirm that Drive Nameplate Output amps is equal to or greater than Motor Nameplate amps e list with your parameter settings e sketch of the electrical power train from AC line to motor including filters and disconnects Field Service Start Up Assistance Factory Repair Replacement Parts and Other Support Contact Drives Technical Support for help with any of these needs Technical Training Training is conducted at Yaskawa training centers at customer sites and via the internet For information visit www yaskawa com or call 1 800 Y ASKAWA 927 5292 From the phone menu dial 4 for Product Training then 1 for Product Training Support in Other Countries Yaskawa is a multi national company with offices and service representation around the world To obtain support always contact the local distributor first for guidance and assistance Contact the closest Yaskawa office listed for further assistance E7 Drive YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA INC Drives Division 16555 W Ryerson Rd New Berlin WI 53151 U S A Phone 800 YASKAWA 800 927 5292 Fax 847 785 2730 Internet http www yaskawa com YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA INC Chicago Corporate Headquarters 2121 Norman Drive South Waukegan IL 60085 U S A Phone 800 YASKAWA 800 927 5292 Fax 847 887 7310 Internet http www yaskawa com MOTOMAN INC
80. by slowing motor rotation by DC injection braking before starting Increase parameter b2 03 DC injec tion braking time at start setting If the Accepted Speed Command Does Not Rise to the User Speed Command Input B The Speed Command is within the jump frequency range When the jump frequency function is used the output frequency cannot be set within the jump frequency range Check to be sure that the Jump Frequency parameters d3 01 to d3 03 and Jump Frequency Width parameter d3 04 settings are suitable B The frequency reference upper limit has been reached The output frequency upper limit 1s determined by the following formula Freq Ref Upper Limit Maximum Output Frequency E1 04 x Frequency Reference Upper Limit d2 01 100 Check to be sure that the parameter E1 04 and d2 01 settings are suitable Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 20 Main Circuit Test Procedure Prior to removing any protective cover or wiring any part of the Drive remove all power sources including main input power and control circuit power Wait a minimum of 5 minutes after power removal before WARNING removing any cover The charge lamp located within the Drive should be off prior to working inside Even if the charge lamp is off one must measure the AC input output and DC Bus potential to insure safe levels prior to resuming work Failure to adhere to this warning may result in personal injury or death Before attempting any troublesh
81. current kVA kVA Auto Tunis 7 Rated Current Used only during an auto tune Dependent Dependent Parameters 25 Monitor List Table A 2 Monitor List Parameter Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Description Frequency reference speed command monitor when in auto mode frequency reference speed command setting location when in hand mode Units changeable via 01 03 put Frequency Output frequency speed monitor Units changeable tput Freq via o1 03 Ou i Frequency Reference Frequency Ref put Current tput Current put current monitor put Voltage Output Voltage Displays Drive output voltage Be i vie Displays DC Bus Voltage Output Power Output kWatts Displays Drive output power Dis isplays Drive input terminal status 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FWD run Terminal S1 is ON REV run Terminal S2 is ON Multi function input 1 Terminal S3 is ON Multi function input 2 Terminal S4 is ON Multi function input 3 Terminal S5 is ON Multi function input 4 Terminal S6 is ON Input Terminal Status Input Term Sts Output terminal ON OFF Check 001000000 L 1 Multi function Contact 1 output 1 Terminal M1 M2 is ON Multi function Contact 2 Output Terminal Status output Terminal M3 M4 Output Term Sts is ON Not used 1 Fault output Terminal MA MB is ON
82. digital operator display Effective only when 1 to 53 2 Programming 2nd Monitor Sel 01 06 1 Third Line User Monitor Sets the U1 monitor always displayed on the Sth line 01 08 Selection of the digital operator display Effective only when 1 to 53 3 Programming 3rd Monitor Sel 01 06 1 Sets unit display for the frequency reference parameters and frequency related monitors when 01 03240 WC InchOfWater PSI Ib SqrInch GPM Gallons Min 2 F DegFahrenheit 01 09 2 Reference Display CFM Cubic fi Min A Yu bi lav Unit CMH Cubic M Hr 9 re Ae S oat ah SR LPH Liters Hr LPS Liters Sec Bar Bar 9 Pa Pascals 10 C DegCelsius 11 Mtr Meters mcm Key Selections aT Determines the status of the Local Remote key if Local Remote Key Function present 02 01 Selection 0 Disabled 1 Programming Local Remote Key 1 Enabled Has no function when H O A operator is connected Determines if the off key on the digital operator will OFF Key Function During Auto stop the drive when drive is operating from external 02 02 Run terminals or serial communications 1 Programming Oper OFF Key 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Allows storing of current parameter values as a User Initialization Selection at parameter A1 03 0 No Change No user parameter set active User Parameter Default Value 1 Set Defaults Saves current parameter settings as user 02 03 initialization A1 03 now allows selecting lt 1110 gt 0 to 2 Programming User D
83. filter on the output of the torque compensation function Increase to add torque stability decrease to improve torque response 1 Normal Duty 1 2 Normal Duty 2 Carrier frequency sets the number of pulses per second of the output voltage waveform 0 Low Noise Carrier frequency is randomly moduled for lower audible noise Fe 2 0 kHz Fe 5 0 kHz Fe 8 0 kHz Fe 10 0 kHz Fe 12 5 kHz Fe 15 0 kHz Program Determined by the settings of C6 03 thru C6 05 0 4 to 15 0 Maximum carrier frequency allowed when C6 02 F kHz 0 4 to 15 0 Minimum carrier frequency allowed when C6 02 kHz Sets the relationship of output frequency to carrier frequency when C6 02 F Preset Reference Speeds Digital preset speed command 1 Used when b1 01 0 and when in hand mode Setting units are affected by 01 03 0 to 99 Digital preset speed command 2 Selected via multi function input terminals Setting units are affected by 01 03 Digital preset speed command 3 Selected via multi function input terminals Setting units are affected by 01 03 Digital preset speed command 4 Selected via multi function input terminals Setting units are affected by 01 03 Speed command used when a jog is selected via multi function input terminals Setting units are affected by 01 03 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running Parameters A 8 kVA Dependent kVA Dependent
84. i 3 n S L2 T L3 C1 2 152 B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 S L2 T L3 Hi 2 EIE Q D B1 B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 1 5 5 R LI S L2 T L3 H1 BI B2 U TI V T2 WT 4 ne R LI S L2 T L3 21 2 B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 M4 a P 5 p RILI S L2 T L3 1 Ha B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 22 1 2 5 600Vac UL Approved S L2 3 1 2 vinyl sheathed B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 22 1 or equivalent 2 5 i 3 44 3 R LI S L2 T L3 2 V T2 W T3 5 0 el 2 221 2 5 3 44 3 5 0 3 88 5 10 0 6 221 2 5 ie 3 44 3 5 0 2 2 R LI S L2 T L3 CE 1 U T1 V T2 88 5 W T3 RULI1 81121 TI L31 10 0 4 45 1 5 1 2 88 5 10 0 E 2 R LI S L2 TL3 88 5 1 0 V T2 W T3 RI L11 81121 T1 L31 10 0 53 5 45 1 5 1 2 88 5 10 0 Electrical Installation 2 3 Table 2 1 208 240Vac Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications Clamping Recommended Terminal Torque Wire Size Screws Ib in AWG mm S L2 T L3 1 U TI MIO 199 4 0 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 SI L21 TI L31 22 5 100 2037 Drive Model Nominal CIMR E7U Hp Terminal Symbol 88 5 10 0 a 203 6 2 0 23 67 4 12 4 14 S L2 T L3 Bi U TI MIO 199 300 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 SI L21 TI L31 22 5 152 p 88 5 4 M8 A4 199 3 0
85. into place For Drives CIMR E7U2022 4030 and larger insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove on the Drive and secure the terminal cover by lifting it up toward the top of the Drive Physical Installation 1 15 Removing Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover Models CIMR E7U20P4 thru 2018 0 5HP to 25HP 208V 240V and 40P4 thru 4018 0 5HP to 30HP 480V For Models CIMR E7U2018 4018 and smaller remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures to remove the Digital Operator and front cover Removing the Digital Operator Press on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock then lift the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove it as shown in Fig 1 11 Fig 1 11 Removing the Digital Operator B Removing the Front Cover Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the direction of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of cover in the direction of arrow 2 to remove it as shown in Fig 1 12 Fig 1 12 Removing the Front Cover B Attaching the Front Cover Mount the front cover to the Drive by performing the steps to remove the front cover in reverse order 1 Donotmountthe front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover this may cause the Digital Operator to malfunction due to imperfect contact 2 Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Drive and press the lower part of t
86. main circuit configurations of the Drive are shown in Table 2 4 Table 2 4 Drive Main Circuit Configurations 208 240 VAC CIMR __ _ 20P4 to 2018 CIMR 2022 and 2030 1 2 Hp to 25 Hp 30 Hp to 40 Hp Power Control supply circuits Power Control supply circuits CIMR 2037 to 2110 50 Hp to 150 Hp Control circuits Input fuses or molded case circuit breakers are required for proper branch circuit protection for all Drives Failure to use recommended fuses circuit breakers See Appendix E may result in damage to the wiring Drive and or personal injury Control power is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power supply for all Drives Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12 pulse rectification Electrical Installation 2 9 Main Circuit Configurations 480Vac The 480Vac main circuit configurations of the Drive are shown in Table 2 5 Table 2 5 Drive Main Circuit Configurations 480 VAC CIMR 40P4 to 4018 CIMR __ _ 4024 to 4055 1 2 Hp to 30 Hp 40 Hp to 100 Hp SSSA Ste ete Control circuits
87. method Note Communication error details are stored until an error reset is input errors can be reset while the Drive is operating Communications D 11 Broadcast Data The following table shows the broadcast data Broadcast data can be written to Table D 6 Broadcast Data Register Operation signal Bit 0 Run command 1 Operating 0 Stopped Bit 1 Reverse operation command 1 Reverse 0 Forward Bits 2 and 3 Not used Bit4 External error 1 Fault set using H1 01 Bit 5 Error Fault 1 Reset command set using H1 02 Bits 6 to B Not used Bit C Multi function digital input terminal S5 input Bit D Multi function digital input terminal S6 input Bit E Multi function digital input terminal S7 input Bit F Not used 0002H Frequency reference 30000 100 Note Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously Enter Command When writing parameters to the Drive from the PLC using Modbus communication the parameters are temporarily stored in the constant data area in the Drive To enable these parameters in the parameter data area use the Enter command There are two types of Enter commands 1 Enter commands that enable parameter data in RAM 2 Enter commands that write data to EEPROM non volatile memory in the Drive at the same time as enabling data in RAM The following table shows the Enter command dat
88. more frames smaller than the standard size motor per the Drive capacity AC power supply OFF Set frequency Start using reference speed detected 7 Output frequency Output current 10ms Minimum baseblock time L2 03 x 0 75 1 1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency 2 immediately before the baseblock 2 After AC power supply recovery the motor waits for the minimum Speed Search Wait Time b3 05 Fig 5 10 Speed Search Estimated Speed Method after momentary power loss where the power loss time is less than the minimum baseblock time power supply ON Start using speed detected 7 Set frequency reference Output frequency Output current oo M gt i lt E 10 ms Minimum baseblock time Speed Search Wait Time L2 03 b3 05 Note If the frequency immediately before the baseblock is low or the power supply off time is long operation may be the same as the search in case 1 Fig5 11 Speed Search Estimated Speed Method after momentary power loss where the power loss time exceeds the minimum baseblock time Current Detection Method b3 01 2 or 3 The current detection method starts searching from a predetermined frequency while monitoring the Drive output current to determine when the rotor speed and the Drive output speed frequency match The current detection version is not bi directional
89. nameplate b2 03 DC Injection Braking Time at Start b2 04 DC Injection Braking Time at Stop Setting Range 0 00 to 10 00 Seconds Factory Default 0 00 Seconds The Drive can be programmed to automatically DC Inject for a predetermined amount of time prior to accelerating to speed b2 03 and or at the end of a Ramp to stop b2 04 Parameter b2 03 can be used to stop a rotating motor prior to attempting acceleration i e a wind milling fan If DC Injection braking at start or Speed Search is not enabled attempting to drive a spinning motor may cause nuisance tripping Parameter b2 04 can be used to resist any residual motion of the load after the deceleration has finished Output Frequency DC injection kel 52 03 52 04 Fig 5 9 DC Injection Braking During Starting and Stopping Parameter b2 04 also serves the function of affecting the length of time DC Injection to stop b1 03 2 DC Injection to Stop will occur Programming 5 11 B b2 09 Motor Pre Heat Current Setting Range 0 to 100 Factory Default 0 A DC current can be circulated within the motor windings while the motor is stopped The current will produce heat within the motor and prevent condensation Parameter b2 09 determines the percentage of Drive rated output current that will be used for the motor pre heat function This function can be useful in applications where the motor sits for extended periods of time in humid conditions Motor pre he
90. off 5 26 Output Setpoint i p5 23 d PI Feedback m NR d PE b5 24 55 23 Snooze OFF Function TIME Either PI Feedback reaches the new boosted setpoint value or the maximum boost time b5 26 is reached Fig 5 19 Snooze Function Operation B b5 27 PI Snooze Feedback Level Setting Range 0 to 100 Factory Default 60 This is a second method of initiating the Snooze Function If the PI feedback level exceeds the PI Snooze Feedback Level b5 27 then the Drive output shuts off Once the PI feedback drops below the PI Snooze Deactivation Level b5 24 then normal Drive and PI operation return Snooze activates if both b5 22 and b5 27 conditions are met There is no time delay for wake up Programming 5 23 B b5 28 Pl Feedback Square Root Function Activation Seting Oe Disabled factory default Fabled If b5 28 1 Enabled the square root of the PI feedback is compared to the PI Setpoint in order to determine appropriate Drive output to properly regulate the system This is helpful in cases where the measured feedback is pressure but the PI loop needs to regulate flow B 05 29 Pl Square Root Gain Setting Range 0 00 to 2 00 Factory Default 1 00 A multiplier applied to the square root of the feedback B 05 30 Output Square Root Monitor Selection a O Disabled factory default Fabled If the PI Function is regulating the f
91. parameters in the Drive Follow the key operations below Fig 3 6 to access the Quick Setting Menu QUICK QUICK Reference Source Main Menu Quick Setting Terminals M Fig 3 6 Quick Setting Parameter Access Procedure Use and keys to scroll through the Quick Setting parameter list Table 3 11 Quick Setting Parameter List Parameter Parameter Name Number b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection b1 02 Run command Selection b1 03 Stopping Method Selection b5 01 PI Mode Selection b5 02 Proportional Gain Setting b5 03 Integral Time Setting b5 31 PI Unit Selection 01 Acceleration Time 1 C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 d2 01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit d2 02 Frequency Reference Lower Limit 1 01 Input Voltage Setting E2 01 Motor Rated Current H3 08 Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection H3 09 Auxiliary Terminal Function Selection H3 13 Master Frequency Reference Terminal Selection This parameter s menu location is Quick Setting when b5 01 1 and Programming when b5 01 0 Digital Operator 3 12 Programming Menu ADV This menu is used to set read every parameter in the Drive Follow the key operations below Fig 3 7 to access the Program ming Menu ADV ADV Initialization Main Menu Programming Select Language Fig 3 7 Programming Menu Access Procedure gt Use L y and keys to scroll through the Programming parameter group list For complete parameter listing se
92. position Start Up 4 8 21 Check the signal for proper polarity Observe if the speed command can achieve the minimum and maximum speeds desired If not perform the following For 0 10Vdc input Terminal A1 1 With no input adjust Bias H3 03 setting until an output of 0 0 Hz is obtained 2 With full scale input adjust Gain H3 02 setting until an output of 60 0 Hz or other desired maximum frequency is obtained For 4 20mA input Terminal A2 1 With 4mA input adjust Bias H3 11 setting until an output of 0 0 Hz is obtained 2 With 20 mA input adjust Gain H3 10 setting until an output of 60 0 Hz or other desired maximum frequency is obtained THIS COMPLETES THE DRIVE START UP PROCEDURE Start Up 4 9 Notes Start Up 4 10 Chapter 5 Basic Programming This Manual contains descriptions of all user accessible parameters contained in the Drive Parameters are listed in alpha numerical order Parameter number and name along with a detailed description and its settings are described on the following pages A1 InitializatiOn iiie hene o epa aeri porn 5 2 bI 1 1 pesi 5 4 D2 DG Brain ies i e RI iere re od ipa ge 5 10 Speed Search iuc p rr nd ena DE EOD EU 5 12 D5 PLEEUFICUOT ioter peer terere eg E e ien te ie teg eoe eres 5 16 b8 Energy Savings coo ode pa two enit Ber ears 5 25 Cl oo IBI Io RN 5
93. read every parameter Modified Constants The Drive can be programmed in this menu VERIFY Use this menu to set read the parameters that have been modified from their factory default settings Auto Tuning The Drive can be programmed in this menu A TUNE Use this menu to auto tune the Drive in order to optimize motor performance as well as utilize the bi directional speed search feature Digital Operator 3 7 Main Menu Structure The menu selection display will appear when the MENU key is pressed from a monitor or setting display While viewing the menu selection display press the MENU key repeatedly to scroll between the menu selections MENU gt DRIVE Main Menu Main Menu Main Menu Main Menu Main Menu Auto Tuning Fig 3 2 Main Menu Structure Press the DATA ENTER key to enter the desired menu selection Modified Consts Modified Parameters Digital Operator 3 8 Operation Menu DRIVE This menu is used for setting a speed command or monitoring values such as output frequency and output current It is also used for displaying the fault history and the fault traces The Drive must be in this menu in order to run see parameter b1 08 Leaving the Drive in a menu other than the Operation Menu will prohibit the Drive from running While IMPORTANT running if the Drive is in a menu other than Operation and the run command is removed and
94. setpoint and the feedback 05 07 Offset Adjustment Setting Range 100 0 to 100 0 Factory Default 0 0 The PI Offset Adjustment parameter has two different uses Parameter b5 07 serves different functions depending on whether it is used on a standard PI loop or a Differential PI loop Parameter b5 07 causes an offset to be applied to the output of the PI function in a non Differential PI loop Every time the PI output is updated the offset b5 07 is summed with the PI output This can be used to artificially kick start a slow starting PI loop If the Drive is configured for Differential PI Regulation H3 09 16 PI differential then this parameter is the target setpoint for the differential to be maintained between the signal measured on analog input A1 and the signal measured on analog input A2 B 05 08 PI Primary Delay Time Constant Setting Range 0 00 to 10 00 Seconds Factory Default 0 00 Seconds Acts as a time based filter that lowers the responsiveness of the PI function but also makes the function more stable when the setpoint varies rapidly or when the feedback is noisy B 05 09 PI Output Level Selection Sating 0 Normal Output direct acting factory default Reverse Output reverse acting Normally the output of the PI function causes an increase in motor speed whenever the measured feedback is below the setpoint This is referred to as direct acting response However if b5 09 1 Rever
95. speed command Bias 100 Output Frequency Gain 0 ov 10V 4mA 20mA Analog Input Signal Fig 5 26 Output Frequency with Inverted Gain and Bias Settings Programming 5 35 B H3 08 Terminal A2 Signal Level Seting o o 7 20mA The H3 08 parameter Terminal A2 Signal Level allows the programmer to specify the signal that will be applied to the A2 analog input The A2 analog input can accept either a 0 10 Vdc or 4 20 mA signal as a reference The Drive also has DIP switch S1 on the removable terminal board that must be set for the proper reference signal into the A2 analog input The S1 2 dipswitch setting determines the internal resistance of the A2 input while parameter H3 08 determines how the Drive interprets the measured signal a NK 51 GRY BZ wes 001 BONG resistance qr D 2 DIP Switch S1 1 located on lt terminal board Fig 5 27 DIP Switch 51 Table 4 DIP Switch S1 SEC I e 1 Setting RS 485 and RS 422 terminating OFF No terminating resistance resistance ON Terminating resistance of 110 Q OFF 0 to 10 V internal resistance 20 kQ ON 4 to 20 mA internal resistance 250 Default Input signal for analog input A2 Programming 5 36 B H3 09 Terminal A2 Function Selection BewmyBm Frequency Bis y The A2
96. the Drive Cycle power off and on to the is attached to the control board Drive Replace the option board Replace the control board Check for an external condition EFO Communication Option Card External Fault external condition Verify the parameters Opt External Fit exists Verify communication signal Ext En S3 External Fault at Terminal S3 EF4 External Fault at Terminal 54 Ext Fault S4 Eliminate the cause of an An external fault condition external fault condition EFS External Fault at Terminal S5 exists connected to a multi Ext Fault S5 function digital input Ext E S6 External Fault at Terminal S6 EF7 Remove the fault from a multi ee function digital input PI Feedback Loss Verify Drive is programmed to This fault occurs when PI Feedback Loss PI Feedback source receive the PI Feedback source Detection is programmed to fault e g transducer sensor signal b5 12 2 and the building automation signal is PI Feedback lt PI Feedback Loss Detection Dot installed correctly or is not Check to ensure the PI Feedback Level b5 13 for the PI Feedback Loss working source is installed and working roperl Detection Time b5 14 propery FBL Feedback Loss Remove the motor and run the Drive without the motor Output Ground Fault i GF Drive output grounding current has Motor lead is shorted 10 Ground Fault exceeded 50 of the Drive rated output ground DCCT defective current Check the motor f
97. the setting of L1 03 Cause PI Feedback source e g transducer sensor build ing automation signal is not installed correctly or is not working Motor is underloaded Cooling fan s are not working high ambient temperature a heating unit in close proximity to Drive is present An external overheat condition exists connected to one of the multi function input terminals S3 S4 S5 S6 or S7 Overheating of motor Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 10 Corrective Action Verify Drive is programmed to receive the PI Feedback source signal Check to ensure the PI Feedback source is installed and working properly Check the motor for a phase to phase short Check the Drive for a phase to phase short at the output Verify C1 01 and C1 02 are set correctly Check load conditions Ensure the values in L6 02 and L6 03 are appropriate Check application machine status to eliminate fault Check for dirt build up on the fans and cooling fins Reduce the ambient temperature around the Drive Remove the heating unit Check for an external condition Verify the program parameters H1 01 thru H1 05 Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load Recheck the accel decel time C1 01 and C1 02 Recheck the V F pattern E1 01 thru E1 13 Recheck the motor rated current value E2 01 Check the digital operator connector Verify the setting of 02 06 Table 6 2 Alarm Displays and Processing Di
98. to change parameter C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 from 30 seconds to 40 seconds Step Number B Table 3 14 Changing a Parameter in the Programming Menu Digital Operator Display DRIVE Rdy Frequency Ref u U1 02 01 03 Main Menu Operation QUICK Main Menu Quick Setting ADV Main Menu Programming ADV Initialization Select Language ADV Accel Decel Accel Time 1 ADV Accel Time 1 30 0sec 0 0 6000 0 30 0sec Description The Drive is first powered up Press the MENU key to scroll to Operation menu Press the MENU key to scroll to Quick Setting menu Press the MENU key to scroll to Programming menu Press the DATA ENTER key to enter Programming menu Press the INCREASE key until C1 01 Accel Decel is displayed Press the SHIFT RESET key to move flashing digit to the right Digital Operator 15 Table 3 14 Changing a Parameter in the Programming Menu Digital Operator Display Decel Time 1 c 0 0 0 6000 0 30 0 ADV Decel Time 1 Ci 02 030 0sec 0 0 6000 0 30 0sec ADV Decel Time 1 1 02 30 0 0 0 6000 0 30 0 ADV Decel Time 1 Ci 02 0060 0 0 0 6000 0 30 0 ADV Decel Time 1 Ci 02 000 0 0 0 6000 0 30 0 ADV Entry Accepted ADV Decel Time 1 40 0sec 0 0 6000 0 30 0sec
99. 0 Hz 1 100 E1 04 2 to 39 RPM Enter the number of motor poles 40 to 39999 User display Desired set display value is set at Max output frequency A 4 digit number The number of digits from the right the decimal point is displayed Example If 200 0 is displayed at Max output frequency set 12000 When 01 03240 user units the unit selected in 01 09 will be displayed for D1 01 to D1 17 U1 01 U1 02 and U1 20 Set Value Description LCD display becomes dark Standard setting LCD display becomes light 1 0 00 to 2 50 1 to 20 100 to 200 0 0 to 10 0 30 to 1200 6 to 53 1to4 0 to 39999 0to5 15096 6 3 Menu Location Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Factory setting changes to 2 when b5 01 1 Parameters A 23 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory Menu Selects the U1 monitors displayed on the 4th and Sth lines of the digital operator display User Monitor Selection Mode 0 3 Mon Sequential Displays the next 2 sequential U1 x 91 06 Monitor Mode Sel monitors Dor 9 Programming 1 3 Mon Selectable Displays U1 monitors set by 1 07 and 01 08 Second Line User Monitor Sets the U1 monitor always displayed on the 4th line 01 07 Selection of the
100. 0 terminals S1 and S2 become Run and Stop respectively The multi function digital input that was set to 0 will function as a Forward Reverse input for the Drive When the Forward Reverse input is open the Drive will run in the Forward direction and when the input is closed the Drive will run in the Reverse direction 3 wire operation a momentary closure gt 50mS of S1 will cause the Drive to run provided that S2 is held closed The Drive will stop anytime the S2 SN connection is broken If the 3 wire configuration is implemented via a 3 wire Initialization 1 03 3330 3 Wire Initial then terminal S5 becomes the Forward Reverse input Stop Operation switch switch NC contact NO contact zug 1 Run command run on momentary close Stop command stop on momentary open Forward reverse command multi function input zr Sequence input common Fig 5 3 Wire Control To issue a run command via serial communication Set b1 02 2 Serial Com and connect the RS 485 422 serial commu nication cable to R R S and S on the removable terminal block Be sure to use this setting when using the LONWORKS amp option card To issue the Run command via a network communication card other than LONWORKSQO option card Set b1 02 3 Option PCB and plug a option board into the 2CN port on the Control PCB Consult the manual supplied with the option board for instructions on integrating the Drive into your LonWorks
101. 00 i c o m Output Frequency 4 Drive Output Voltage Interrupted 5 a b2 04 DC Injection Brake 0 a lt i Minimum Baseblock DC Injection Brake Time 5 100 12 03 10 Output Frequency Fig 5 6 DC Injection Braking to Stop If an overcurrent OC fault occurs during DCInj to Stop lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 IMPORTANT until the fault no longer occurs 3 Coast w Timer When the Run command is removed the Drive will turn off its output and the motor will coast to a stop If a Run command is input before time T operation wait time expires the Drive will not run and the Run command will need to be cycled before operation can occur The time T operation wait time is determined by the output frequency when the Run command is removed and the active deceleration time C1 02 Programming 5 7 Ignored Run Command ON Run Command CLOSED 3 Deceleration OFF Time C1 02 OPEN E o E 100 96 Minimum Drive Output 9 Baseblock Output Frequency Voltage Time L2 03 Interrupted 5 1 o Minimum 100 Maximum 0 i Output Output Frequency Frequency Timer Value T Output Frequency at Stop Command Input Fig 5 7 Coast to Stop with Timer B b1 04 Reverse Operation Seng 0 4 Reverse Enabled Reverse Disabled factory default Exchange Phas ExchgPhs Rev Dsbl
102. 00A Bussmann FWH 100B_ 500V 100A 50 125 4 500V 125A Ferraz A50QS150 4 500V 150A Bussmann FWH 175B 500V 175A ASOP150 4 500V 150A Ferraz A50QS175 4 500V 175A Bussmann FWH 200B 500V 200A 50 150 4 500V 150A Ferraz 5005200 4 500 200A Bussmann FWH 200B_ 500V 200A 50 200 4 500V 200A Bussmann FWH 200B 500V 200A Bussmann FWH 225B 500V 225A 50 250 4 500V 250A Ferraz A30QS275 4 300V 275A Bussmann 170M4610 690V 315A 50 300 4 500V 300A Ferraz 005350 4 300 350A Bussmann FWH 350A 500V 350A A50P350 4 500V 350A Bussmann FWH 400A 500V 400A Bussmann FWH 450A 500V 450A 50 450 4 500V 450A Ferraz A070URD33KI0550 700V 550A Bussmann FWH 500A 500V 500A 50 600 4 500V 600A Ferraz A70P600 4 700V 600A Bussmann FWH 600A 500V 600A ASOP600 4 500V 600A Ferraz A70P700 4 700V 700A Bussmann FWH 700A_ 500V 700A Denotes letter A through Z Peripheral Devices E 4 Table E 4 Semiconductor Fuses for Drive I t Protection and Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection 400V Series Recommended Drive ModelNo CIMR E7 40P4 Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Ferraz Model No A60Q10 2 Rating 600V 10A Fuse Mfr Ferraz Model No A070GRBO06T 13 700V 6A Fuse Mfr Ferraz Model No 700516 14 690 16 40 7
103. 1 determines whether the communication error is seen as a fault or an alarm If F6 01 3 Alarm Only then the fault output is not energized upon a communication error All other settings of F6 01 cause the fault output to energize The setting of F6 01 does not apply to any of the embedded com munication protocols used at the RS 485 422 terminals on the removable terminal board See parameters H5 0X B F6 02 Option PCB External Fault Detection Selection Seting 0 Always Detected factory default Detected only during operation B F6 03 Option PCB External Fault Stopping Method Coast to Stop factory default Alum Only If an external fault is received from the LONWoRKS or other communication option card the settings of F6 02 and F6 03 will determine the Drive operation in reaction to the fault signal Parameter F6 02 will determine if the external fault is always recognized F6 02 0 Always Detected or only recognized when the Run command is active F6 02 1 Detected only during operation Programming 5 33 Once the fault is recognized parameter F6 03 will determine the operation of the Drive If parameter F6 03 is set to anything other then 3 the Drive will fault and a stopping sequence is begun If F6 03 3 Alarm Only then the external fault is treated like an alarm Operation will continue and an EFO fault will flash on the digital operator B F6 05 Current Scaling via Communication
104. 1000A 500V 1000 4300 Ferraz A70P900 4 700V 900A Bussmann FWH 1000A 500V 1000 Bussmann FWH 1200A 500V 1200A Denotes letter A through Z Branch Circuit Overload Protection All models have built in UL evaluated motor overload protection Motor overload protection is also provided in accordance with the NEC and CEC Additional branch circuit overload protection is not required for single motor applications Peripheral Devices E 5 Peripheral Devices The following peripheral devices may be required to be mounted between the AC main circuit power supply and the Drive input terminals R LI S L2 and T L3 CAUTION Never connect a general LC RC noise filter to the Drive output circuit Never connect a phase advancing capacitor to the input or output sides or a surge suppressor to the output side of the Drive When magnetic contactor is installed between the Drive and the motor never turn it on or off during operation For more details on peripheral devices contact the manufacturer Magnetic Contactor Mount a surge protector on the coil When using a magnetic contactor to start and stop the Drive do not exceed one start per hour AC and DC reactor When using models E7U20P4 thru E7U2018 and E7U40P4 thru E7U4018 on a power supply transformer with a capacity of 600kVA or more install an AC or DC reactor The reactor improves the input power factor and provides protection t
105. 2 333 421 499 619 844 964 168 182 208 232 333 1010 421 499 69 1 84 964 A 3 6 4 6 7 8 23 31 88 162 192 15 60 415 2018 Physical Installation 1 11 Table 1 4 400V Class Heat Loss Data Drive Rated TYPE Inverter Output Cooling Ul CIMR E7ULI Capacity Current kVA 40P4 40P7 41P5 42P2 43P7 44P0 45P5 47P5 49P0 4011 4015 296 169 465 Fan 4018 389 201 590 Fan 4022 4024 297 989 Fan Physical Installation 1 12 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site Install the Drive as described below and maintain optimum conditions WARNING The Drive heatsink temperature may exceed 158 F 70 C Therefore mount the Drive to a surface suitable for high temperature Installation Site Locate the E7 Drive as close as possible to the motor Install the Drive under the following conditions in UL Pollution Degree 1 amp 2 environments This excludes wet locations where surfaces may become conductive due to moisture and contaminant loading Table 1 5 Installation Site Specifications Ambient Operating Temperature Humidity Plenum Rated NEMA Type 1 14 F to 104 F 10 to 40 C 95 RH or less no condensation Yes Open Chassis 14 F to 113 F 10 to 45 C 95 RH or less no condensation No Protective covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Drive It is recommended to remove the protective covers before operating
106. 2 Forward Jog Closed drive runs forward at speed command entered into parameter d1 17 13 Reverse Jog Closed drive runs in reverse at speed command entered into parameter d1 17 14 Fault Reset Closed Resets the drive after the fault and the run command have been removed Fast Stop N O Closed Drive decelerates using C1 09 regardless of run command status Fast Stop N C Closed Normal operation Open Drive decelerates using C1 09 regardless of run command status Terminal S5 Function Timer Function Selection Input for independent timer controlled by b4 01 and b4 02 3 2 wire Terminal S5 Sel Used in conjunction with a multi function digital output 3 wire PI Disable Turns off the PI controller and PI setpoint becomes speed command Program Lockout Closed All parameter settings can be changed Open Only speed command at U1 01 can be changed TrimCtl Increase Closed Increase motor speed by value in d4 02 Open Return to normal speed command Not effective when using d1 01 thru d1 04 as a speed command Must be used in conjunction with Trim Ctrl Decrease Trim Ctl Decrease Closed Decrease motor speed by value in d4 02 Open Return to normal speed command Not effective when using d1 01 thru d1 04 as speed command Must be used in conjunction with Trim Ctrl Increase Programming Parameters A 13 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory Menu De
107. 2 4 DIP Switch S1 Location Table 2 9 DIP Switch S1 Function Setting OFF No terminating resistance RS 485 and RS 422 terminating resistance ON Terminating resistance of 110Q Factory Default OFF OFF 0 10 Vdc internal resistance 20KQ Input method for analog input A2 ON 4 20mA internal resistance 250Q Factory Default ON Electrical Installation 2 15 Shunt Connector CN15 The shunt connector CN15 is described in this section Shunt connector along with parameters H4 07 and H4 08 select the sig nal range of the analog output terminals FM and AM Shunt connector CN15 is only available when the optional Terminal Card with the 4 20mA Analog Output Monitor is installed Model No ETC618120 See Chapter 7 Maintenance for installation of the optional Terminal Card The function of various shunt connector CN15 configurations is shown in Table 2 10 Fig 2 5 Shunt Connector CN15 Location Table 2 10 Shunt Connector CN15 Configuration Options CN15 Analog Output Monitor Configurations EJ Voltage Output 0 10 Vdoc for terminals FM AC CH1 and AM AC CH2 Eg Current Output 4 20mA for terminals FM AC AM AC CH2 Voltage Output 0 10 Vdoc for terminals FM AC CH1 Current Output 4 20mA for terminals AM AC CH2 Current Output 4 20mA for terminals FM AC CH1 Voltage Output 0 10 Vdc for terminals AM AC CH2 The software configuration for the analog output monitor signal type is lis
108. 25 1319 850 1496 945 30 7 827 307 14 512 679 665 394 173 24 2 40P41 18 1 2 3 4 1047 4 96 1102 551 28 28 630 1 54 335 473 197 110 66 40P71 24 1 1047 4 96 1102 551 28 28 154 335 473 197 110 66 41 51 37 2 1047 4 96 1102 551 28 28 630 1 54 335 473 110 66 42P21 53 3 1047 496 11 02 551 28 28 709 232 552 197 1 10 88 43 71 7 6 5 1047 4 96 11 02 551 28 28 709 232 552 197 110 bag 45P51 125 75 1047 4 96 1102 551 28 709 232 552 197 110 47P51 17 0 10 1122 7 32 11 81 787 28 28 787 258 14 511 621 307 138 132 49P01 21 0 15 1122 7 32 11 81 787 28 28 787 258 14 463 1511 621 307 158 132 40111 270 20 1122 732 1181 z87 28 28 787 258 14 4463 5 11 621 307 158 132 40151 34 0 25 1319 850 1378 945 47 827 307 14 512 679 6 65 394 1 73 22 40181 40 0 30 1319 850 13 78 945 30 47 827 07 14 512 679 665 394 1 73 22 FOR REFERENCE ONLY UNLESS PROPERLY ENDORSED IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE ADEQUATE COOLING y YASKAWA THE DRIVE MUST BE POSITIONED TO ALLOW A MINIMUM OF FREE AIR SPACE OF 1 2 INCHES ON SIDES AND RIP 9 29 04 5 INCHES TOP AND BOTTOM DR BY pa APPVL TA 929 04 Physical Instal
109. 26 d2 Reference Speed Command Limits 5 27 Jump 5 28 E1 rra E rp 5 29 E2 Motor Setup ec eain Re eet elici EUER 5 32 F6 Com OPT Setup applies only to the LonWorks option 5 33 FS Analog lnplls s deiectus Ern RD Polon 5 34 L2 Momentary Power Loss Ride thru Function 5 40 ES Stall Prevention iei air bt El ences ter kis cu dep ads 5 41 L4 Speed Command Loss Detection 5 45 L5 Fault 5 46 L6 Torque 5 48 L8 Hardware Protection 5 50 01 Monitor 5 52 o2 Key Selections oo 5 56 03 Digital Operator Copy 5 58 TA AULOS iet rt dap in sapete Rectius 5 61 Programming 5 1 E7 Basic Programming Parameters The initialization group contains parameters associated with initial set up of the Drive Parameters involving the display language access levels initialization and password are located in this group A1 Initialization B A1 00 Select Language oyga 1 mew S 2 bah 3 mms 4 he Emme
110. 2P U TI V T2 W T3 R1 L11 S1 L21 TI L31 392 85 X 2P 88 5 2 0 2 67 4 T 1 0 X2P 9 2 53 5 X 2P 12 4 14 We OS R LI S L2 T L3 1 U TI V T2 W T3 RI L11 SI L21 TI L31 150 a 01 8200 6200 2400 400 Electrical Installation 2 6 Table 2 2 480Vac Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications Clamping Recommended Drive Model Nominal Terminal Torque Wi ize AW CIMR E7U Terminal Symbol Ib in ire Size G Wire Type Nem mm 88 5 300 X 2P R LI S L2 T L3 10 0 152 X 2P 88 5 300 X 2P U T1 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 S1 L21 T1 L33 10 0 152 X 2P 88 5 2 0 4185 300 350 D3 10 0 67 4 4 867 4 3 0 X 2P 98 0 er X om r el 4200 6200 2400 6400 124 2 2 1 4 i m 88 5 500 X 2P R LI S L2 T L3 D1 10 0 253 X 2P 88 5 400 X 2P U T1 V T2 W T3 1 L21 T1 L33 10 0 203 X 2P 600Vac UL Approved 88 5 2 0 109 GONE Seen quivalent T 867 4 250 X 2P 98 0 X M16 1 1 4200 6200 4400 6400 M4 12 4 2 2 1 4 2 D 88 5 700 X 2P 5 12 T L3 M8 10 0 355 x 2P 88 5 600 X 2P U T1 V T2 W T3 RI L11 SI L21 T1 L33 100 304 X 2P 88 5 2 0 3 E 867 4 400 2 98 0 xm 1 1 4200 0200 4400 6400 M16 12 4 2 2 1 4 D Use 75 C copper wire or equivalent Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2 of the rated voltage Line IMPO
111. 335 473 197 1 10 66 22P21 10 8 3 1047 4 96 1102 551 28 28 630 1 54 335 473 197 1 10 66 208V 23P71 16 8 5 1047 4 96 1102 551 28 28 709 232 10 552 1 97 110 88 27P51 31 0 7 5 10 1122 7 32 11 81 787 28 787 258 14 faes 511 621 307 198 132 20111 46 2 15 1122 7 32 1220 787 28 28 787 258 14 463 5 1 621 307 128 154 20151 59 4 20 13 19 850 13 78 45 30 47 827 307 14 512 679 665 394 173 242 20181 748 25 1319 1496 945 47 827 307 14 2 579 665 394 173 242 20P41 3 6 1 2 3 4 1047 4 96 11 02 551 28 28 630 154 335 473 197 110 66 20P71 46 1 1047 4 96 11 02 551 28 28 154 335 473 197 1 10 66 21P51 78 2 1047 496 1102 551 28 28 630 1 54 335 473 197 110 66 22P21 10 8 3 1047 496 11 02 551 28 28 154 335 473 197 1 10 66 T 23P71 16 8 5 1047 4 96 11 02 551 28 28 709 232 552 197 1 10 25P51 23 0 75 1047 4 96 11 02 551 28 28 709 232 552 197 1 10 27P51 31 0 10 1122 7 32 11 81 7 87 28 28 787 258 14 511 621 307 128 132 20111 46 2 15 1122 732 1220 787 28 28 787 258 14 463 511 621 307 138 154 20151 59 4 20 13 19 850 1378 945 30 47 827 07 14 512 579 665 394 173 242 20181 748
112. 4 Appendix D Communication This appendix details the specifications connections and programming of the Drive for Modbus communications This Drive also contains embedded APOGEE FLN and Metasys communication protocols For details regarding APOGEE FLN please refer to the E7 APOGEE FLN Technical Manual TM E7 21 For details regarding Metasys please refer to the Technical Manual TM E7 22 These two documents can be found on the CD ROM included with this Drive or at www drives com Using Modbus Communication 2 D 2 Modbus Function Code D 7 Modbus Data 2 2 D 9 Modbus D 14 Communications 1 Using Modbus Communication Serial communication can be performed with Direct Digital Controllers DDCs or similar devices using the Modbus protocol Modbus Communication Configuration Modbus communication is configured using master PLC and a maximum of 31 slaves Serial communication between master and slave is normally initiated by the master and responded to by the slaves The master performs serial communication with one slave at a time Consequently the slave address of each slave must be initially set so that the master can perform serial communication using that address Slaves receiving commands from the master perform the specified functions and send a respo
113. 4 through IMPORTANT E1 13 are returned to their factory default settings BH 1 04 Maximum Output Frequency Setting Range 0 0 to 120 0 Hz Factory Default 60 0 Hz Programming 5 30 B 1 05 Maximum Output Voltage Setting Range 0 0 to 255 0V 240V Models 0 0 to 510 0V 480V Models Factory Defaults 240 0V 240V Models 480 0V 480V Models 1 06 Base Frequency Setting Range 0 0 to 200 0 Hz settings above 120 0 Hz are currently not supported Factory Default 60 0 Hz B 1 07 Mid Output Frequency A Setting Range 0 0 to 200 0 Hz settings above 120 0 Hz are currently not supported Factory Default 3 0 Hz B 1 08 Mid Output Voltage Setting Range 0 0 to 255 0V 240V Models 0 0 to 510 0V 480V Models Factory Defaults 18 0V 240V Models 33 6V 480V Models BH 1 09 Minimum Output Frequency Setting Range 0 0 to 200 0 Hz settings above 120 0 Hz are currently not supported Factory Default 1 5 Hz NOTE Parameter E1 09 is used to tune the drive s V f pattern E1 09 sets the drive s minimum output frequency E1 09 does not normally require adjustment Use parameter d2 02 Frequency Reference Lower Limit to adjust the drive s continuous minimum operating speed B 1 10 Mid Output Voltage Setting Range 0 0 to 255 0V 240V Models 0 0 to 510 0V 480V Models Factory Defaults 10 8V 240V Models 16 8V 480V Models B 1 11 Mid Output Frequency Setting Range 0 0 to 200 0 Hz setti
114. 46 19 69 59 2 56 14 17 5 12 3 8 238 40750 156 125 27 56 12 80 28 54 17 72 49 2 46 13 78 5 12 3 8 194 480V 40900 180 150 27 56 12 80 28 54 17 72 49 2 46 13 78 5 12 3 8 196 41100 240 200 32 28 14 57 33 46 19 69 59 2 56 14 17 5 12 3 8 224 41600 304 250 33 66 17 52 36 06 22 64 59 2 56 14 96 5 51 3 8 352 FOR REFERENCE ONLY UNLESS PROPERLY ENDORSED IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE ADEQUATE COOLING YASKAWA THE DRIVE MUST BE POSITIONED TO ALLOW A MINIMUM OF FREE AIR SPACE OF 1 2 INCHES ON SIDES AND 5 INCHES TOP AND BOTTOM DRBY RIP 9 29 04 _ APPVL 9 29 04 Physical Installation 1 9 DIMENSIONS E7 PROTECTED CHASSIS MOUNTING HOLES FOR A SIZE SCREWS AIR 2 SSS SS ES f o o
115. 8 Index 2 E EEPROM eere 6 2 6 12 6 14 D 12 Elapsed Timer Monriitor Hectic 3 9 to 3 11 A 27 Parameters 5 55 A 24 A 25 A 27 to A 29 Electrical Installation seen 2 1 F 1 Enclosed wall mounted 1 5 to 1 9 C 4 Enclosure Style type sss 1 2 1 4 C 4 Energy Saving Res 7 3 Selection s e Rete 5 24 Environment 1 13 6 18 7 3 C 4 ESGK6y diae o nes tpi 3 3 External Faults EF 2 14 6 4 6 9 A 14 F Factory isse kate Inside Back Cover Fan Heatsink Cooling Che chang tentent 6 24 Cumulative Operation Time Setting A 25 Fuse Checking eed 6 24 Inspecting 5 2 dee ee 7 2 7 3 Operation Delay 5 49 A 22 Operation 5 49 A 22 Replacement Method 7 4 7 5 Troubleshooting seen 6 10 Fast Stop Time sss 5 25 A 7 A 13 A 14 Faults Clearing cuca dete ncn ects 3 3 A 25 Covered by Auto 5 45 D tectiOtiz ci ee ERR 6 2 Digital Output Signal sess 2 14 A15 Effect on Auto Restart sse
116. A 21 Control 2 C 4 heure C 4 Speed Command See Frequency Reference O TOV 66 2 12 2 14 2 18 4 9 4 20 ce ce et rer ie 2 12 2 14 2 18 4 9 Eithits eoe etre e PR et ees 5 26 6 20 A 9 Loss 5 43 A 21 SelectiOnicn tau een ate dtes 3 6 4 6 5 4 A 4 Setting Selection sescenti 5 54 Signal Polarity eeren ette Reste 2 12 4 9 Troubleshooting 2 2 6 16 6 17 Speed Reference Multiple Multi step Speed A 8 Speed Searchzziiue etes ae e ter ate tus 5 11 Auto T nIng derer 5 59 es etre ns A 5 Stall Prevention ere 5 40 A 20 Specific tions ede C 4 Troubleshooting sse 6 17 Start p co d estere Ead 4 to 4 9 ASSIStaD Ce o Inside Back Cover Benchmark 2 2 4 8 Preparation 4 2 RR 4 5 STOP Indicator Ree 3 2 3 6 Stopping Method 4 7 5 6 5 7 4 Coast to 5 5 Coast w Timer deeem rester hee tates 5 6 DeInj 0 9 0 eine eei eren 5 7 External Fault from OPT Modbus Communications
117. A 4 A 16 Iur 5 33 to 5 38 A 16 cose eem 5 33 to 5 38 A 16 Loss 5 43 A 21 Lower Lift oe ue eres 5 26 A 9 Preset References 1 to 4 A 8 Terminals etre 2 12 2 14 2 18 Upper Limit 5 26 6 20 9 Setting Method Selection 5 54 A 24 Source 51 01 3 6 5 4 4 Full Load Amps FLA 4 6 5 31 6 13 A 11 B 3 Fuse Blown Protection 6 7 6 22 to 6 24 C 4 FWD ee eee rider 3 5 G Gain Adjustments 5 33 5 38 A 16 Gate Drive PCBs Inspecting 1 ene tee ee ee ees 7 2 Ground Fault Function ees 5 45 6 4 A 22 Ground Fault Interrupter GFI Troubleshooting sss 6 19 Grounding 22 2 11 to 2 14 4 3 6 18 Protect OM nee C 4 Shield Wire 2222 2 2 12 2 18 Terminals x eene 1 5 1 6 2 2 to 2 8 H Hand Frequency Reference Selection 5 3 A 4 A 27 Indicators 3 5 3 6 HAND nnns 3 4 Function Selection 2 25 ttes 3 4 5 37 Troubleshooting 2 6 16 Hardware Protection Parameters 5 48 A 22 Harmonics Mitigation seen C 2 C 3 Heat Loss 1 11 1 14 Heatsink E n eerte tette 5 49 7 2 A 25 Hex converting to decimal sss A 30 Index 3
118. C Reactor Standard CIMR E7U2022 to 2110 CIMR E7U40P4 to 4018 Shorting Bar Sta ndard CIMR E7U20P4 to 2018 CIMR E7U40P4 to 4018 Fault Contact Digital Output 250VAC 3 OVDC 1A Digital Output 1 Default During RUN Digital Output 2 Default Remote Auto Operation des NN 4 MCCB L1 3 Phase aa Power Supply L2 50 6 OHz p L3 PE e Forward Run Stop e Reverse Run Stop e External Fault H1 01 e Fault Reset H1 02 Multi function n Contact Inputs e Multi step S peed Setting 1 H1 03 Factory Default H2 0 1 e Multi step S peed Setting 2 H1 04 e Jog Frequency Reference H1 05 H2 02 Z 15VDC 20mA Frequency 5 4 x 0 10VDC 20K Q Reference nur 08 HEEN P P 4 20mA 250 Q 0 to HOVDC 20K Q H4 04 AM 4 Terminating Resistance a AC 2 51 1 P Reo T Modbus Metasys I R APOGEE Communications RS 485 422 S ES IG Fig 2 6 Terminal Connections Electrical Installation 2 18 Multi function Digital Outputs 250VAC 30VDC 1A Multi function Analog Outputs 0 to 10VDC 2mA Control Circuit Wiring Precautions Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits k Separate control wiring from power mot
119. Control b5 01 65 30 A 5 A 6 Preset Reference Speeds d1 01 d1 17 A 8 Programming Basic 5 1 to 5 60 PwrLoss Ridethru L2 01 L2 05 A 19 Ref Detection 14 01 14 06 A 21 Reference Limits 42 01 42 03 A 9 S Curve Acc Dec C2 01 2 02 A 7 Sequence 61 01 1 12 4 Serial Com Setup H5 01 H5 09 A 18 Setting and Reading sss 3 7 to 3 16 Speed Search b3 01 3 14 A 5 Stall Prevention L3 01 1 3 06 A 20 Torque Comp C4 01 4 02 A 8 Torque Detection L6 01 16 03 A 21 Troubleshooting 6 15 User Limited Access A2 01 A2 32 A 2 A 3 V f Pattern E1 01 E1 13 sss A 10 Parity See Modbus Communications D 2 Parts Ordering Replacement Inside Back Cover Password Setting cesi e e e gr tute A 2 Troubleshooting sese 6 15 PCB Control Inspecting enne ere eee 7 2 Gate Drive Inspecting eee ee ehe 7 2 Power Inspecting eene ec me 7 2 Terminal Inspecting ercsi erroi ii 7 2 Removing and Mounting
120. D 12 4 14 199 1 0 X 2P R LI S L2 T L3 1 22 5 53 5 X 2P 199 1 0 X 2P U TI V T2 W T3 R1 L11 81121 T1 L31 nu Q2 5 53 5 X 2P 88 5 2 0 Tun p 10 0 4 199 4 0 22 5 107 2 9 0 x 5 a4 0 1 600 199 4 0 X 2P UL Approved MIO pp R LI S L2 T L3 D1 22 5 199 3 0 X 2P or equivalent U T1 V T2 W T3 RI L11 SI L21 TI L31 925 1525 2075 p 88 5 2 0 10 0 674 199 2 0 X 2P a 12 4 14 2 0 1 4 2 1 347 250 x2P pomme ee O 347 300 X 2P R LI S L2 T L3 392 152 X 2P 347 300 X 2P V T2 W T3 RULI1 SV L21 T1 L31 a 392 152 X2P E 88 5 2 0 m 10 0 67 4 p 347 4 0 X 2P D Gon ao72 xP maa 4 5 Use 75 C copper wire or equivalent Electrical Installation 2 4 Table 2 2 480Vac Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications Clamping R commended Drive Model Nominal Terminal Torque Wire Size AWG CIMR E7U Terminal Symbol Ed Ib in A Wire Type R LI S L2 T L3 C1 2 40P4 0 5 0 75 B2 U TI V T2 W T3 R LI S L2 T L3 Hi 2 40P7 B2 U TI V T2 W T3 RILI S L2 TIL3 41 Ha 41 5 1 5 2 B2 U TI V T2 W T3 RILI S L2 T L3 Bi 2 42P2 B2 U TI V T2 W T3 B R LL S L2 T L3 Hi 92 us B2 U TI V T2 W T3 R LI S L2 TL3 Hi 2 m B2 U TI V T2 W T3 C UL Approved R LI S L2 T L3 D H1 H2 vinyl she
121. Digital Motor Operated Pot 5 54 A 24 Digital Operator 3 1 Copy Function eee 5 56 6 14 A 25 Data Display 5 tee tete t NM ns 3 2 Display Selection Display Scaling 5 52 A 23 Drive Operation when Disconnected 5 55 A 24 Fau lts Brtors 5n 6 2 6 6 6 15 Keys scatet s ots 3 3 LCD Brightness Adjustment 2 2 2 A 24 Lights pe od ete e s 3 2 3 5 3 6 Mode Indicators essen 3 5 Mode Selection eret cotes 3 3 Monitor Selection At Power up 5 51 A 23 Preventive Maintenance seen 7 3 Removing and 1 17 1 18 4 224 2 22 5 56 6 14 A 25 Digital Outputs Connection 2 18 Control Circuit Terminals 2 12 2 14 Parameters ener ten thence tent P ts A 15 Dimensions 1 7 to 1 10 1 14 Diode Module Inspection seeded eR e P s 7 2 Resistance Test sce 6 21 6 22 DIP Switch ST eerte eerte 2 15 5 35 D 3 Displaying Faults 3 10 3 11 A 28 A 29 Down Arrow Key 3 3 5 37 6 15 DRIVE menu ecco eere tecta eerte enit ts 3 7 3 9 Drive Delay Time eee 5 9 A 4 Drive Mode Troubleshooting 0020 2 00 6 16 DriveWizard Software sess iv 5 5
122. During Program Enabled Run command accepted in all menus Programming RUN CMD at PRG except when b1 02 0 Drive Delay Time Setting 2 i Wait to Run Time After a run command drive output will start after this delay time 0 to 600 Selects the speed command input source in hand mode 0 Operator Digital preset speed d1 01 1 Programming dem 1 Terminals Analog Input Terminal A1 or Terminal A2 see parameter H3 13 0mo programine Note Bumpless transfer between Hand Auto is only available with setting 0 b1 08 bl 11 Hand Frequency Reference Selection HAND Fref Source Selects if drive will permit switching between HAND and AUTO HAND AUTO During Run modes while running Selection i 0 Disabled HAND AUTO Run 1 Enabled Emergency Override Speed Sets the speed command used in emergency override mode when E Override Speed b1 15 0 Emergency Override Selects the emergency override reverse source Reference Selection 0 Use bl 14 Ref E OverrideRefSel 1 Use AUTO Ref DC Braking Sets the frequency at which DC injection braking starts when ramp to stop b1 03 0 is selected If b2 01 E1 09 DC Injection braking starts at E1 09 51 14 51 15 DC Injection Braking Start Frequency DCInj Start Freq DC Injection Braking Current DCInj Current Selects the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the Drive rated current DC Injection Braking Time at Start
123. Electrical Installation sess 2 1 Control Circuit zi eed 2 12 Dia Sram esse MORE 2 18 Distances RSS tee 2 11 Field Diagram sse 2 20 Ground c i erred tete PRECES 2 11 F 2 Main Circuit Configurations sess 2 9 2 10 2 3 to 2 7 Shielded Twisted Pair Wires 2 19 Sinking Sourcing sese 2 17 Three Wire Control sess 5 3 to 5 5 Two Wire Control sees 5 3 to 5 5 Z Zero speed output 22 A 15 Index 9 Index 10 Drives Technical Support in USA and Canada Technical Support for Inverters and Drives is available by phone as follows Normal Monday through Friday during the hours of 8 a m to 5 00 p m C S T Emergency After normal hours 7 days a week including weekends and holidays To contact Drives Technical Support please call 1 800 YASKAWA 927 5292 From the menu dial 2 for Technical Assistance then for Variable Frequency Drives Drives Technical Support can also be reached by e mail at DriveSupport yaskawa com Support information such as technical manuals FAQs instruction sheets and software downloads are available at our web site www yaskawa com When calling for technical support please have the following materials available e appropriate Technical Manual in hand
124. FLT Trace Init 1 Enabled resets U2 and U3 monitors and returns 02 12 to zero kWh User Monitor U1 29 Used to reset the kilowatt Hour monitor to zero 0 Disabled no change 02 14 Initialization 1 Cl ll Resets U1 29 t dret 2 14 1 Programming kWh MonitorClear Clear all Resets U1 29 to zero and returns 02 to zero Enables or disables the Hand key on the digital Hand Key Function Selection operator mE Oper Hand Key 0 Disabled Bord Programming 1 Enabled COPY Function This parameter controls the copying of parameters to and from the digital operator COPY SELECT no function INV gt OP READ All parameters are copied from the drive to the digital operator 03 01 Copy Function Selection OP gt INV WRITE All parameters are copied from 0103 Programming Copy Function Sel the digital operator into the drive OP lt gt INV VERIFY Parameter settings in the drive are compared to those in the digital operator NOTE When using the copy function the drive model number and software number U1 14 must match or an error will occur Enables and disables all digital operator copy functions Read Allowed Selection 0 Disabled No digital operator copy functions are oe Read Allowable allowed P Programming 1 Enabled Copying allowed e Auto Tuning a Motor Rated Power 0 00 to 1 02 Mtr Rated Power Sets the motor rated power in kW 650 00 T1 04 Motor Rated Current Sets the motor rated
125. G CORPORATION 10F 146 Sung Chiang Road Taipei Taiwan Phone 886 2 2563 0010 Fax 886 2 2567 4677 YASKAWA JASON HK COMPANY LIMITED Rm 2909 10 Hong Kong Plaza 186 191 Connaught Road West Hong Kong Phone 852 2803 2385 Fax 852 2547 5773 BEIJING OFFICE Room No 301 Office Building of Beijing International Club 21 Jianguomanwai Avenue Beijing 100020 China Phone 86 10 6532 1850 Fax 86 10 6532 1851 SHANGHAI OFFICE 27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China Phone 86 21 6553 6600 Fax 86 21 6531 4242 SHANGHAI YASKAWA TONJI amp E CO LTD 27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China Phone 86 21 6533 2828 Fax 86 21 6553 6677 BEIJING YASKAWA BEIKE AUTOMATION ENGINEERING CO LTD 30 Xue Yuan Road Haidian Beijing 100083 China Phone 86 10 6232 9943 Fax 86 10 6234 5002 SHOUGANG MOTOMAN ROBOT CO LTD 7 Yongchang North Street Beijing Economic amp Technological Development Area Beijing 100076 China Phone 86 10 6788 0551 Fax 86 10 6788 2878 YEA TAICHUNG OFFICE IN TAIWAN B1 6F No 51 Section 2 Kung Yi Road Taichung City Taiwan R O C Phone 886 4 2320 2227 886 4 2320 2239
126. I Setpoint and the measured transmitter feedback at terminal A2 A large value will tend to reduce the error but may cause instability oscillations if too high A small value may allow to much offset between the setpoint and feedback See Fig 5 16 below 65 03 Integral Time Setting Setting Range 0 0 to 360 0 Seconds Factory Default 5 0 Seconds The Integral factor of PI functionality is a time based gain that can be used to eliminate the error difference between the setpoint and feedback at steady state The smaller the Integral Time set into b5 03 the more aggressive the Integral factor will be To turn off the Integral Time set b5 03 0 00 Measured Feedback Setpoint Setpoint Zero offset with Integral Action Measured Feedback Feedback Feedback No Integral With Integral Fig 5 16 PID Feedback Response Characteristics Programming 5 17 05 04 Integral Limit Setting Setting Range 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Default 100 0 On some applications especially those with rapidly varying loads the output of the PI function may have large oscillations To suppress these oscillations a limit can be applied to the integral factor by programming b5 04 b5 06 PI Output Limit Setting Range 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Default 100 0 Places a cap on the output of the PI function Limiting the PI function may help to prevent large overshoots in the Drive s response to error the difference between the
127. L2 03 is greater than L2 02 operation resumes after the time set in L2 03 The time it takes the output voltage to return to the preset V f pattern after speed search current detection mode is complete Sets the drive s DC Bus undervoltage trip level If this is set lower than the factory setting additional AC input reactance or DC bus reactance may be necessary Parameters 19 _ Parameter Name Setting Factory senting Motor Overload Menu Location Oto 1 0 1 to 20 0 0 0 to 25 5sec 0 1 to 5 0sec 0 0 to 5 0sec Voltage Class Dependent Voltage Class Dependent Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Parameter Table A 1 Parameter List Continued _ Parameter Name Setting Factory No senting Menu Location al Stall Prevention rr Stall Prevention Selection During Accel StallP Accel Sel Stall Prevention Level During Accel StallP Accel Lvl Stall Prevention Selection During Decel StallP Decel Sel Stall Prevention Selection During Run StallP Run Sel Stall Prevention Level During Running StallP Run Level 0 Disabled Motor accelerates at active acceleration 01 or C1 03 The motor may stall if load is too heavy or accel time is too short General Purpose When output current exceeds L3 02 level acceleration stops It starts to accelerate at current value recovery Intelligent The acti
128. Level Setting Range 0 to 100 Factory Default 0 05 14 Feedback Loss Detection Time Setting Range 0 0 to 25 0 Seconds Factory Default 1 0 Seconds The Drive interprets feedback loss whenever the feedback signal drops below the value of b5 13 and stays below that level for at least the time set into b5 14 See Fig 5 17 below for timing details Measured Feedback FT b5 14 ON CLOSED Feedback OFF OPEN Loss Digital Output TIME Fig 5 17 Loss of PI Feedback Feature Programming 5 19 B b5 15 Sleep Function Start Level Setting Range 0 0 to 200 0 Hz Factory Default 0 0 Hz B b5 16 Sleep Delay Time Setting Range 0 0 to 25 5 Seconds Factory Default 0 0 Seconds The Sleep Function can be programmed to prevent running the Drive when the PI loop output or the speed command is so low that no usable work is being done and or equipment damage may result The Sleep Function can be Enabled by entering a value in parameter b5 15 If the Drive s output drops below the level set by the Sleep Function Start Level b5 15 and remains there at least as long as the delay time determined by the Sleep Delay Time b5 16 then the Drive s internal Run command drops out and the Drive output ceases Though the Drive s output has ceased all other Drive functions continue Once the Drive s theoretical output returns to a level above the Sleep Function Start Level b5 15 and remains above that level fo
129. MENU Key Scrolls through the five main menus ESC ESCAPE Key Returns to the previous display before the DATA ENTER key was pressed MONITOR K Selects the monitor mode from the Operation DRIVE Quick Setting QUICK ey Programming ADV and Modified Constants VERIFY menus INCREASE Key Increases parameter numbers and set values Used to move to the next item or data value DECREASE Key Decreases parameter numbers and set values Used to move to the previous item or data value Selects the digit to be changed The selected digit will blink SHIFT RESET Key Also resets the Drive when a fault has occurred DATA ENTER Key Pressed to enter menus and parameters as well as to set values Digital Operator 3 3 NE M E 3 1 Digital Operator Keys Pressing the HAND key will put the Drive in the Hand mode and start the Drive n the Hand mode the drive speed command will depend on the setting of parameter 1 12 Hand Frequency Reference Selection e f the OFF key is pressed the Hand mode speed command will continue to be displayed on the keypad The Drive must to be in a stopped condition before it can be transferred to Hand or Auto mode unless b5 13 1 Stops Drive operation following the stopping method as programmed in parameter b1 03 Digital Operator 3 4 Drive Mode Indicators The definition of the Drive mode indicators are shown in Table 3 2 Table 3 2 Drive Mode Ind
130. Never allow wire leads to touch metal surfaces Short circuit may result Never connect AC main power to output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 Never connect power factor correction capacitors or noise filters to the Drive output Use 600Vac vinyl sheathed wire or equivalent Wire size should be determined considering voltage drop of leads Line voltage drop V 3 x wire resistance Q km x wire length m x current A x 1073 It is recommended that the motor lead length not exceed 164 feet 50 meters and motor wiring be run in a separate conduit from the power wiring If lead length must exceed this distance reduce the carrier frequency See Table 2 6 and consult Yaskawa toll free at 1 800 YASKAWA 927 5292 for other motor protection measures Signal and control leads must be separated from main circuit leads R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 Determine proper wire size for power and motor leads Refer to Tables 2 1 and 2 2 for details Review proper ground connections for the Drive Refer to Chapter 2 Electrical Installation for details The Drive must be solidly grounded using the main circuit ground terminal Ground resistance should be less than 1000 for a 208 240Vac Drive Ground resistance should be less than 10Q for a 480Vac Drive Select wire size suitable for the size of terminal screw Make the length as short as possible Never ground the drive in common with welding machines motors or other large curr
131. ON Timer when the digital input is closed and the digital output is energized Timer Function OFF Delay Used in conjunction with a multi function digital input and a 0 0to Time multi function digital output This sets the amount of time the 3 000 0 0 0sec Programming Delay OFF Timer output stays energized after the digital input is opened cpu PI Control See This parameter enables disables the closed loop PI controller PI Mode Setting 0 Disabled 55501 PI Mode 1 Enabled commanded speed becomes PI setpoint 0 1 3 Quick Setting 3 Fref PI b5 02 Proportional Gain Setting 0 00 to Quick att ee E 25 00 e 03 Integral Time Setting ets the integral time for the PI controller A setting of zero 0 0 to 360 0 5 0sec Quick Set PII Time pad integral control ting b5 04 Integral Limit Setting ets the maximum output possible from the integrator Set as a 9o 0 0 to d PLT Limit max 100 0 100 Programming 06 PI Output Limit ets the maximum output possible from the entire PI controller Set as 0 00 to 100 0 Proerammii PI Limit Me of fmax 100 0 8 8 Sets the amount of offset of the output of the PI controller Set as a of fmax The PI Offset Adjustment parameter has two different uses Parameter b5 07 serves different functions depending on whether it is used on a standard PI loop or a Differential PI loop 5 07 PI Offset Adjustment 1 Parameter b5 07 causes an offset to be applied to the ou
132. OPE OPE Detected Displays the parameter number causing an OPE fault PI Input Displays the error in the PI regulator U1 36 PI Setpoint PI Input PI Feedback PI Output Displays the output of the PI as a percentage of maximum PI Output frequency E1 04 PI Setpoint Displays the setpoint of the PI regulator U1 38 PI reference PI Setpoint PI bias CRC error Data length error Not used Always 0 Memobus Communication Error Code Parity error Transmit Err Overrun error Fleming error Timeover Not used Always 0 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Time Displays total operating time of the heatsink cooling fan FAN Elapsed Time Auto Mode Frequency Reference Value AUTO Mode Fref Displays the frequency reference speed command when in auto mode Hand Mode Frequency Reference Displays the frequency reference speed command when in Value hand mode or displays Terminal A2 when differential mode is HAND Mode Fref selected PI Feedback 2 Value 01 53 PI Feedback 2 Displays PI feedback 2 value Units depend on b5 31 setting scaling is set by b5 20 Parameters A 27 Fault Trace List Table A 3 Fault Trace List Fault Trace Current Fault Current Fault Previous Fault 020 Last Fault Frequency Reference at Most Recent Fault 1203 Frequency Ref Output Frequency at Most Recent Fault
133. P20 115 0 CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U 2037 2045 2055 2075 2090 2110 40P4 40P7 41P5 42P2 43P7 45P5 47 5 49 0 CIMR E7U4011 CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U CIMR E7U 4015 4018 4024 4030 4037 4045 4055 4075 4090 4110 4160 4185 4220 4300 79 5 NEMA Type dP 399 75 Physical Installation 1 2 Confirmations upon Delivery Receiving Checks Check the following items as soon as the Drive is received Table 1 2 Receiving Checks Method Has the correct model of Drive been Check the model number on the nameplate on the right side of the Drive delivered Reconcile with packing slip and or order information Inspect the entire exterior of the Drive to see if there are any dents scratches or i i 9 Ts ihe Drave damaged 2 other damage resulting from shipping Are any screws or other components Use a screwdriver or other tool to check for tightness loose If there are any irregularities in the above items contact the shipping company the distributor or representative who sold the Drive or a Yaskawa office immediately The E7 is thoroughly tested at the factory Any damages or shortages evident when t
134. RTANT voltage drop is calculated as follows Line voltage drop V J3 x wire resistance Q km x wire length m x current A x 103 Prior to removing any protective cover or wiring any part of the Drive remove all power sources including main input power and control circuit power Wait a minimum of 5 minutes after power removal before WARNING removing any cover The charge lamp located within the Drive should be off prior to working inside Even if the charge lamp is off one must measure the AC input output and DC Bus potential to insure safe levels prior to resuming work Failure to adhere to this warning may result in personal injury or death Electrical Installation 2 7 Main Circuit Terminal Functions Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in Table 2 3 Wire the terminals correctly for the desired purpose Table 2 3 Main Circuit Terminal Functions 208 240Vac and 480Vac Purpose Terminal Designation Mode 22 208 240Vac 480Vac R L1 S L2 T L3 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300 Main circuit power input R1 L11 S1 L21 T1 L31 2022 to 2110 4030 to 4300 Drive outputs U T1 V T2 W T3 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300 DC power input 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300 DC reactor connection D1 2 20P4 to 2018 40P4 to 4018 Ground 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300 Electrical Installation 2 8 Main Circuit Configurations 208 240Vac The 208 240Vac
135. RecelVilig iis sette ted RIP TO e atte ee 1 3 Installation Electrical escaso vet 2 1 Physical einer da 1 1 Orientation amp 1 14 S I 1 11 C 4 Integral Control PI sse 5 16 Interference schede ite tete teas F 1 J Jog Frequency Reference 2 14 2 18 A 8 A 12 Jump Frequency sese 5 27 6 19 6 20 A 9 K Keypad omuia met ges 3 1 to 3 16 a EET 1 11 C 2 Auto Luf ngp oae eR 5 59 A 25 BAT OR Eee on M rd 6 12 6 14 Parameters Affected by sss B 3 Selections nOD A 24 kW Converting from 0 5 59 User Monitor Initialization esses A 25 L Label Control 2 2 Lamps seese seeseeees ee 3 2 3 5 3 6 4 5 Language Selection sss 5 2 A 2 LCD Display ertet eo 3 2 3 8 LED 3 2 3 5 3 6 4 5 Lights aide Ree en ie 3 2 3 5 3 6 4 5 Line borne Interference Interference F 2 Line to Line Resistance Motor 11 Ri See iv 5 4 5 5 L ssof Lodde e E 5 46 A 21 Main Circuit Configuration sess 2 9 2 10 Terminals 22 2 2 1 5 1 6 2 2 to 2 8 2 18 Test Procedure ie Aoi a tette 6 21 Wire Sizes and 2 3 to 2 7 Wiring Diagrams
136. S Curve characteristics are specified by the Drive programming they will add to the total time to stop 1 Coast to stop When the Run command is removed the Drive will turn off its output and the motor will coast uncontrolled deceleration The friction of the driven equipment will eventually overcome any residual inertia of the system and the rotation will stop Programming 5 6 ON CLOSED Run Command 100 EN B _ 4 Motor Speed SS Output Frequency 1 Drive Output Frequency Interrupted Ss 0 TIME Fig 5 5 Coast to Stop After a stop is initiated a subsequent Run commands input before the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 IMPORTANT has expired will be ignored 2 DCInj to Stop When the Run command is removed the Drive will Baseblock turn off its output for the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 Once the Minimum Baseblock Time has expired the Drive will inject DC current into the motor windings to lock the motor shaft The stopping time will be reduced as compared to Coast to Stop The level of DC Injection current is set by parameter b2 02 50 Default The DC Injection brake time is determined by the set value in b2 04 and the output frequency at the time the Run command is removed b2 04 x 10 x Output Frequency DC Injection Brake Time Maximum Frequency E1 04 ON Run Command CLOSED OFF b2 04 x 10 OPEN o 1
137. Selection Mot SEC Current 100 Motor rated secondary Terminal AM Sel current 1 to 53 8 Programming SFS Output 100 max output frequency PI Feedback Not Used PI Input PI Output 100 max output frequency PI Setpoint Auto Mode Fref 100 max output frequency Hand Mode Fref 100 max output frequency PI Feedback 2 NOTE 100 10V DC output AM gain setting H4 05 H4 05 Terminal AM Gain Setting Sets terminal AM output voltage in percent of 10V 0 0 to 50 0 Prosbunmia Terminal AM Gain when selected monitor is at 100 output 1000 0 pee 5 5 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running Parameters A 17 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name Description Setting Factory Menu No Digital Operator Display Range Setting Location ase Se el Analog Outputs H4 06 Terminal AM Bias Setting Sets terminal AM output voltage in percent of 10V 110 0 to 0 0 Terminal AM Bias when selected monitor is at 0 output 110 0 29 5 5 Terminal FM Signal Level 0 0 10 VDC Selection 2 4 20 mA 0 2 Programming AO Level Select1 i 0 0 10 VDC Terminal AM Signal Level 2 4 20 mA Selection An analog output of 4 20 mA can not be used with 0 or2 Programming AO Level Select2 the standard terminal board Therefore an optional terminal board with shunt connector CN15 is needed Serial Com Setup aa 0 to 20 Selects drive station node numbe
138. To enable current detection Speed Search at start set b3 01 3 Spdscrhl enable and program any digital input equal to Speed Search 1 1 0 61 or Speed Search 2 1 0 62 Speed Search 1 will start searching from the max frequency E1 04 and ramp down to meet the rotor speed Speed Search 2 will start search ing from the set frequency and ramp down to meet the rotor speed Programming 5 13 IMPORTANT If a UV1 fault occurs when current detection Speed Search is attempted increase the setting of L2 04 IMPORTANT If an OC fault occurs when Speed Search is attempted after power loss recovery increase the setting of L2 03 Run command DEF ON Deceleration time set in b3 03 Maximum output Set frequency frequency or 3 reference set frequency Output frequency b3 02 Speed search current level Output current gt Minimum baseblock time Lower limit is set using Speed Search Delay Time b3 05 L2 03 Fig 5 12 Speed Search Current Detection Method at Startup Set frequency reference AC power supply ON OFF 2 Output frequency before power loss Deceleration ye time set in b3 03 Output frequency b3 02 speed search operating current Output current aem 1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency 3 p scd immediately before baseblock Minimum baseblock time L2 03 SAS 2 After AC power supply recovery m
139. Y YASKAWA E7 Drive User Manual This Manual also available on www yaskawa com Model E7U Document Number TM E7 01 Parameter Number A1 00 A1 01 A1 03 A1 04 A1 05 A2 01 A2 02 A2 03 A2 04 A2 05 A2 06 A2 07 A2 08 A2 09 A2 10 A2 11 A2 12 A2 13 A2 14 A2 15 A2 16 A2 17 A2 18 A2 19 A2 20 A2 21 A2 22 A2 23 A2 24 A2 25 A2 26 A2 27 A2 28 A2 29 A2 30 A2 31 A2 32 b1 01 b1 02 b1 03 b1 04 b1 07 b1 08 b1 11 b1 12 b2 01 Factory Setting i Parameter Number b5 07 b5 08 b5 09 b5 10 b5 11 b5 12 b5 13 b5 14 b5 15 b5 16 b5 17 b5 18 b5 19 b5 20 b5 21 b5 22 b5 23 b5 24 b5 25 b5 26 b5 27 b5 28 b5 29 b5 30 b8 01 b8 04 b8 05 b8 06 C1 01 C1 02 C1 03 C1 04 C1 09 C1 11 C2 01 C2 02 4 01 4 02 C6 01 C6 02 C6 03 C6 04 C6 05 d1 01 d1 02 d1 03 d1 04 d1 17 d2 01 d2 02 d2 03 d3 01 d3 02 d3 03 d3 04 d4 01 d4 02 E1 01 E1 03 E1 04 E1 05 E1 06 Quick Reference for E7 Parameters Setting Setting Je a 2 L9 L1 0 SE 9 3 1 q So ae o J 0 o eo 9 o 90 o AD 2 o 4 a o m 240V or 480V 240V or 480V Parameter Number L4 02 L4 05 L4 06 L5 01 L5 02 Parameter Number
140. a Enter command data can only be written The Enter command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0901H Table D 7 Enter Command Register No 0900H Write parameter data to EEPROM 0910H Parameter data is not written to EEPROM but refreshed in RAM only The maximum number of times you can write to EEPROM using the Drive is 100 000 Do not frequently execute Enter commands 0900H written to EEPROM The Enter command registers are write only Consequently if reading these registers the register address will become invalid Error code 02H IMPORTANT Communications D 12 Error Codes The following table shows Modbus communication error codes Table D 8 Error Codes Error ntent Function code error A function code other than 03H 08H or 10H has been set by the PLC Invalid register number error The register address you are attempting to access is not recorded anywhere With broadcast sending a start address other than 0000H 0001H or 0002H has been set Invalid quantity error The number of data packets being read or written is outside the range of 1 to 16 n write mode the number of data packets in the message is not No of packets x 2 Write mode error Attempting to write parameters to the Drive during run Attempting to write via Enter commands during run Attempting to write parameters other than A1 00 to A1 05 E1 03 or 02 04 when CPF03 defective EEPROM fault has occurred
141. ace List Access Procedure Use and keys to scroll through the U2 Fault Trace parameter list U2 03 Frequency Ref U2 04 Output Freq U 2 05 Output Current U2 07 Output Voltage 2 08 DC Bus Voltage 2 09 Output kWatts 2 11 Input Term Sts 2 12 Output Term Sts 02 13 AC Drive Status 2 14 Elapsed Time U U U U Digital Operator 3 10 B U3 Fault History List After viewing the Fault Trace parameter list in order to view the Fault History parameter list follow the key operations below Fig 3 5 DRIVE Rdy DRIVE Rdy DRIVE Rdy Fault Trace Fault History Last Fault Esc Woi lHo None None U2 03 0 00A U3 03 None Fig 3 5 U3 Fault History Access Procedure Use and keys to scroll through the U3 Fault History parameter list Table 3 10 Fault History List Fault History Parameters 3 01 Last Fault 3 02 Fault Message 2 3 03 Fault Message 3 3 04 Fault Message 4 3 05 Elapsed Time 1 3 06 Elapsed Time 2 3 07 Elapsed Time 3 3 08 Elapsed Time 4 3 09 Fault Message 5 3 10 Fault Message 6 3 1 Fault Message 7 3 12 Fault Message 8 3 13 Fault Message 9 3 14 Fault Message 10 3 15 Elapsed Time 5 3 16 Elapsed Time 6 3 17 Elapsed Time 7 3 18 Elapsed Time 8 3 19 Elapsed Time 9 3 20 Elapsed Time 10 hi U U Digital Operator 3 11 Quick Setting Menu QUICK This menu is used to set read the most commonly used
142. actures component parts that can be used in a wide variety of industrial applications The selection and application of YASKAWA products remain the responsibility of the equipment designer or end user YASKAWA accepts no responsibility for the way its products are incorporated into the final system design Under no circumstances should any YASKAWA product be incorporated into any product or design as the exclusive or sole safety control Without exception all controls should be designed to detect faults dynamically and fail safely under all circumstances All products designed to incorporate a component part manufactured by YASKAWA must be supplied to the end user with appropriate warnings and instructions as to that part s safe use and operation Any warnings provided by YASKAWA must be promptly provided to the end user YASKAWA offers an express warranty only as to the quality of its products in conforming to standards and specifications published in the YASKAWA manual NO OTHER WARRANTY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED IS OFFERED YASKAWA assumes no liability for any personal injury property damage losses or claims arising from misapplication of its products AWARNING Read and understand this manual before installing operating or servicing this Drive All warnings cautions and instructions must be followed All activity must be performed by qualified personnel The Drive must be installed according to this manual and local codes Do not connect or discon
143. age UV 1 6 8 6 11 Detection ei hited Wat A 19 Protection AEE 4 Up Arrow tnter tentes 3 2 3 3 Up Down 22 22 40 44 6 14 12 User 5 3 5 54 A 24 User A 2 A 3 User Monitor esee 5 51 A 23 A 24 V Ventilation uet ce eee etie 1 3 1 14 Verify Copy Function essere 5 56 BIOS ene rice e sess 5 58 6 13 VERIFY Menu cccccccsccsccescesecsscessesscesseceseseseseenes 3 7 3 14 V ACPAttetns o St Ie Eee RN 5 28 6 6 6 12 Parameters 5 5 tetti A 10 SElECHOMN eR IRE 5 28 Vibration Maximum C 4 Voltage Allowable fluctuation 6 8 6 11 C 2 C 3 M A 10 Drop Calculation seen 2 7 Input See Input Voltage sss A 10 Maximum Output C 2 C 3 Rating Drive 1 4 C 2 C 3 Related Parameters sse A 10 W Watchdog Timer 6 3 Weight 1 3 1 7 to 1 10 Wire Clamping Torque 2 3 to 2 7 GU BOs 2 3 to 2 7 2 11 6 18 SIZQ 2 3102 7 Wiring
144. al operator may result in the Drive starting unexpectedly Prior to making any adjustments with the digital operator insure that all personnel are clear from the Drive motor and machine Also insure that all covers couplings pulleys shaft keys etc are secure Digital Operator 3 2 Digital Operator Keys The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Digital Operator Keys Loo Ke Pressing the AUTO key will put the Drive in the Auto mode In the Auto mode the Drive will be capable of starting stopping depending on the setting of parameter b1 02 Run Command Selection In the Auto mode the Drive speed command frequency reference will depend on the setting of parameter b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection If the OFF key is pressed the Auto mode frequency reference will continue to be displayed on the keypad Pressing the AUTO key will start the Drive if the run command is already closed If the Drive is running in the Auto mode and the OFF key is pressed the Drive will stop If the run command remains closed pressing the AUTO key will restart the Drive While the Drive is running the run command can be opened to stop and closed to restart without taking the Drive out of the Auto mode The Drive must be in a stopped condition before it can be transferred to Auto or Hand mode unless b1 13 1
145. all personnel are clear of rotating machinery and electrical connections prior to switching between local mode and Auto mode b1 08 Run Command Selection During Programming Setting Description ae Disabled factory default Enabled As a safety precaution the Drive will not normally respond to a Run input when the digital operator is being used to adjust parameters If it is necessary that external Run commands be recognized even while the Drive is being programmed set b1 08 1 Enabled Programming 5 9 b1 11 Drive Delay Time Setting Setting Range 0 to 600 Seconds Factory Default 0 Seconds If a time is set into parameter 61 11 the Drive will delay executing any run command until the b1 11 time has expired During Drive delay time execution the digital operator will display DDLY Waiting to RUN Both the ALARM and Run indicators will blink while the Drive waits to execute the Run command B b1 12 Hand Frequency Reference Selection 0 Operator factory default When the Drive is put into the HAND mode by pressing the HAND key while in Operation the Speed Command will be set via the digital operator by default If it is desirable to have the Speed Command input from the terminals instead of the digital operator set b1 12 1 Terminals When the Speed Command is set via the terminals parameter H3 13 will determine whether analog input IMPORTANT terminal 1 or 2 is t
146. ame Start Up Location Sales Order Serial Printed Name Drive Location Phone Signature Owners Representative Printed Name Phone Company Signature Step 1 The Drive is thoroughly tested at the factory The start up person should verify that the drive is free of shipping and installation damage Shipping damage is not covered by the Yaskawa warranty Claims must be filed with the shipping company as soon as possible for any potential recovery via insurance Review the E7 User Manual TM E7 01 shipped with the Drive Verify that the model number and voltage ratings in the purchase order match the nameplate data for each unit Location of the Drive is important to achieve proper performance and normal operating life The unit should be installed in an area where it is protected from Direct sunlight rain or moisture Corrosive gases or liquids Vibration airborne dust or metallic particles Ensure the Drive is on a vertical surface with adequate space for air circulation 4 75 above and below 1 2 on each side Refer to Fig 1 8 Verify that the proper branch circuit protection is installed in front of the Drive Refer to Appendix E Peripheral Devices for proper input fuse or circuit breaker sizing Start Up 4 2 17 18 20 21 22 Avoid running input and output wiring in the same conduit Avoid routing power wiring near equipment sensitive to electrical noise
147. ameter A1 03 2220 or 1 03 3330 respectively This will automatically program the values of all other parameters listed in Table B 2 to the factory settings for that particular Drive rating Table B 1 Drive Capacity Selection Voltage Model Number 02 04 Setting Nominal Hp CIMR E7U20P4 0 0 5 0 75 CIMR E7U20P7 1 1 CIMR E7U21P5 2 1 5 2 CIMR E7U22P2 3 3 CIMR E7U23P7 4 5 CIMR E7U25P5 5 75 iE CIMR E7U27P5 6 10 CIMR E7U2011 7 15 CIMR E7U2015 8 20 CIMR E7U2018 9 25 CIMR E7U2022 A 30 CIMR E7U2030 B 40 CIMR E7U2037 C 50 CIMR E7U2045 D 60 CIMR E7U2055 E 75 PA CIMR E7U2075 F 75 100 CIMR E7U2090 10 125 CIMR E7U2110 11 150 CIMR E7U40P4 20 0 5 0 75 CIMR E7U40P7 21 1 CIMR E7U41P5 22 1 5 2 CIMR E7U42P2 23 3 CIMR E7U43P7 24 gt CIMR E7U45P5 26 75 CIMR E7U47P5 27 10 CIMR E7U49P0 3C 15 CIMR E7U4011 28 20 CIMR E7U4015 29 25 CIMR E7U4018 2A 30 480VAC CIMR E7U4024 3D 40 CIMR E7U4030 2C 50 CIMR E7U4037 2D 60 CIMR E7U4045 2E 75 CIMR E7U4055 2F 100 CIMR E7U4075 30 125 CIMR E7U4090 31 150 CIMR E7U4110 32 200 CIMR E7U4160 34 250 CIMR E7U4185 35 300 350 CIMR E7U4220 36 400 450 CIMR E7U4300 37 500 Capacity Related Parameters B 2 Parameters Affected by 02 04 The factory setting of the following parameters may change when the Drive capacity is changed
148. and maximum current 110 of rated output current for 60 seconds Overvoltage protection 208 240Vac Stops when main circuit DC voltage is above 410 V E 480 Vac Stops when main circuit DC voltage is above 820 V 8 sdervoliaee vroisction 208 240Vac Stops when main circuit DC voltage is below 190 V 5 480Vac Stops when main circuit DC voltage is below 380 V gt 5 Momentary power loss Power Interruptions of 15 ms or more ridethru By selecting the momentary power loss method operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s e Cooling fin overheating Protection by thermistor Stall prevention Stall prevention during acceleration deceleration or running Grounding protection Protection by electronic circuits 50 of inverter rated current Charge indicator Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx 50 Vdc or more Enclosed wall mounted type NEMA 1 CIMR E7U20P4 thru 2030 and 40P4 thru 4055 Enclosure Type Open chassis type IP00 CIMR E7U2022 thru 2110 and 4030 thru 4300 4 E S Ambient operating temperature Ambient operating humidity Storage temperature Application site Altitude Vibration Approval Agencies 14 F to 104 F 10 C to 40 C NEMA 1 type 14 F to 113 F 10 C to 45 C Open chassis type 10 to 20 Hz 32 ft sec 9 8 m s max 20 to 50 Hz 6 5 ft sec 2 m s max UL File E143427 Specifications C
149. ard 3PCB positioned at the back of the Drive Remove the fan assembly screws and pull out the fan assembly from the Drive Remove the cooling fan s from the fan assembly Mounting the Cooling Fan Assembly After attaching a new cooling fan reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket be sure that the air flow goes toward the top of the Drive Air flow direction _ Fan cover Control PCB bracket 7 Control PCB __ Gate driver Fig 7 2 Cooling Fan Assembly Replacement Procedure Maintenance 7 5 Removing and Mounting the Terminal Card The terminal card can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the control wiring IMPORTANT AUR that input power is removed and the Charge LED is not lit before removing or mounting the Removing the Terminal Card 1 Remove the terminal cover on the Drive 2 Remove the Digital Operator and front cover on the Drive 3 Remove the wires connected to FE and NC on the terminal card 4 Loosen the mounting screws on the left and right sides of the terminal card until they are free It is not necessary to remove the mounting screws completely They are captive and self rising 5 Pull the terminal card out in the direction of the block arrow B Mounting the Terminal Card Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal card Confirm that the terminal card and the Con
150. athed 158 B2 U TI 2 W T3 or equivalent S L2 TIL3 1 2 4015 B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 4018 RILI S L2 T L3 1 Ha B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 5 KCN R LI S L2 T L3 H1 C3 R LI 5 12 TL3 1 43 U T1 V T2 W T3 4024 4030 40 50 RULIL SUL21 TUL31 R LI S L2 T L3 G1 U T1 V T2 W T3 RI L11 81121 1 31 4037 4045 V T2 W T3 RI L11 81 721 c 3 Electrical Installation 2 5 Table 2 2 480Vac Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications Clamping Recommended Drive Model Nominal Terminal Torque Wire Size AWG i CIMR E7U Hp dior Screws Ib in BLEUS mm di 5 2 0 33 6 50 1 RS 42 4 4 0 29 107 2 3 0 28 85 4 0 Es m 107 2 347 1 0 39 2 53 5 12 4 14 1 4 2 1 199 250 22 5 127 199 4 0 22 5 107 2 88 5 4 0 10 0 107 2 600Vac UL Approved 347 vinyl sheathed 39 2 67 4 or equivalent 12 4 14 1 4 2 1 199 2 0 X 2P 22 5 67 4 X 2P 199 1 0 X 2P 22 5 53 5 X 2P 88 5 2 0 2 67 4 R LI S L2 T L3 C1 U T1 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 81721 T1 L31 r 1 2200 6200 2400 400 Se n R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 81721 T1 L31 4 0 9 2 107 2 4 14 4200 6200 2400 6400 14 o a 4 0 X 2P S L2 T L3 39 2 107 2 X 2P 347 3 0 X
151. ating can only be initiated by closing a digital input programmed as a Motor Pre heat Input H1 0x 60 Check with the motor manufacturer to determine the maximum acceptable current level the motor can withstand when stopped Be sure not to exceed the motor manufacturers recommended level b3 Speed Search The Speed Search function allows the Drive to determine the speed of a motor shaft that is being driven by rotational inertia Speed Search will allow the Drive to determine the speed of the already rotating motor and begin to ramp the motor to a set speed without first having to bring it to a complete stop When a momentary loss of supply power is experienced the Drive output is turned off This results in a coasting motor When power returns the Drive can determine the speed of the coasting motor and start without requiring it to be brought to minimum speed Speed Search can be programmed to always be active by setting b3 01 or it can be commanded by remote contact closure by setting a digital input There are two forms of Speed Search in the Drive the speed estimation method and the current detection method When setting the Drive for remote Speed Search input via a contact closure the method of Speed Search IMPORTANT is determined by the setting of b3 01 If b3 01 0 SpdsrchF Disable then the remote input will initiate speed estimation method and if b3 01 2 Spdsrchl Disable then the remote input will start the current detecti
152. auto tuning result became other than the parameter set range Current flow exceeded the motor rated current Current detection value symbol was reversed Any of U TI V T2 and W T3 has open phase Auto tuning did not finish within the set time Tuning result became other than the parameter setting range Rated current set value is set too high Check input data Check Drive and motor capacity Check motor rated current Check input data Check wirings and around the machine Check the load Check input data Check motor wiring f a motor and a machine are connected disconnect the motor from the machine Check current detection circuit wiring and mounting procedure Check motor wiring Check input data especially motor output current and motor rated cur rent value Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 13 Digital Operator COPY Function Faults These faults can occur occurred during the operator COPY function Fault content is displayed on the operator An error during the COPY function does not activate the fault contact output or alarm output Table 6 5 Digital Operator COPY Function Faults Digital Operator Display Probable Causes Corrective Action PRE 03 01 was set to 1 to write a parameter when the Digital Operator was READ IMPOSSIBLE write protected 03 02 0 Set 03 02 to 1 to enable writing parameters with the Digital Operator The read data length
153. below the level as set in b3 02 100 Drive Rated Current the output frequency stops decreasing and normal operation resumes B b3 03 Speed Search Deceleration Time Setting Range 0 1 to 10 0 Seconds Factory Default 2 0 Seconds Parameter b3 03 sets the deceleration ramp used by the current detection method of Speed Search when searching for the motor s rotor speed Even if Speed Search 2 is selected for Speed Search at start the time entered into b3 03 will be the time to decelerate from maximum frequency E1 04 to minimum frequency E1 09 b3 05 Speed Search Delay Time Setting Range 0 0 to 20 0 Seconds Factory Default 0 2 Seconds In cases where an output contactor is used between the Drive and the motor extra waiting time is provided after power returns and before Speed Search is performed This extra time allows for the contactor to operate When Speed Search at start is used b3 05 will serve as the lower limit of the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 b3 14 Bi Directional Speed Search Selection Seting Enabled factory default The b3 14 parameter can be used to turn off the bi directional capabilities of the Speed Estimation form of Speed Search By turning off the bi directional capability the speed search will only try to match the speed in the last known direction Programming 5 15 b5 PI Function The capability to accept an analog signal as feedback for a PI Prop
154. bias is applied first which changes the slope of the Speed Command vs Terminal A1 Voltage graph Then the level of the A2 analog input is summed with the A1 analog input level which in effect shifts the Speed Command vs Terminal 1 Voltage graph upwards or downwards but does not change the slope of the line Programming 5 37 g ee Be 2E AE 85 29 8 Ot db tea te H3 02 uM H3 02 P i 4 H3 03 H3 03 Ue e i 10V 1 Voltage 10V A1 Voltage 10V A1 Voltage acto efault j 7 y With H3 03 applied With both H3 03 and analog input bias H3 09 0 applied Fig 5 29 Frequency Bias Applied to Analog Speed Command Function Aux Reference Setting 2 In order for the A2 analog input to be used as the master Speed Command parameter H3 09 must be set for Aux Reference H3 09 2 Aux Reference Once A2 is configured as an auxiliary reference it can be selected as the master Speed Command by setting H3 13 1 Main Fref TA2 If H3 09 2 terminal A2 analog input will become the speed command when a digital input programmed for Multi Step Ref 1 H1 0x 3 is selected by a contact closure Function PI Feedback Setting B Configuring the A2 analog input as PI Feedback H3 09 B PI Feedback is a requirement of setting the Drive up for PI operation The A2 analog input 1s the only source for feedback for PI operation though the setpoint can come from a number of different sources
155. c 1 has priority over C1 11 Denotes that parameter be changed when the Drive is running Menu location is Programming when PI is disabled and Quick Setting when PI is enabled Parameters 7 Parameter No Parameter Name Pos Setting Factory Setting Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Menu Location Saas S Curve AcciDec Say S Curve Characteristic at Accel Start SCrv Acc Start S Curve Characteristic at Accel End SCrv Acc End Torque Compensation Gain Torq Comp Gain Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Torq Comp Time Normal Duty Selection Normal Duty Sel Carrier Frequency Selection CarrierFreq Sel Carrier Frequency Upper Limit CarrierFreq Max Carrier Frequency Lower Limit CarrierFreq Min Carrier Frequency Propor tional Gain CarrierFreq Gain Frequency Reference 1 Reference 1 Frequency Reference 2 Reference 2 Frequency Reference 3 Reference 3 Frequency Reference 4 Reference 4 Jog Frequency Reference Jog Reference S curve is used to further soften the starting ramp The longer the S curve time the softer the starting ramp Run command OFF Output frequency 0 00 to 0 00 to 2 50 Programming Programming Torque Comp E This parameter helps to produce better starting torque It determines the amount of torque or voltage boost based upon motor current and motor resistance This parameter adjusts a
156. c countermeasures are isolation of the wiring of control and power components proper grounding and shielding of cables A large contact area is necessary for low impedance grounding of HF interference The use of grounding straps instead of cables is therefore highly recommended Cable shields must be connected with ground clips Cable Installation Measures Against Line Borne Interference Line filter and Drive must be mounted on the same metal plate Mount the two components as close to each other as possible with cables kept as short as possible see Fig G 2 Use a power cable with a well grounded shield Use a shielded motor cable not exceeding 82 feet 25 m in length Arrange all grounds to maximize the end of the lead area in contact with ground e g metal plate Use a shielded cable with braided shield and ground the maximum possible area of the shield It is advisable to ground the shield by connecting the cable to the ground plate with metal clips see Fig G 1 EMC Compatibility F 2 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Recommended EMC Filters EMC Filter Drive Model NE CIMR E7U i eig Dimensions Model Number Current Rating Ib kg inches mm Sorel 208 240 Vac a 2 43 5 500 x 13 x 1 875 RE n X X 1 20P7 55972 10 07 10A 1 1 141 x 330 x 46 1 21P5 1 5 2
157. check the cycle time and the size of the load as well as the times set in C1 01 and C1 02 Review the V F pattern parameters E1 01 thru E1 13 Check the motor rated current value in E2 01 Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load as well as the times set in C1 01 and C1 02 Review the V F pattern parameters E1 01 thru E1 13 Change to a larger size Drive Ensure the values in L6 02 and L6 03 are appropriate Check application machine status to eliminate fault Attach the digital operator Description Cause Motor Overheating Fault The Drive stops operation according to the setting of L1 04 Overheating of motor as measured by motor thermistor OH4 Motor Overheat 2 The load is too large The cycle time is too short at the accel decel time Motor Overload Designed to protect the motor The voltage of the V F pattern Fully adjustable from parameter E2 01 is high OL1 Motor Overloaded Motor rated current setting is improper The load is too large The cycle time is too short at the accel decel time OL2 Inv Overloaded Drive Overload Designed to protect the Drive The voltage of the V F pattern is high The size of the Drive is small Overtorque Detection 1 Drive output current gt L6 02 for more than the time set in L6 03 OL3 Overtorque Det 1 Motor is overloaded OPR Digital Operator Connection Fault The Drive will stop if the digital operator is removed when the Drive is commanded to T
158. checks if communication is being performed normally Perform the self diagnosis function using the following procedure 1 ae ee 6 Turn ON the power supply to the Drive and set parameter H1 05 Terminal S7 Function Selection to 67 Comm Test Mode Turn OFF the power supply to the Drive Perform wiring according to the following diagram while the power supply is turned OFF Turn ON the terminating resistance Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1 Turn ON the power supply to the Drive again V AC R R MA MB MC 5 M3 4 1 2 Fig D 10 Communication Terminal Connection for Self Diagnosis Function During normal self diagnostic operation the Digital Operator displays the frequency reference value If an error occurs a CE Modbus communication error alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator the fault contact output will be turned ON and the Drive operation ready signal will be turned OFF Communications D 14 Appendix E Peripheral Devices This appendix describes recommended branch short circuit protection and peripheral devices Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection E 2 Branch Circuit Overload Protection E 5 Peripheral Devices E 6
159. ck Measurement Location Voltage Vac 11 12 12 13 L1 L3 Use extreme caution when performing measurements as contact with live parts may result in personal injury WARNING or death If voltage level is within Drive Specification See Appendix C Specification APPLY POWER to energize the Drive The STOP AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF indicators should be on REMOVE POWER from the Drive Wait for the Red CHARGE LED near the power terminals to go out The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off The status indicator LED s and the digital operator display will be extinguished when the DC bus voltage is below 50VDC To prevent electric shock wait at least 5 minutes after all indicators are off and measure the DC Bus voltage level to confirm a safe level prior to working on the Drive WARNING Connect the motor leads to the Drive at terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 APPLY POWER to the Drive Press the HAND key once This puts the Drive in the Hand Mode allowing run stop and speed commands frequency references by the digital operator The AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF indicators turn off The FWD light turns on The RUN light turns on The STOP light is blinking Frequency Ref U1 01 is now displayed on the Digital Oper ator Press the OFF key Press the MENU key two times Press the DATA ENTER key once to enter the Quick Setting Menu Press the W key 25 times to display parameter E1 01 Inp
160. d This is a Digital Operator communications error The connection between the Digital Operator and the Drive may be faulty Remove the Digital Operator and then re install it Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 15 If the Motor Does Not Operate Use the following information if the motor does not operate B Ensure the digital operator is securely connected to the Drive E The motor does not operate when the HAND key on the Digital Operator is pressed The following causes are possible The Speed Command Frequency Reference is too low If the Speed Command frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency the Drive will not operate Raise the Speed Command to at least the minimum output frequency B The motor does not operate when an external run command is input The following causes are possible The Drive is not in drive mode If the Drive is not in drive mode it will remain in ready status and will not start Press the MENU key once and press the DATA ENTER key The Drive is now in drive mode The Speed Command is too low If the Speed Command is set below the frequency set in E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency the Drive will not operate Raise the Speed Command to at least the minimum output frequency W The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected The load may be too high The Drive has a stall prevention function and an automatic torque boost funct
161. d stall prevention is disabled and if the load is large and the deceleration time short enough the Drive may fault and stop If L3 04 1 General Purpose then the standard stall prevention function is enabled If during deceleration the DC Bus voltage exceeds the stall prevention level see table below the Drive will discontinue decelerating and maintain speed Once the DC Bus voltage has dropped below the stall prevention level the deceleration will continue down to the Speed Command level See figure below Table 5 Stall Prevention During Decel Drive Voltage Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration V 240 Vac 480Vac E1 01 gt 400Vac P momove 6 If L3 01 2 Intelligent the intelligent stall prevention is enabled The active deceleration time is ignored and the Drive will attempt to decelerate as quickly as possible without causing the DC Bus voltage to exceed the stall prevention level The following figure demonstrates acceleration when L3 04 1 General Purpose a Set decel time b Decel time is extended Output Frequency DC Bus Voltage 380 660 760 Vdc e TIME Fig 5 34 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Deceleration 13 05 Stall Prevention Selection During Running Decel Time 1 factory default Decel Time 2 Programming 5 43 13 06 Stall Prevention Level During Running Setting Range 30 to 200 of Drive rated output current Facto
162. d by setting parameter b5 21 2 Snooze Once the Snooze Function is selected the Drive monitors the output frequency If the output frequency drops below the PI Snooze Level b5 22 and stays below that level for at least the PI Snooze Delay Time b5 23 the Drive output shuts off This is different from the Sleep Function because it is the feedback that must drop below the PI Snooze Deactivation Level b5 24 before normal Drive output will begin again See Fig 5 19 on next page W b5 25 PI Setpoint Boost Setting Setting Range 0 to 100 Factory Default 0 Programming 5 22 Just before the Snooze Function is activated the PI Setpoint can be temporarily increased to create an overshoot of the intended PI Setpoint The temporary boost is determined by the PI Setpoint Boost Setting b5 25 Once the temporary boost level is reached or the PI Maximum Boost Time b5 26 is exceeded the Drive output shuts off snoozes and the intended PI Setpoint returns From this point on the Snooze Function operates normally and the Drive output returns when the feedback level drops below b5 24 See Fig 5 19 below B b5 26 PI Maximum Boost Time Setting Range 0 to 3600 Seconds Factory Default 0 Seconds Associated with the Snooze Function In cases where the temporary PI Setpoint intended PI setpoint PI Setpoint Boost cannot be reached within the PI Maximum Boost Time b5 26 the Setpoint Boost is interrupted and the Drive output is turned
163. dex 1 Control Circuit Characteristics ccccccccsceesecesseesseceseeens 2 2 2 11 2 12 Connection Diagram 2 18 Analog Input Configuration sess 2 12 PCB ech kien Aid m bat ques B 2 Inspecting 7 2 Powet FU se ee nete eiie pe rtr ege 6 23 Terminal 02 0 2 14 WAITING 2 12 2 18 Precautionis iode pde 2 19 Cooling nee ere RR 1 13 b n tee 5 49 6 9 6 24 7 4 7 5 A 22 A 25 Fins esae aate 6 5 6 10 7 2 7 3 C 4 COPY Function 5 56 to 5 58 Falis ce tees idee deed dis 6 14 Parameters 25 Covers Protective em eaa 1 13 Removable SI cene 1 5 1 6 Removing and Attaching 1 15 1 16 CPU 6 3 Critical Frequency Rejection 5 27 6 19 6 20 A 9 Current DC Injection Braking sees 5 9 A 4 Maximum Output Overload Capacity C 4 Monitor Analog Output 2 14 A 17 A 26 Motor Rated FLA 4 6 5 31 6 13 A 11 A 25 B 4 Rated Output 1 2 1 11 5 23 C2 C 3 D DATA ENTER Key 3 3 5 54 24 USage sudes e e C 3 8 3 15 5 2 6 16 Data Length eee hen A 18 D 1 to D 14 Date Stamp Information 6 25 DC Br king eA RR RUE 5 9 A 4 DC Bus Capacitors Inspecting 4 cepe Rees 7 2 Preventive Maintenance
164. dication Programming 5 48 After selecting the proper detection scheme the Torque Detection Level L6 02 must be specified If the current level read by the output current transformers rises above overtorque or drops below undertorque this level and remains there for at least the Torque Detection Time L6 03 then the Torque Detection Function will change the state of any digital output configured for Torque Detection H2 01 H2 02 B Trq Det 1 N O or 17 Trq Det 1 N C Torque detection level 10 gt g 7 S 4 16 03 16 03 75 c i CI E 52 I osed 26aa Open TIME When the output current drops below the Torque Detection Level by approximately 1096 of the Drive s rated output current the digital output is reset Fig 5 38 Over Torque Detection Torque detection level 10 og Reesor ge esa qp esee e ae Output Current c d a 2 8 xou Eg28 Closed 5 2 When the output current rises above the Torque Detection Level by approximately 10 of the Drive s rated output current the digital output is reset Fig 5 39 Under Torque Detection Programming 5 49 L8 Hardware Protection B L8 02 Overheat Pre Alarm Level Setting Range 50 to 130 C Factory Default 959C 18 03 Overheat Pre Alarm Operation Selection Sating 0 Ramp to Stop Decel Time C1 02 b 0238 5 Fast S
165. does not agree Repeat the Read Check the Digital Operator cable The write data is incorrect Replace digital operator RDE An attempted write of a parameter to a Ps S has been detected DATA ERROR EEPROM on the Digital Operator failed v Replace Digital Operator CPE The Drive product code or software number Use COPY function for the same product ID UNMATCHED is different code and software number READ IFE Function READ DATA ERROR VAE 4 RS ae s and Use COPY function for the same Drive INV KVA UNMATCH different capacity The control method of the Drive being copied and the control method in the Digital Operator are different CYE The parameter written to the Drive was COPY ERROR compared with the parameter in the Digital COPY retest Operator and they were different The checksum in the Drive parameter area CSE was compared with the checksum in the SUM CHECK ERROR Digital Operator parameter area and they were different Verify VYE The set value of the digital operator and the Retry Verify function Function VERIFY ERROR Drive do not match After COPY is retested Verify is retested CRE COPY CONTROL UNMATCHED Function Use the COPY function for the same con trol method Retry the copy Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 14 Troubleshooting Due to parameter setting errors faulty wiring etc the Drive and motor may not operate as expected when the system is started up If this occurs use
166. done by pressing the AUTO button on the digital operator while the Drive is stopped If a Run command is input to the Drive but no corresponding speed command is input the Run indicator on IMPORTANT the digital operator will turn on and the STOP indicator on the digital operator will blink If you want the Drive to follow the speed command set by the digital operator Use the Hand mode by pressing the hand key or set b1 01 0 Operator The speed command can then be entered into the U1 01 monitor parameter in the DRIVE Menu If you want the Drive to follow an Auto analog speed command Set b1 01 1 Terminals and connect a 0 10 Vdc speed command signal between terminals Al and AC or a 4 20 mA speed command signal to terminals A2 and AC If you want the Drive to receive the speed command from serial communication Set b1 01 2 Serial Com and connect the RS 485 422 serial communications cable to terminals R R S and S on the control I O terminal block Be sure to use this setting when using the LONWorRKS option card If you want to use a network communication card other than LONWORKS to input a speed command Set b1 01 3 Option PCB and plug the network option board into the 2CN port on the Drive Control PCB Consult the manual supplied with the option board for instructions on integrating the Drive into the network If b1 01 3 Option PCB but a network card is not installed
167. duction Level Fref During OH L8 19 Failure OHI Detect Sel OHI Detection Selection for Fan 0 Not Provided 1 Provided When the cooling fan temperature exceeds the value set in this parameter an overheat pre alarm OH will occur Drive Operation upon OH Pre Alarm Detection 0 Ramp to Stop Decel Time C1 02 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop Decel Time C1 09 3 Alarm Only 0 to 2 is recognized as fault detection and 3 is recognized as alarm For the fault detection the fault contact operates OH Alarm amp Reduce Continue operation and reduce output frequency by L8 19 Enables and disables drive output ground fault detection 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Controls the Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation 0 Fan On Run Mode Fan will operate only when drive is running and for L8 11 seconds after RUN is removed 1 Fan Always On Cooling fan operates whenever drive is powered up When L8 10 0 this parameter sets a delay time for Cooling Fan de energization after the run command is removed When the drive is installed in an ambient temperature exceeding its rating drive overload OL2 protection evel is reduced This parameter assists in protecting the output transistor junctions from overheating when output current is high and output frequency is low 0 Disabled Enabled L8 18 is active Enables and disables software Current Limit A CLA 0 Disabled Enabled Sets the amoun
168. e appendix A Parameter Group List E Digital Operator 3 13 1 2 3 5 8 1 2 6 1 2 1 2 Motor Setup 6 1 3 5 1 2 3 5 8 1 1 2 Modified Constants Menu VERIFY This menu is used to set read the parameters that have been modified from their original factory default settings Follow the key operations below Fig 3 8 to access the Modified Constants Parameter Menu VERIFY Main Menu See Note 1 Modified Consts Fig 3 8 Modified Constants Menu Access Procedure Note 1 If there are not any parameters that have been modified from their original factory default settings then the display will state None Modified Otherwise use the increase and decrease keys to scroll through the Modified Constants list Auto Tuning Menu A TUNE This menu is used to auto tune the Drive in order to optimize motor performance as well as utilize the bi directional speed search feature Follow the key operations below Fig 3 9 to access the Auto Tuning Menu A TUNE A TUNE Mtr Rated Power o40kw Auto Tuning 0 00 650 00 0 40kW Main Menu Fig 3 9 Auto Tuning Menu Access Procedure Use and keys to scroll through the Auto Tuning parameter list Table 3 13 Auto Tuning Parameter List Auto Tuning Parameters T1 02 Mtr Rated Power T1 04 Rated Current Digital Operator 3 14 Example of Changing a Parameter Table 3 14 provides an example of how
169. e of accumulation LEDs Keypad Display Digital Operator Monitor display values Key funetionality ean mE pee If the Drive is used under the following conditions it may be necessary to inspect more often e High ambient temperatures humidity or altitudes above 3 300 feet e Frequent starting and stopping Fluctuations of the AC power supply or load e Excessive vibration and or shock loading e Poor environment including dust metal particles salt sulfuric acid chlorine Maintenance 7 3 Heatsink Cooling Fan Replacement Models CIMR E7U20P4 thru 2018 25HP 208V 240V and 40P4 thru 4018 30HP 480V A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Drive If the Drive is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Drive heatsink the cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Drive from the enclosure panel If the Drive is mounted with the heatsink external to the enclosure the cooling fan can only be replaced by removing the Drive from the enclosure 95 Removing the Heatsink Cooling Fan Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows 1 and then pull the fan out in the direction of arrow 2 Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the power connector See Fig 7 1 Open the fan cover on the left and rig
170. ective action according to the table below Table 6 2 Alarm Displays and Processing Description Cause Corrective Action Operator Display Option Communication Error BUS After initial icati Option Com Err er initial communication was established the connection was lost Connection is broken master Check all connections verify all has stopped communicating user side software configurations Connection not made properly user software not configured to Check all connections verify all the proper baud rate or user side software configurations configuration CALL Serial communication transmission error SI F G ComCall Communication has not yet been estab lished EF Both the forward and the reverse run com An external forward and External Fault mands are input simultaneously for 500mS reverse command are input Check external sequence logic or more This alarm stops the motor simultaneously EFO Check for an external condition Opt External Flt Communication Option Card External Fault Flashing An external fault condition Verify the parameters exists y P Verify communication signal EF3 Ext Fault S3 External Fault at Terminal S3 Flashing EF4 Ext Fault S4 External Fault at Terminal S4 Flashing Eliminate the cause of an external fault condition EF5 An external fault condition Ext Fault S5 External Fault at Terminal S5 exists connected to a Flashing multi function digital input EF6 Ext Fau
171. ed 1 e operating at rated slip b8 04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value Setting Range 0 0 to 655 0 Factory Default Model Dependent Parameter b8 04 is used in maximizing motor efficiency The factory setting will be Drive capacity dependant but can be adjusted in small amounts while viewing the kW monitor U1 08 and running the Drive to minimize the output kW A larger value typically results in less voltage to the motor and less energy consumption Too large a value will cause the motor to stall B b8 05 Power Detection Filter Time Setting Range 0 to 2000 mS Factory Default 20 mS The Energy Saving function will search out the lowest output voltage in order to achieve minimum output power usage Parameter b8 05 determines how often the output power kW is measured and the output voltage is adjusted b8 06 Search Operation Voltage Limit Setting Range 0 to 100 Factory Default 0 Once Energy Savings is enabled and the optimal energy saving coefficient value has been set the programmer can have the Drive further search out the proper voltage to achieve the lowest output power by making minute changes to the output voltage and measuring the output power every b8 05 ms Parameter b8 06 sets limits to the range over which the voltage will be adjusted in order to minimize the power output Settings too large a value may allow the motor to stall if the load is applied abruptly If b8 06 0 then the optimum voltage search operati
172. ed reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal W T3 Expected reading is OL displayed All Drives have a Control Power Fuse The fuse is located on either the Power PCB 3PCB or the Gate Drive PCB 3PCB The Control Power Fuse protects the primary switching mode power supply Control Power Fuse Seta digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale Place one lead of the multi meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the multi meter on the other side of the fuse Ifthe fuse is good the measured value will be zero ohms If the fuse is bad the measured value will be infinite ohms Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 23 Table 6 6 Main Circuit Test Procedure The Heat Sink amp Internal Cooling Fans cool the heat sink as well as the output transistor mod ules of the Drive Conduct a visual inspection to ensure the fan turns freely Ifthere is no physical evidence that the fan is bad the fan motor can be checked with a 24Vdc Cooling Fans digital mutli meter Heat Sink amp Internal Set the digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale Measure across the fan motor terminals If zero ohms are measured conclude that the fan motor is shorted If infinite ohms are measured conclude that the fan motor is burned open Ifthe fan is not working then disconnect the fan and apply 24Vdc to the fan to test the motor The Heat Sink Cool
173. efaults Gas a yr for user initialization Clear All Clears the currently saved user initialization A1 03 no longer allows selecting lt 1110 gt Sets the kVA of the drive Enter the number based on 02 04 Drive kVA Selection drive Model Use the portion of the 0 to FF kVA Programming Inverter Model CIMR E 70000 Model Number Dependent Reference Appendix B Determines if the Data Enter key must be used to input a frequency reference from the digital operator gt 0 Disabled Data Enter key must be pressed to enter a Frequency Reference Setting 02 05 Method Selection frequency reference 1 Programming Operator 1 Enabled Data Enter key is not required The frequency reference is adjusted by the up and down arrow keys on the digital operator without having to press the data enter key Determines if the drive will fault when the digital operator is removed 0 Disabled The drive will not fault when the digital operator is removed 1 Enabled The drive will fault OPR and coast to stop when the operator is removed Cumulative Operation Time 02 07 Setting Sets the initial value of the elapsed operation timer 0 to 65535 Programming Elapsed Time Set Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running Factory settings change when b5 01 1 as follows 01 06 1 01 07 38 01 08 24 tn gt F2 Operation Selectio
174. egative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal S L2 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal T L3 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal R L1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal S L2 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal T L3 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Input Diodes DI D12 or Q1 Continued on next page Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 21 Table 6 6 Main Circuit Test Procedure Continued from previous page Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal R L1 Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal S L2 Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal T L3 Expected reading is OL displayed Input Diodes DI D12 or Q1 The sof
175. elects source of speed command and sequence Closed Option Card Open b1 01 amp b1 02 Motor Preheat Applies current to create heat to avoid condensation Closed Apply amount of current as set in parameter b2 09 Speed Search 1 When closed as a run command is given drive does a speed searchstarting atmaximum frequency E1 04 currentdetection Speed Search 2 When closed as a run command is given drive does a speed search starting at speed command current detection Speed Search 3 When opened the Drive performs a baseblock motor coasts When closed the Drive performs Speed Search from set frequency Com Test Mode Used to test RS 485 422 interface High Slip Braking Closed Drive stops using High Slip Braking regardless of run command status Jog2 Closed Drive runs at speed command entered into parameter 41 17 Direction determined by fwd rev input 3 wire control Only Drive Enable Closed Drive will accept run command Open Drive will not run If running drive will stop per b1 03 Run Command must be cycled 6 2 wire Com Inv Sel Selects source of Speed Command and Sequence 4 3 wire Programming Terminal S7 Sel Closed Serial Communication R R S S Open b1 01 amp b1 02 Com Inv Sel 2 Selects source of Speed Command and Sequence Closed b1 01 amp b1 02 Open Serial Communication R R S S Auto Mode Sel Hand Auto Selection Closed Auto Open
176. ent electrical equipment Where several Drives are used ground each Drive directly or daisy chain to the ground pole s DO NOT FORM A LOOP WITH THE GROUND LEADS See Fig 2 2 Review terminal functions of signal and control circuits Refer to Table 2 8 Verify if any customer safety devices are required e g firestat freezestat high static pressure Record the following motor nameplate information Voltage Motor Rated Amps Verify that the commercial power supply is within the rated Drive input voltage Power Supply VAC Drive Input Voltage VAC Verify that the leads in the 3 Phase electric motor conduit box are configured for the proper voltage Ensure Motor Rated Current is less than or equal to Drive Output Amps If multiple motors are being used make sure that the Motor Rated Current sum is less than or equal to Drive Output Amp rating Please note that if multiple motors are being operated from one Drive each motor must have its own overload and short circuit protection Start Up 4 3 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Wire all necessary power leads to the Drive DO NOT CONNECT MOTOR TO DRIVE YET Wire all necessary ground wires to the Drive Wire all necessary control wires to the Drive Ensure that the power leads are connected to the R L1 S L2 and T L3 terminals in the Drive Tighten all of the three phase power and ground connections Please check that all control and signal terminations
177. ep Speed Reference Preset Speed A 8 N Nameplate Information eene 1 3 1 4 NEMA itte ote eee 1 2 1 4 Noise Cooling Fan niti eee eS 7 2 7 3 El ctticalx5 estet que F 1 Filter Aetas E 4 F 1 5 27 6 19 6 20 9 No Load Current sss 5 32 11 O PEE br ERU 3 4 Function during Auto Run sss A 24 Off delay ette ene th e A 5 On delay Timet senserint 5 9 A 4 A 5 Open 15 1 2 1 4 1 9 1 10 1 13 C 4 Operation ete tet t 3 7 3 9 Status 26 Operator Programming Errors 6 12 Option aD ee 6 3 6 4 Communication Error Selection 5 32 A 11 LonWorks Communication Setup 5 32 A 11 Options Peripheral E 4 Orientation Drive in cree tene Ree teers eee toe ede 1 14 5 27 6 19 6 20 9 Output Current Monitor 01 03 2 14 A 17 A 26 Frequency See Frequency Output C 2 to C 4 Ground Fault Detection Selection 5 45 6 4 A 22 MORItOIS secte tee A 17 A 26 A 27 Power Monitor U1 08 sse A 26 Power 1 2 1 3 1 11 C 2 to C 4
178. er an initialization is performed parameter A1 03 will automatically be set back to 0 Stop Operation e Switch Switch FWD Run Stop NC contact NO contact i Run command 52 on momentary close I 9 REV Run Stop Stop command SN stop on momentary open Forward reverse command multi function input 2 wire control 3 wire control E 4 d Fig 5 1 2 amp 3 Wire Control Wiring Examples IMPORTANT Some parameters are unaffected by either the 2 Wire or 3 Wire initialization The following parameters will not be reset when parameter A1 03 2220 or 3330 A1 00 Language Selection E1 03 V f Pattern Selection 02 04 kVA Selection Programming 5 3 b1 Sequence The Sequence Group contains parameters associated with starting and stopping the Drive Parameters involving the Run Command Speed Reference location Stopping Method and Hand Auto changeover are located in this group W b1 01 Reference Speed Command Source Selection Seting 0 Operator Digital Preset Speed 41 01 Terminals Analog Input Terminal A1 or Terminal A2 see Parameter H3 13 Serial Com RS 485 Terminals R R S and S Option PCB Option Board connected at 2CN In order to run the Drive and motor the Drive must receive a Run command and a speed command Parameter b1 01 specifies from where the speed command is received when in the Auto mode Switching into the Auto mode can be
179. erraz A70P100 4 700V 100A Ferraz AS0QS 125 4 500V 125A Bussmann FWH 125B 500V 125A 4030 Ferraz 70 100 4 700 100 Ferraz AS0QS125 4 500V 125A Bussmann FWH 125B 500V 125A 4037 Ferraz 70 125 4 700V 125A Ferraz 5005125 4 500 125 Bussmann FWH 150B 500V 150A 4045 Ferraz 70 150 4 700 150 Ferraz 5005150 4 500 150 Bussmann FWH 175B 500V 175A 4055 Ferraz A70P200 4 700V 200A Ferraz 7005200 4 700 200 Bussmann FWH 200B 500V 200A 4075 Ferraz 70 250 4 700 250 Ferraz 5005250 4 500 250 Bussmann FWH 250A 500V 250A 4090 Ferraz A70P300 4 700V 300A Ferraz 5005300 4 500 300 Bussmann 170M4611 690V 350A 4110 Ferraz 70 350 4 700 350 Ferraz A50P350 4 500V 350A Bussmann 170M4611 690V 350A 4132 Ferraz A70P400 4 700V 400A Ferraz 70 500 4 700 500 Bussmann 170M5610 690V 500A 4160 Ferraz 70 450 4 700 450 Ferraz 7005700 4 700 700 Bussmann FWH 600A 500V 600A 4185 Ferraz A70P600 4 700V 600A Ferraz 7005700 4 700 700 Bussmann FWH 700A 500V 700A 4220 Ferraz A70P700 4 700V 700A Bussmann FWH 800A 500V 800A Bussmann FWH
180. es tere ema decease ee ae es 5 61 Chapter 6 Diagnostics amp Troubleshooting 6 1 Fault Detection MP aE E EEE AAE EERE TAA e E EAEn 6 2 Pini eol 6 9 Operator Programming Errors 6 12 Auto Turing eei ate Pacey ee cee eee ds 6 13 Table of Contents vi Digital Operator COPY Function Faults 2 6 14 Miete eec mm 6 15 Main Circuit Test Procedure eere rrr tr eng bed brechen 6 21 Drive Date Stamp Information 6 25 Chapter 7 Maintenance acce e ce ree rties ese sua see nun n nnn aa raura ux RXR 7 1 Periodic Inspectiori eerte aE en ETE Y Ee ror Do PER ERE de 7 2 Preventive 7 3 Heatsink Cooling Fan nnne 7 4 Removing and Mounting the Terminal 7 6 Appendix A nnmnnn nnmnnn A 1 Parameter List iet ree nee ree nex Ee ag oo nex ke ERE HER EXER ERE ERR n A 2 Monitor iier A 26 Fault Trace List ioi oreet eret iri ee rtu gen va vade ee Pes ele ee Presto vede A 28 Fault Histo 29 Decimal to H
181. evel Set as a percentage of maximum frequency E1 04 0 00 to 0 to 100 0 pom foe b5 16 Sleep Delay Tim Sets the sleep function delay time in terms of seconds 0 0 to 25 5 0 0sec Sleep Time PI Accel Decel Time s Acc Dec Time Applies an accel decel time to the PI setpoint reference 0 0 to 25 5 PI Setpoint Selection 0 Disabled 1 0 0 00 to 100 00 0 00 0 to 39999 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running Range depends b5 20 setting Units depend on b5 31 setting Parameters A 6 Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name Descnplion Setting Factory Menu No Digital Operator Display p Range Setting Location PI Feedback Square Root 0 Disabled Function Selection 1 Enabled 1 Programming PI Feedback SqRt b5 29 PI Square Root Gain A multiplier applied to the square root of the feedback 0 00 to 2 00 1 00 Programming PI Fb SqRt Gain y i i i Output Square Root hate b5 30 Monitor Selection 1 Programming PI Out Moni SqRt Sets units for b5 19 U1 24 U1 38 WC InchOfWater PSEIb SqrInch GPM Gallons Min F DegFahrenheit CFM Cubic ft Min gt 55 31 CMH
182. ex A 30 Appendix B Capacity Related B 1 e E rm B 2 aceon C 1 Standard Drive Specifications 2 Appendix D Communication 1 eene nenne nennen D 1 Using Modbus Communication essssssseeeneeee eene nennen D 2 Modbus Function Code Details D 7 Modbus Dala Tabl65 cera da ue e D 9 Modbus Self DIadgnosis Oan peed one atitem UD bee T D 14 Table of Contents vii Appendix E Peripheral Devices E 1 Appendix F Branch Circuit Short Circuit 0 1 2 1 00 0 2 Branch Circuit Overload 44 04 0 0 0 E 5 Peripheral DEVICES fai iic pee terit caves aye e dev a teer een LOS tei Ta E 6 EMC Compatibility F 1 EMG Compatibility D stt ote etu tris o fedele dius F 2 Electromagnetic Compatibility F 3 noc Inde
183. f 1110 User Initialize is no longer a available in A1 03 02 05 Frequency Reference Setting Method Selection 9 Pisis Enabled factory default The factory default setting of the Frequency Reference Setting Method parameter 02 05 1 Enabled dictates that when setting a Speed Command via the digital operator Hand mode it is not necessary to press the DATA ENTER key before the Drive will begin to accelerate or decelerate to the new set speed This is referred to as MOP Motor Operated Poten tiometer type functionality When 02 05 1 Enabled the speed command is stored to memory 5 seconds after the INCREASE or DECREASE keys are released When 2 05 0 Disabled the digital operator INCREASE and DECREASE keys will change the speed command but the Drive will not accelerate or decelerate to the new speed command until the DATA ENTER key is pressed In order to change the Speed Command in the HAND mode U1 01 must be the top monitor and then the ENTER key must be pressed in order to access the Speed Command function This in not to be confused with pressing the ENTER key in order to achieve a change in speed using the INCREASE and DECREASE keys which is the subject of parameter 02 05 Programming 5 56 B 02 06 Operation Selection when Digital Operator is Disconnected Seting 9 Enabled factory default Leaving 02 06 enabled will cause the Drive to fault when the digital operator is
184. f responsiveness if hunting prevention is enabled Gain setting for the Hunting Prevention Function If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded and n1 01 1 increase the gain by 0 1 until vibration ceases If the motor stalls while 1 01 1 decrease the gain by 0 1 until the stalling ceases Sets how aggressively the drive decreases the output frequency as it stops the motor If overvoltage OV faults occur during HSB this parameter may need to be increased Sets the maximum current to be drawn during a HSB stop Higher n3 02 settings will shorten motor stopping times but cause increased motor current and therefore increased motor heating Sets the amount of time the Drive will dwell at E1 09 Minimum Frequency If this time is set too low the machine inertia can cause the motor to rotate slightly after the HSB stop is complete and the Drive output is shut off Sets the time required for a HSB Overload Fault to occur when the Drive output frequency does not change for some reason during a HSB stop Normally this does not need to be adjusted Monitor Select 01 01 User Monitor Selection Selects which monitor will be displayed upon power up User Monitor Sel when 01 02 4 Selects which monitor will be displayed upon power up 1 Frequency Ref 2 Output Freq 3 Output Current 4 User Monitor set by 01 01 Sets the units of the Frequency References d1 01 through 41 17 and the Frequency Reference Monitor U1 01
185. fter power removal before WARNING removing any cover The charge lamp located within the Drive should be off prior to working inside Even if the charge lamp is off one must measure the AC input output and DC Bus potential to insure safe levels prior to resuming work Failure to adhere to this warning may result in personal injury or death Removing the Terminal Cover Models CIMR E7U20P4 thru 2018 0 5HP to 25 208V 240V and 40P4 thru 4018 0 5HP to 30HP 480V Loosen the screw at the bottom of the terminal cover press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the directions of arrows 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2 Refer to Fig 1 9 m Models CIMR E7U2022 thru 2110 30HP to 150HP 208V 240V and 4030 thru 4300 40HP to 500HP 480V Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover pull down the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 2 Refer to Fig 1 10 y SF C gf L 2 lo Fig 1 9 Removing the Terminal Cover Fig 1 10 Removing the Terminal Cover Attaching the Terminal Cover After wiring the terminal block attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal procedure For Models CIMR E7U2018 4018 and smaller insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove on the Drive and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it snaps
186. g nostics and Troubleshooting of the E7 Users Manual TM E7 01 To COPY parameter values into a Drive set 03 01 2 OP gt INV WRITE During the writing of the parameter values into the Drive the digital operator will display Programming 5 58 COPY OP INV COPYING A successful COPY of the parameter values will display COPY COPY COMPLETE An error may occur while writing the parameter values to the Drive If an error is displayed press any key to cancel the error display and return to parameter 03 01 Error displays and their meanings are covered in Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting of the E7 Users Manual TM E7 01 Itis possible to compare the parameter values stored in the digital operator with the parameter values currently in the Drive by using the VERIFY function This VERIFY function should not be confused with the VERIFY that is displayed on the digital operator when viewing the Modified Constants menu To VERIFY the parameter values in the Drive as compared with those stored in the digital operator set 03 01 3 OP lt gt INV VERIFY During the comparing of the parameter values into the Drive the digital operator will display VERIFY DATA VERIFYING A successful VERIFY of the parameter values will display VERIFY VERIFY COMPLETE If all the parameter values stored the digital operator do not match those programmed in the Drive the digital operator displays the following
187. g modules or components clean and dry air at a pressure between 55 85 psi Are there any irregularities such as disecloration r ados Replace the capacitors or Drive DC bus capacitors Apply power to the Drive and conduct the following inspection Table 7 2 Periodic Inspections With Power Applied Corrective Action Is there any abnormal noise or vibration or has the total operating time exceeded 20 000 hours Check U1 40 for elapsed cooling fan operation time Cooling fan s Replace Cooling Fan Maintenance 7 2 Preventive Maintenance Table 7 3 Preventive Maintenance Inspection Points Check Points Every 3 6 Months Ambient Temperature Humidity Environment Dust Harmful Gas General Oil Mist Abnormal vibration or noise AC Power Supply Main circuit amp control voltage Loose lugs screws amp wires Hot spots on parts orrosion Conductors amp Wire Bent conductors Connections Breakage cracking or discoloration Check spacing Transformers amp Reactors Discoloration or Noise X Terminal Blocks Loose damaged AC Power Circuit amp Devices Leakage DC Bus Capacitors Ruptures broken expansion Capacitance amp insulation resistance Relays amp Contactors Noisy Soft Charge Resistors Cracked Discoloration Control Circuits Operation Speed reference voltage current I O contact operation f Abnormal fan noise Cooling System Cooling Fans Fins amp Heatsink Loose connectors Fre
188. gital Operator Display Description Cause Corrective Action Check the input circuit and reduce the input power to within specifications OV DC Bus Overvoltage NEMUS 1 The deceleration time is set too E DC Bus Overvolt 208 240Vac Trip point is gt 400Vdc Hon Extend the time in C1 02 Flashing 480Vac Trip point is 2 800Vdc Power factor correction capacitors are being used on the input to the Drive High input voltage at R L1 S L2 and T L3 Remove the power factor correc tion capacitors When the Forward H1 0X 81 or Reverse H1 0X 82 Emer gency Override multi function input is closed the drive will run at either the B1 14 reference B1 15 0 or the AUTO reference B1 15 1 and OVRD Emer gency Override will be dis OVRD played on the digital operator Emergency Override Forward or Reverse Emergency Emergency Override is active Override input is closed If the Drive Enable H1 0X 6A or Bypass Drive Enable H1 0X 70 is programmed the Emergcy Override emergency override function can only be activated when the Enable input is open If the Enable input is closed at any time during emergency override the drive will stop PRHT Motor Preheating Motor Preheating Motor is preheating Motor Preheat closed oom Check the input circuit and increase the input power to within specifications UV DC Bus Undervoltage ae pe hie cU dese The DC bus voltage is lt L2 05 time i
189. h commanded speed There are 14 different preset V f patterns to select from with varying voltage profiles saturation levels frequency at which maximum voltage is reached and maximum frequencies There are also settings for Custom V f patterns that will allow the programmer to manually set Customize the V f pattern using parameters E1 04 through 1 13 Using parameter E1 03 the programmer can select one of the preset V f patterns or chose between a custom V F pattern with an upper voltage limit 1 03 Custom V F and a custom V f pattern without a voltage limit E1 03 FF Custom w o limit Programming 5 29 Table 3 Preset V f Patterns a Specifications 1 03 V f Pattern 1 Specifications E1 03 V f Pattern 1 High Starting Torque 1 High Starting Torque 2 High 60Hz Saturation Starting High Starting Torque 2 Torque 1 a High 50Hz Saturation A Starting 0 6 Torque 2 General purpose Variable Torque 1 Variable Torque 2 High Speed Operation Variable Torque 1 Variable Torque Variable Torque 2 If one of the custom V f patterns is selected then parameters E1 04 through E1 13 will determine the V F pattern Table 3 is for 240V class units only for 480V class unit multiply the voltage value by 2 When a factory Initialization is performed the setting of E1 03 is unaffected but the settings of E1 0
190. h terminals immediately after the power has been turned off Doing so can result in electric shock Please refer to Warnings on page i Prior to removing any protective cover or wiring any part of the Drive remove all power sources including main input power and control circuit power Wait a minimum of 5 minutes after power removal before WARNING removing any cover The charge lamp located within the Drive should be off prior to working inside Even if the charge lamp is off one must measure the AC input output and DC Bus potential to insure safe levels prior to resuming work Failure to adhere to this warning may result in personal injury or death Table 7 1 Periodic Inspections With no Power Applied Corrective Action External terminals Are all screws and bolts tight Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly mounting bolts connectors etc Are connectors tight Reconnect the loose connectors Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using i i 9 Cooling ans clean and dry air at a pressure between 55 85 psi Control PCB Terminal PCB Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the Power PCB PCBs Gate Drive PCBs Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using clean and dry air at a pressure between 55 85 psi Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean Input Diodes IPMs Output Transistors Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun usin
191. h tesets 5 and ties gone resets 5 for a long Se sgan but motor Sil and runt then reset after 4 thorted trips again restart times elapte i4 Fig 5 37 Automatic Restart Timing Diagram Programming 5 46 The auto restart count is reset back to 0 if any of the following occur No further faults for ten minutes after the last retry e The Drives power is turned off the Drive must be without power long enough to let control power dissipate SHIFT RESET key is pushed after the last reset attempt The setting of parameter L5 02 determines whether the fault output MA MB will be closed during an auto restart attempt The setting of L5 02 can be important when interfacing the Drive with other equipment The following faults will allow the Auto Restart function to initiate e OC Overcurrent Output Open Phase Input Phase Loss e PUF DC Bus Fuse OLI Motor Overload e OL3 Overtorque e OL2 Drive Overload e OV DC Bus Overvoltage e Ground Fault e UVI DC Bus Undervoltage e OHI Overheat In order for auto restart after a UV1 fault Momentary Power Loss Ride thru must be enabled L2 01 1 PwrL Ride Thru t or 2 CPU Power Active Setting H2 01 or H2 02 equal to 1E configures a digital output as Restart Enabled to signal if an impending auto restart is possible Programming 5 47 L6 Torque Detection B L6 01 Torque Detection Selection 1 O o Po
192. he Drive Parameter L8 19 is set in percentage of maximum frequency E1 04 Programming 5 51 01 Monitor Configuration B 01 01 User Monitor Selection Setting Range 61053 Factory Default 6 e dfa C e Programming 5 52 B 01 02 Power On Monitor Seting Frequency Reference factory default User Monitor set by 01 01 When the Drive is powered up three monitors are displayed on the digital operator The first and largest monitor is the Power On monitor The factory default Power On monitor is Speed Command U1 01 Below the Speed Command monitor are the next two sequential monitors Output Frequency U1 02 and Output Current U1 03 Pressing the INCREASE key once scrolls the monitors to show the User Monitor as selected by 01 01 The factory default for 01 01 is the Output Voltage monitor U1 06 The active monitor displayed when the Drive 1s powered on can be changed to either be U1 01 Speed Command U1 02 Output Frequency U1 03 Output Current or the User Monitor Whichever monitor is selected as the Power On top moni tor the two monitors displayed below it are the next two sequential monitors See example below DRIVE Frequency Ref Active Monitor Title Active Monitor 60 00Hz TP N sequential SEDE Output Current monitors U1 03 10 05A For example if the Drive needs to display the Elapsed Timer as the Power On monitor then 01 01
193. he Speed Command b2 DC Braking The DC Braking Group contains parameters associated with the DC injection braking feature Parameters involving the start ing frequency current level braking time and motor pre heat current level are located here B b2 01 DC Injection Braking Start Frequency Setting Range 0 0 to 10 0 Hz Factory Default 0 5 Hz Parameter b2 01 sets the output frequency where the Drive begins DC Injection during Ramp to stop in order to lock the rotor of the motor and established the end point of the ramp If b2 01 E1 09 Minimum Frequency then DC Injection begins at 1 09 Parameter b2 01 also determines the output frequency that the Drive must be at or below before Zero Speed condition is considered true This affects any digital output configured as a Zero Speed signal 2 0 1 Zero Speed Programming 5 10 DC injection E Output Frequency Fig 5 8 DC Injection Braking During Stopping 12 02 DC Injection Braking Current Setting Range 0 to 100 Factory Default 50 The level of DC Injection Braking Current affects the strength of the magnetic field attempting to lock the motor shaft Increasing the level of current will increase the amount of heat generated by the motor windings and should only be increased to the level necessary to hold the motor shaft DC Injection current is set in percentage of Drive rated output current Drive rated output current is stated on the Drive
194. he digital operator is not attached or the digital opera tor connector is broken Check the digital operator connector Verify the setting of 02 06 Check the input circuit and reduce the input power to within specifications Extend the time in C1 02 Remove the power factor correction capacitors Oper Disconnect run through the digital operator High input voltage at R L1 S L2 and T L3 DC Bus Overvoltage 208 240Vac Trip point is 2 400Vdc 480Vac Trip point is 2 800Vdc The deceleration time is set too short OV DC Bus Overvolt Power factor correction capacitors are being used on the input to the Drive Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 6 Table 6 1 Fault Displays and Processing Digital Description Cause Corrective Action Operator Display Open phase on input of the Drive Check the input voltage hoe L M RS 7 at Tighten the terminal screws Momentary power loss occurred Check the input voltage Input Phase Loss 2 PF I Input voltage fluctuationtoolarge Check the input voltage Input Pha Loss Drive input power supply has an open phase or has a large imbalance of input voltage Verify parameter L8 06 is set correctly per the kVA tables on pages C 2 and C 3 Adjust L8 06 according to your application The higher the value the less sensitive it becomes Parameter L8 06 value is set CAUTION Changing this incorrectly parameter from the factory default setting may cause Drive failure and void the prod
195. he equipment is received must be reported immediately to the commercial carrier that transported the material Shipping damage is not covered by the Yaskawa warranty After unpacking and inspecting for damage verify that internal wire connections have not come loose during shipment by spot checking wire terminations with a screwdriver or the appropriate tool E7 Drive storage must be in a clean and dry location Maintain the factory packaging and provide covering as needed to protect the E7 from construction site dirt water debris and traffic prior to and during construction Nameplate Information A nameplate is attached to the right side of each Drive The following nameplate is an example for a standard Drive Drive Model Number MODEL CIMR E7U2011 SPEC 20111A lt Q Drive Spec Number Input Power Rating INPUT 200 240V 50 60Hz 52A Output Power Rating OUTPUT AC3PH 0 240V 0 120Hz 45A 17kVA OIN MASS 7 0kg Weight Serial Number gt 5 PRG E TUI UL File Number J9 FILE E131457 Note The Drive Model Number and Drive Spec Number are required to completely identify a Drive Fig 1 1 E7 Drive Nameplate Physical Installation 1 3 Drive Model Numbers The model number on the nameplate indicates the design specification voltage and rating of the Drive in alphanumeric codes CIMR E7 02011 AC Drive E7 Family No
196. he front cover onto the Drive until the front cover snaps into place Physical Installation 1 16 Models CIMR E7U2022 thru 2110 30HP to 150HP 208V 240V and 4030 thru 4300 40HP to 500HP 480V For Models CIMR E7U2022 4030 and larger remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures to remove the Digital Operator and front cover Removing the Digital Operator Use the same procedure for Models CIMR E7U2018 4018 and smaller B Removing the Front Cover Loosen all screws on the front cover Lift up at the location labeled 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal card and move in the direction of arrow 2 Fig 1 13 Removing the Front Cover Attaching the Front Cover Attach the front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it 1 Confirm that the Digital Operator is not mounted on the front cover Contact faults can occur if the cover is attached while the Digital Operator is mounted to it 2 Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Drive and press in on the cover until it snaps into place on the Drive Physical Installation 1 17 B Attaching the Digital Operator After attaching the front cover mount the Digital Operator onto the Drive using the following procedure 1 Hook the Digital Operator at A two locations on the front cover by moving in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in the following illustration 2 Press the Digital Operator in the d
197. he opposite end should be isolated with electrical tape IMPORTANT Grounding of the E7 enclosure and motor is required for proper system operation Electrical Installation 2 11 Control Wiring Control Circuit Wire Sizes The auto mode speed reference speed command field wiring connection is made to E7 Drive terminals A1 or A2 signal positive AC signal common and G shield Keep this lead length as short as possible to maintain signal quality Insulated twisted shielded pair wire 2 conductor 18 ga Belden 8760 or equivalent is required Do not run these wires in the same conduit as other AC power or control wires The shield must be connected on this end only stub and isolate the other end The A2 signal employed is 4 to 20 mA with parameter H3 08 set for 2 4 20 mA For 0 to 10 VDC parameter H3 08 is set for 0 0 10 VDC and the E7 control board DIP switch S1 2 must be in the OFF position See Fig 2 4 For remote operation keep the length of the control wiring to 50m or less Separate the control wiring from high power lines input power motor leads or relay sequence circuits to reduce noise induction from peripheral devices When setting speed commands frequency references from an external speed potentiometer and not from the Digital Opera tor use shielded twisted pair wires and ground the shield to terminal E G as shown in Fig 2 3 Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table 2 7 E
198. ht sides in the direction of arrows 3 and remove the fan cover from the fan Power MM Fig 7 1 Cooling Fan Replacement Procedure Installing the Heatsink Cooling Fan Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan Be sure that the air flow direction indicated by the arrows above faces into the Drive Connect the power connector securely and place the power connector and cable into the fan cover Mount the fan cover on the Drive Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on the Drive Maintenance 7 4 Models CIMR E7U2022 thru 2110 30HP to 150HP 208V 240V and 4024 thru 4300 40HP to 500HP 480V A cooling fan assembly is attached to the top inside the Drive The cooling fan assembly includes the heat sink cooling fans and the internal cooling fan The cooling fan s can be replaced without removing the Drive from the enclosure panel B 1 25 3 Removing the Cooling Fan Assembly Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan assembly Remove the terminal cover Drive cover Digital Operator and front cover from the front of the Drive Remove the Control PCB bracket if necessary to which the cards are mounted Remove all cables connected to the Control PCB and remove the cooling fan power connector from the fan board 13 PCB positioned near the top of the Drive Remove the cooling fan power connectors from the gate drive bo
199. i aes eee 3 3 MOP Motor Operated Pot Function 5 54 A 12 A 24 Reference Memory sse A 9 Motor Auto Tufi ig tette tee 5 59 Fault Displays amp Processing 6 13 HOW Mg 5 59 MT 55 3 7 3 14 Motor Rated 4 A 25 Motor Rated A 25 DitectiOn xong cte ede 4 7 6 17 No Load Current NLA 5 32 11 ee AR tete eros A 11 Pre Heat 5 11 A 4 Protection i se e d e ua eT eee RES C 4 Overheat z esie eben OIM A 19 Ovetlo d 4 eU IRE RS A 19 Rated Current FLA 4 6 5 31 6 13 A 11 A 25 B 4 Rated 4 5 4 6 A 10 C 2 Speed 11 02 3 9 26 Stopping Method Selection 4 7 5 6 A 4 Temperature 16 A 19 8 6 16 to 6 20 Wiring itus emere deret 2 3 2 11 2 18 Mounting Dimensions 2 2 1 7 to 1 10 Multi function Analog Inputs essere REN 2 12 2 14 2 18 5 33 5 38 A 4 A 9 A 16 Multi function Analog Outputs 2 12 2 14 2 18 A 17 Multi function Digital Inputs sse Venu Me MA IE 2 12 2 14 2 18 6 9 6 15 A 12 to A 14 Multi function Digital Outputs 2 12 2 14 2 18 A 15 Multi st
200. icators Lit when a forward run command is input and when Drive is in Hand Mode D n AUTO Sequence SEQ Indicator The status of the AUTO Sequence SEQ indicator is shown in Table 3 3 This indicator is always when the Drive is in the Hand mode When the Drive is in the Auto mode the SEQ indicator status is dependent on the setting of parameter b1 02 Run Command Selection Table 3 3 AUTO Sequence SEQ Indicator Indicator Status Hand Mode Auto Mode Parameter b1 02 Run Command Selection is set to terminal strip communications or an option board as indicated below b1 02 1 Terminals 2 Communications 3 Option PCB Parameter b1 02 Run Command Selection is set to digital operator as indicated below b1 02 0 Operator Digital Operator 3 5 AUTO Reference REF Indicator The status of the AUTO Reference REF indicator is shown in Table 3 4 This indicator is always when the Drive is in the Hand mode When the Drive is in the Auto mode the REF indicator status is dependent on the setting of parameter b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection Table 3 4 AUTO Reference REF Indicator Indicator Status Hand Mode Auto Mode Parameter b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection is set to terminal strip communications or an option board as indicated below On b1 01 1 Terminals N A 2 Communications 3 Option PCB
201. in 2CN an OPEO5 Operator Programming IMPORTANT Error will be displayed on the digital operator and the Drive will not run B b1 02 Run Source Seting Terminals factory default Option PCB Programming 5 4 To successfully operate the Drive remotely an external run command must be received by the Drive Parameter b1 02 specifies from where the run command will be accepted Although the Run Source and the Reference Source b1 01 are normally taken from the same source e g digital operator terminals or serial communication this is not always the case To issue a run command from the digital operator Set b1 02 0 Operator and use the HAND and OFF buttons to start and stop the Drive To issue the run command from the terminals Set b1 02 1 Terminals and select between 2 wire and 3 wire control operation by doing the following 2 Wire Control The factory default setting is for 2 wire operation In the 2 wire configuration a closure between S1 and SN will be interpreted as a Forward Run command by the Drive A closure between S2 and SN will be interpreted as a Reverse Run command If both S1 and S2 are closed the Drive will stop decelerate to zero speed and the digital operator will display an EF external fault alarm Flashing FWD Run Stop REV Run Stop Fig 5 2 Wire Control 3 Wire Control When any of the multi function digital input parameters H1 01 through H1 05 is set to
202. ing Fans cool the heat sink to remove heat from the Drive Conduct a visual inspection to ensure the fan turns freely Ifthere is no physical evidence that the fan is bad the motor can be checked with a 230 240Vac Cooling Fans digital mutli meter Heat Sink Seta digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale Measure across the fan motor terminals If the fan motor is good the measured value should be about 500 ohms If zero ohms are measured conclude that the fan motor is shorted If infinite ohms are measured conclude that the fan motor is burned open If the fan is not working then disconnect the fan and apply 230 240Vac to the fan to test the motor Large Drive units contain a Cooling Fan Fuse It is located on either the Gate Drive Board 3PCB or the Tap Change Board 8PCB If the Cooling Fan Fuse is open then the 230 240Vac cooling fans may be defective Cooling Fan Fuse Seta digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale Place one lead of the multi meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the multi meter on the other side of the fuse Ifthe fuse is good the measured value will be zero ohms If the fuse is bad the measured value will be infinite ohms Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 24 Drive Date Stamp Information This information is used to determine when a Drive was built to see if it is within its warranty period The date stamp is located on the lower right side of the Drive Fig
203. ing H2 01 H2 02 Loss of Ref configures a digital output as a Frequency Reference Loss indication only when L4 05 1 Enabled of PrevRef Programming 5 45 L5 Fault Restart B 15 01 Number of Auto Restart Attempts Setting Range 0 to 10 Factory Default 0 B 15 02 Auto Restart Operation Selection Seng 0 Fit Relay factory default Fle Relay Active B L5 03 Maximum Restart Time After Fault Setting Range 0 5 to 600 0 Seconds Factory Default 180 0 Seconds All major faults will cause the Drive to stop For some faults it is possible to configure the Drive to attempt a restart automatically After the fault occurs the Drive baseblocks for L2 03 or L5 03 whichever is greater After the baseblock is removed the Drive attempts to clear the fault The internal fault count is incremented by 1 If the Drive was successful in reset ting the fault the Drive begins outputting voltage to the motor If the Drive was not successful in resetting the fault the Drive again waits for the time set in L2 03 or L5 03 whichever is greater and the process 1s repeated The process repeats until the maximum number of restart attempts as programmed in the parameter L5 01 is reached i trying each i i i successful 16 03 seconds try ag H Attempts i TIME f f 01 53 4 i 5 6 Reset Count A Ha he i gt TIME Voltage E Drive trips on OC condition temains hig
204. ing the programmed rate once again 15 below the L3 02 level Programming 5 41 Stall level during acceleration Output Current Time Output frequency Output frequency is controlled to prevent the motor stalling Time Fig 5 32 Detailed Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration If L3 01 2 Intelligent the intelligent stall prevention is enabled The active acceleration time is ignored and the Drive will attempt to accelerate as quickly as possible without exceeding the L3 02 output current level IMPORTANT Stall Prevention during Acceleration is not effective when the output frequency is less than GHz The following figure demonstrates acceleration when L3 01 1 General Purpose a Set accel time b Accel time is extended Output Frequency Output Current TIME Fig 5 33 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration The L3 02 parameter is set as a percentage of the Drive rated output current If the motor capacity is small compared to the Drive s capacity or if the motor stalls during acceleration lower the set value of L3 02 Programming 5 42 13 04 Stall Prevention Selection During Decel Seting 0 P General Purpose factory default Intelligent Stall prev w R The stall prevention during deceleration function adjusts the deceleration time in order to prevent OV fault trips during deceleration If L3 04 0 Disable
205. ing with V f control The gain adjustment may be insufficient Reset the gain to a more effective level by raising the value of C4 02 Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Parameter and then lowering the setting of n1 02 Hunting Prevention Gain Oscillation and hunting are occurring with PI control If there is oscillation or hunting during PI control check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust P and I parameters Disable integral I control Reduce the proportional gain P until hunting stops e Reintroduce the integral function starting with long integral time values to eliminate the P offset Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 19 If the Motor Rotates Even When Drive Output is Stopped If the motor rotates even when the Drive is stopped the DC injection braking may be insufficient If the motor continues operating at low speed without completely stopping after a stop has been executed it means that the DC injection braking is not decelerating the motor enough Adjust the DC injection braking as follows Increase the parameter b2 04 DC Injection Braking initial excitation Time at Stop setting Increase the parameter b2 02 DC Injection Braking Current setting If Zero Volts is Detected When a Motor is Started or Stalls Generation of 0 V main circuit voltage and stalling can occur if a motor is turning when it is started and the DC injection braking is insufficient This can be prevented
206. initial delay of approximately 12 seconds the Drive will sample the DC BUS voltage every 1 28 seconds to determine the minimum and maximum voltage readings The difference between the minimum and maximum voltage is averaged over ten consecutive scans If this averaged value is greater than the trip level as determined by L8 06 L8 06 x 400 for 200 volt class Drives L8 06 x 800 for 400 volt class Drives the Drive shuts down and displays an input phase loss fault Closed Phase Loss Open Fault Contact Input Phase Loss DC Bus NTT percep eee taoa Voltage 1 10 seconds Fig 5 40 Input Phase Loss Detection Diagram Programming 5 50 B L8 09 Output Ground Fault Detection Selection Seting 9 pa Enabled factory default The Drive has a ground fault detection circuit that activates when the current to ground exceeds 50 of the Drive s rated out put current The current to ground is determined by comparing the measured current on each of the output phases If the cur rent to ground is determined to be above 50 of the Drive s rated output current the digital operator will display a GF and the Drive will coast to stop B 18 10 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Selection Os Fan On Run Mode factory default Fan Always On 18 11 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Delay Time Setting Range 0 to 300 Seconds Factory Default 300 Seconds Parameters L8 10 and L8 11 a
207. ion but the motor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too great Lengthen the acceleration time CI 01 or reduce the load Also consider increasing the motor size The motor only rotates in one direction Reverse run prohibited may be selected If b1 04 Prohibition of Reverse Operation is set to 1 reverse run prohibited the Drive will not receive reverse run commands This is the default to use both forward and reverse operation set b1 04 to 0 and operate in Auto mode The Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed If the motor rotates in the wrong direction the motor output wiring is incorrect When the Drive U T1 V T2 and W T3 terminals are properly connected to the motor the motor operates in a forward direction when a forward run command is received The forward direction depends on the manufacturer and the motor type so be sure to check the specifications The direction of rotation can be reversed by switching any two wires among U TI V T2 and W T3 Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 16 If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow Use the following information 1f the motor does not output torque or if acceleration is too slow B The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low If the value set for L3 02 Stall Prevention Acceleration Level is too low the acceleration time will be too long Check to be sure that the se
208. ions C 3 Table C 1 Common E7 Drive Specifications Model Number Specification CIMR E7U Sine wave PWM Control method V f control Speed range SE ControlCharacteristics Speed control accuracy 2 to 396 77 F 50 F 25 C x 10 C Frequency accuracy temperature characteristics Digital references 0 01 14 F to 104 F 10 C to 40 C Analog references 0 1 77 F 50 F 25 C 10 C Frequency setting resolution Digital references 0 01 Hz Analog references 0 025 50 Hz 10 bit with sign Frequency setting signal Speed Command 0 10 Vdc 4 20 mA Acceleration Deceleration time 0 0 to 6000 0 s 2 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings Main control functions Restarting for momentary power loss bi directional speed search overtorque detection 5 preset speeds acceleration deceleration time changes S curve acceleration 3 wire sequence auto tuning cooling fan ON OFF control torque compensation jump frequencies upper and lower limits for frequency references DC braking for starting and stopping high slip braking PI control with sleep function energy saving control Modbus communi cations RS 485 422 19 2 kbps maximum fault reset and copy function Motor protection Protection by electronic thermal overload relay Fuse blown protection Stops for fuse blown Overload capacity
209. irection of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B two locations Fig 1 14 Mounting the Digital Operator 1 Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods other than those described above damage to the Digital Operator or Drive may occur IMPORTANT 2 Never attach the front cover to the Drive with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover Damage to the Digital Operator may occur Always attach the front cover to the Drive first and then attach the Digital Operator to the front cover Physical Installation 1 18 Chapter 2 Electrical Installation This chapter describes wiring terminals main circuit terminal connections main circuit terminal wiring specifications control circuit terminals and control circuit wiring specifications Terminal Block Configuration 2 2 2 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals eeeeeeeeene 2 3 Control VITO x oso Mace dime nsn 2 12 Electrical Installation 2 1 Terminal Block Configuration The wiring terminals are shown in Fig 2 1 Li SNISC SP A1 A2 V MS5 M6 MA MB MC EG 51 52 53 54 55 56 657 FM AC AM IG S S RNE Jieecooooopoooo
210. it Careful atten tion to this recommended design practice will avoid many potential motor and Drive related problems Table 2 6 Motor Cable Length vs Carrier Frequency C6 02 Motor Cable Length 164 ft 50m maximum 328 ft 100m maximum More than 328 ft 100m See the limitations on carrier frequency based on Drive capacity and model number in Appendix B Ground Wiring Observe the following precautions when connecting the ground wire 1 208 240Vac Drives should have a ground connection with resistance of less than 1000 2 480Vac Drives should have a ground connection with resistance of less than 100 3 Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as motors or large current electrical equipment 4 Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire Leakage current flows through the Drive Therefore if the distance between the ground rod and the ground terminal is too long potential on the ground terminal of the Drive will become unstable 5 When using more than one Drive be careful not to loop the ground wire See Fig 2 2 OK NOT OK Fig 2 2 Ground Wiring Examples B Control Circuit Ground Terminals The removable Drive control terminal card provides two ground terminals marked TB3 and TB4 to accept the control wire shield connection The control wire shield should be connected on this end only t
211. ive performs internal switching so there is a certain amount of leakage current This may cause an external ground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply Whenever possible use a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage detection level 1 a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per Unit with an operating time of 0 1 s or more or one that incorporates high frequency countermeasures i e one designed for use with Drives It will also help to change the Drive s Carrier Frequency Selection C6 02 to lower the carrier frequency In addition remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened If There is Mechanical Vibration Use the following information when there is mechanical vibration B The application is making unusual sounds The following causes are possible There may be resonance between the mechanical system s natural frequency and the carrier frequency This is characterized by the motor running with no noise generation but the machinery vibrates with a high pitched whine To prevent this type of resonance adjust the carrier frequency with parameters C6 02 to C6 05 There may be resonance between an applications characteristic frequency and the output frequency of the Drive To prevent this from occurring use the jump frequency functions in parameters d3 01 to d3 04 or have the driven motor and load balanced to reduce vibration B Oscillation and hunting are occurr
212. l Selection RTS Control Sel H5 06 5 07 Communication Protocol H5 08 Selection Protocol Select 5 09 Communication Error Detection Time CE Detect Time Hex see page A 30 AN Factory Selects the speed command frequency reference input source 0 Operator Digital preset speed d1 01 1 Terminals Analog Input Terminal Al 0 to3 or Terminal A2 see parameter H3 13 2 Serial Com RS 485 terminals R R S and S 3 Option PCB Option board connected at 2CN Selects the run command input source Operator Hand and Off keys on digital operator 0 to3 Terminal Contact Closure on Terminal S1 Serial Com RS 485 terminals R R S and S Option PCB Option board connected at 2CN Selects drive station node number address for 0 to 20 Modbus terminals R S S 0 to FF N2 Set H5 01 to 0 to disable Drive responses to Modbus 9 V os 0 to 63 P1 communications Selects the baud rate for terminals R S and S 1200 Baud 2400 Baud 0to4 4800 Baud 9600 Baud 19200 Baud Selects the communication parity for terminals R R S and S 0 No Parity 0to2 1 Even Parity 2 Odd Parity Selects the stopping method when a communication error is detected 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop 90199 3 Alarm Only 4 Run at D1 04 available when H5 08 1 N2 METASYS OR 2 FLN APOGEE Enables or disables the communications timeout detection function
213. l i o Sunt A 17 Parameters ee tive ee eere A 17 A 18 Annunciation Contacts 2 2 2 000000400000 00010000001 A 15 APOGEE FLN eese iv A 18 D 1 6 3 Auto AUTO Key estetico ahd diei 3 3 Mode esae tatit ned e t er B ERE HN 3 5 REF 22020 3 2 3 6 SEQ tiet 3 2 3 5 Auto aceto ht 5 44 A 21 Count Reset liek in eee 5 44 Faults Covered srties esor eirin 5 45 Max Restart Time After 5 44 Number of Attempts sse 5 44 Auto Tuning Fault Displays and 1 6 13 HOW Osia Ld histories 5 59 M GIU eet erit vente e e ree ERE 3 7 3 14 Motor Rated Current sse A 25 Motor Rated Power 1 200022200000010000041 A 25 B BAS Communication 400 A 18 D 1 Base Block After Fault 5 44 A 19 Circuit Fault x eh eee 6 2 Minimum 22 2 5 7 A 19 B 4 Basic Programming sese 5 1 to 5 60 Baud 6 9 18 D 2 D 4 Bias 5 33 5 38 A 16 A 17 Braking DC Injection eee trees 5 9 A 4 High Slip 23 Branch Short Circuit E 2 E 3 Broken Belt Undertorque detection
214. lation 1 7 DIMENSIONS E7 NEMA 1 208 240V 88 0 115 AMPS 480V 52 0 125 AMPS w w2 w1 ue 1 1 e CY 77 4 Ene a H1 1 H MOUNTING HOLES nnnn nnnn FOR A SIZE SCREWS b LUUL LLL nnn nnmnnn ee SIZE K HOLE 2 HOLES SIZE J 2 HOLES SIZE L i b D q YZ LZ W E c B D1 9 E F a peg 8 RATED DIMENSIONS IN INCHES APPROX RATED MODEL OUTPUT NOM WEIGHT INPUT CIMR E7U CURRENT HP MOUNTING LBS AMPS m Wi H w H2 w2 D D1 B J K L 20221 88 0 30 15 16 7 68 21 06 10 00 30 1 16 10 24 3 94 1 4 4 98 6 50 7 87 1 73 5 91 2 44 1 97 1 10 53 208V 20301 115 40 17 13 8 66 24 21 10 98 30 1 16 10 24 3 94 1 4 4 98 6 50 7 87 1 73 5 91 2 44 1 97 1 10 59 240V 20221 88 0 30 15 16 7 68 21 06 10 00 30 1 16 10
215. lects the stopping method used when a stop command is given to the Drive Table 4 6 Stopping Method Selection Nees Name Setting Setting Choices Factory Settin Menu Location Ramp to Stop Quick Setting Stopping Method Selection Coast to Stop or Stopping Method DCInj to Stop Programming Coast w Timer Press the DATA ENTER key once Use the A or W keys to select the stopping method Ensure the DATA ENTER key is pressed to enter the selection in the Drive Entry Accepted briefly appears and the display is not flashing O 13 Press the MENU key once to display Operation O 14 Press the DATA ENTER key once to display Frequency Ref O 15 The STOP and FWD lights are on O 16 Press the DATA ENTER key once to enable entering of a speed command U1 01 Use the keys to set a speed command of 6 00Hz O 17 Press the HAND key once to start the motor and verify correct motor rotation for the application The RUN light turns on and the STOP light turns off If the direction of motor rotation is wrong press the OFF key The RUN light turns off and the STOP light turns on REMOVE POWER from the Drive Wait for the Red CHARGE LED near the power terminals to go out When it does swap the motor wires connected to terminals U T1 amp V T2 in the Drive Be sure to re tighten the terminal lugs APPLY POWER To verify the motor rotation 1s now correct for the application press the HAND key once to start the
216. lent M 4 0 5 04 m ri Charge indicator RRGUNGG OMAICENRL C Mel FONLIE MBL TSCHMENRROEHRDRO N6 4 0 5 0 m 3 0 0 FELTES 8 9 SVL21 TVES 91 L RET 119 12 T E3 WTI V T2 WT3 SiS O Main circuit terminals HH j aib GHG gt t NEU CE nec Ground terminal Ground terminal Models CIMR __ 2022 30 HP 208V 4030 40 HP 480V and larger Fig 2 1 Drive Terminal Configuration Electrical Installation 2 2 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed loop Connectors Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 2 1 to Table 2 2 Table 2 1 208 240Vac Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications Clamping Recommended Drive Model Nominal Torque Wire Size CIMR E7U Hp germina Screws Ib in AWG Nem mm RILI S L2 T L3 1 Ha zx A B1 B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 0 5 0 75 E 13 2 1 R LI S L2 T L3 H1 2 B2 U T1 V T2 W T3
217. llow the Drive programmer to customize the heatsink cooling fan operation Parameter L8 10 determines whether the cooling fans are always ON whenever the Drive is powered L8 10 1 Fan Always or if the cooling fans are only ON when the Drive is in a Run condition L8 10 0 Fan On Run Mode Parameter L8 11 is a delayed OFF for the cooling fan if L8 10 0 Fan On Run Mode When the cooling fans are set to turn OFF when the Run command is removed parameter L8 11 will cause the fans to continue cooling the Drive for the amount of time programmed into L8 11 after the Run command is actually removed The Drive can be programmed to allow the cooling fan to run for up to 5 minutes factory default after the run command is removed Both parameters are intended to extend fan life while still providing sufficient cooling for proper Drive operation B 18 19 Overheat Frequency Reference Reduction Level Setting Range 0 0 to 100 0 of maximum frequency Factory Default 20 0 of maximum frequency When the heatsink temperature reaches the OH Pre alarm level L8 02 and the Overheat Pre Alarm Operation Selection parameter is set for Alarm and Reduce L8 03 4 OH Alarm amp Reduce the L8 19 parameter sets the amount of speed decrease that will be applied to the Speed Command in order to lower the heatsink temperature The decrease in speed will lower the current being switched and conducted by the heat producing output transistors of t
218. low of a closed loop system by using a pressure feedback it may be convenient to view the square root of the PI output using monitor U1 37 B b5 31 PI Unit Selection Sets units for b5 19 U1 24 and U1 38 9 Fact default iter SCS Parameter adjusts the units seen the monitors 01 24 01 38 This parameter does not adjust the actual setpoint or the setpoints scaling Programming 5 24 b8 Energy Savings The energy savings function improves overall system operating efficiency by operating the motor at its highest efficiency This is accomplished by continuously monitoring the motor load and adjusting the motor terminal voltage so that the motor always operates near its rated slip frequency A motor is most efficient when operating near rated slip conditions b8 01 Energy Savings Selection Sating aa Disabled factory default Fabled When the Energy Savings function is enabled b8 01 1 Enabled the Drive reduces the output voltage to the motor below the voltage value specified by the programmed V f pattern whenever the motor load is light Since torque is reduced during this voltage reduction the voltage has to return to normal levels when the load returns The energy savings is realized through improved motor efficiency The reduced output voltage causes increased rotor slipping even with a light load A motor is most efficient when operating fully load
219. lt S6 External Fault at Terminal S6 Flashing EF7 Ext Fault S7 External Fault at Terminal S7 Flashing Remove the fault from a multi function digital input DNE The Drive does not have the enable com The Run command has been Apply the enable command ec mand when the run command is applied applied prior to the enable signal before applying the run command ashing FAN Failure of the Drive internal cooling fan Cooling Fan Error when L8 32 0 Drive cooling fan has stopped Replace the cooling fan Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 9 Table 6 2 Alarm Displays and Processing Digital Operator Display FBL Feedback Loss LL3 Loss of Load Det 1 Flashing OH Heatsnk Overtemp Flashing OH2 Over Heat 2 Flashing OH3 Motor Overheat 1 Flashing Description PI Feedback Loss This fault occurs when PI Feedback Loss Detection is programmed to fault 65 12 2 and the PI Feedback PI Feedback Loss Detection Level b5 13 for the PI Feedback Loss Detection Time b5 14 Loss of Load Detection 1 Drive output current L6 02 for more than the time set in L6 03 Cooling Fin Cooling Fin Fan Overheat The temperature of the Drive cooling fin exceeded the temperature programmed in parameter L8 02 Drive Internal Cooling Fan Drive overheat pre alarm signal is input from a multi function digital input terminal Motor Overheating Alarm The Drive stops or continues operation according to
220. ltage Min Voltage Mid Output Voltage B Mid Voltage B Base Voltage Base Voltage Set to the nominal voltage of the incoming line 0 50Hz 1 60 Hz Saturation 2 50 Hz Saturation 3 72 Hz 4 SO Hz VTI 5 50 Hz VT2 6 60 Hz VTI 7 60 Hz VT2 8 SO Hz HSTI 9 50 Hz HST2 A 60 Hz HSTI B 60 Hz HST2 C 90 Hz D 120 Hz Custom V F F FF Custom w o limit Output voltage V VMAX E1 05 VBASE E1 13 VA FMIN FA FBASE FMAX E1 09 E1 07 E1 06 E1 04 Frequency Hz To set V f characteristics in a straight line set the same values for 1 07 and 1 09 In this case the setting for E1 08 will be disregarded Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner E1 04 FMAX gt E1 06 FA gt E1 07 FB gt E1 09 FMIN Set only when V f is finely adjusted at rated output range Adjustment is not normally required Parameters A 10 155 to 255 0 240V 310 to 510 0 480V 0 0 to 120 0 0 to 255 0 240V 0 to 510 0 480V 0 0 to Programming 0 to 255 0 240V dm 51 a 0 18 0VAC Programming 480V 0 to 255 0 240V 0 to 510 0 10 8VAC Programming 480V 0 0 to 0 0Hz Programming 200 0 0 to 255 0 0 0VAC 240V Programmin 0 to 510 0 480V 0 to 255 0 0 0VAC 240V Programmin 0 to 510 0 8 8 480V Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter _ Parameter Name Setting Factory Menu 52 Seng Teper Motor Setup
221. lter that will be applied to both the A1 and A2 analog inputs The Drive operation becomes more stable the longer the time programmed but it becomes less responsive to rapidly changing analog signals Programming 5 39 Analog D TAS Input Filter Noisy Input Internal Analog Input Valve Signal Filtered Fig 5 31 Analog Input Filter Time Constant Effect on Noisy Signal H3 13 Master Frequency Reference Terminal Selection Sating 0 Main Fref Al factory default Main Fret A2 Parameter H3 13 allows the programmer to select which analog input will serve as the Speed Command input when Terminals are selected as the Auto Mode Speed source b1 01 1 Terminals or Terminal is selected as the reference source for the Hand mode b1 12 1 Terminals For the A2 analog input to be an effective selection for the H3 13 parameter parameter H3 09 must be configured as Aux Reference H3 09 2 Aux Reference If H3 09 2 then the A1 analog input will be used regardless of the setting of parameter b1 12 L2 Momentary Power Loss Ride thru Function When momentary power loss recovery is enabled L2 01 0 a speed search is executed to catch the potentially spinning motor shaft This speed search will occur regardless of the setting of b3 01 Speed Search Selection 12 01 Momentary Power Loss Detection Selection Setting Description 0 Perl Ride Thru CPU Po
222. m ____ Setting Location E Digital Inputs a 1E Ref Sample Hold Analog speed command is sampled then held at time of input closure External fault Normally Open Always Detected Ramp To Stop External fault Normally Closed Always Detected Ramp To Stop External fault Normally Open During Run Ramp To Stop External fault Normally Closed During Run Ramp To Stop External fault Normally Open Always Detected Coast To Stop External fault Normally Closed Always Detected Coast To Stop External fault Normally Open During Run Coast To Stop External fault Normally Closed During Run Coast To Stop External fault Normally Open Always Detected Fast Stop External fault Normally Open Always Detected Fast Stop External fault Normally Open During Run Fast Stop Terminal S6 Function External fault Normally Closed During Run Fast Stop Selection External fault Normally Open Always Detected Alarm Only Programming Terminal S6 Sel External fault Normally Closed Always Detected Alarm Only External fault Normally Open During Run Alarm Only External fault Normally Closed During Run Alarm Only PI Integral Reset Resets the PI Integral component to zero when closed PI Integral Hold Holds the PI integral value when closed PI SFS Cancel SFS SoftStart also called Accel Decel See Parameter b5 17 PI Input Level Sel Inverts the PI error signal when closed Option Inv Sel 2 S
223. meter default Initialize Parameters values and then parameter 02 03 must be set to 1 to save them If 0 to Init Parameters the parameter values are changed after 02 03 is set to 1 the user 3330 5 8 default values can be restored by setting 1 03 to 1110 2220 2 Wire Initial 3330 3 Wire Initial A1 04 Password 1 When the value set into A1 04 does NOT match the value set into 0 to 9999 Prosrammin Enter Password 1 05 parameters A1 01 thru A1 03 and A2 32 cannot be changed 5 8 All other parameters determined by 1 01 can be changed Parameter A1 05 Password 2 1 05 can be accessed by displaying parameter A1 04 then press 0 to 9999 Programming Select Password and hold the RESET key along with the MENU key simultaneously User Parameters emt emm User Parameter 1 ser Parameter 2 Programmin ser Param 2 5 8 ser Parameter 3 Selects the parameters to be available in the User Access Level 1 Programming ser Param 3 01 1 These the only parameters accessible for the user level These parameters are not related to the User Initialize function ser Parameter 4 ser Param 4 User Parameter 5 User Parameter 6 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running Programming Parameters A 2 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued No Digital Operator Display Range Setting 2 19 Menu Location Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Prog
224. mmand Adjustment of the gain setting will change the speed command that is equivalent to the maximum analog input 10Vdc 20mA If for instance the gain is increased to 200 then 10Vdc or 20mA will be equivalent to a 200 speed command and 5 VAC or 12mA will be equivalent to a 100 Speed Command Since the Drive output is limited by the maximum frequency parameter E1 04 0 5Vdc or 4 12mA will now be equivalent to 0 100 speed command span Programming 5 34 Gain 200 100 uscire i Output Frequency Bias 096 OV 5V 10V 4mA 12mA 20mA Analog Input Signal Fig 5 24 Output Frequency as Commanded via Analog Input with Increased Gain Setting Adjustment of the bias setting will likewise adjust the speed command that is equivalent to the minimum analog input level 0Vdc or If for instance the bias is set to 25 then OVdc or 4mA will be equivalent to 25 speed command Since the minimum speed command is 0 an analog input of 2 5 to10Vdc or 8 to 20mA will now be equivalent to 0 100 speed command span Gain 100 Output Frequency OV 4mA PEE Bias 25 8mA Analog Input Signal Fig 5 25 Output Frequency with Reduced Bias Setting As a further example for an inverse acting speed command set the bias 100 and the gain 0 The minimum analog input level 0Vdc or 4mA will produce a 100 speed command and the maximum analog input level 10Vdc or 20mA will pro duce a 0
225. motor and turn off the AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF lights The FWD light turns on and the motor will rotate at the speed entered in step 16 Start Up 4 7 Li 18 Press the MONITOR key to display the U1 monitors Use the A and W keys to view Output Current U1 03 Output Voltage U1 06 and DC Bus Voltage U1 07 while running the Drive throughout its entire speed range Record the following information at each speed Frequency Output Current Output Voltage DC Bus Voltage Hz A VAC VDC Monitor U1 01 Monitor U1 03 Monitor U1 06 Monitor U1 07 When this table is complete press the OFF key The Drive will stop and the FWD light remains on This step provides benchmark data for the application from the initial start up Press the MENU key once to display Operation Press the DATA ENTER key to display Frequency Ref If using a remote speed command press the AUTO key so the AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF indicators are on This puts the Drive in Auto mode Ifusing an external speed command determine whether the speed command is a 0 10Vdc or a 4 20mA signal Connect the positive side of a 0 10Vdc signal to terminal 1 Connect the positive side of a 4 20mA signal to terminal A2 Connect the COMMON of the speed command to terminal AC Note Connect only one input The factory default is 0 10Vdc To change to 4 20mA adjust parameter H3 08 to 2 4 20mA and ensure DIP Switch S1 2 located on the terminal board is in the ON
226. must be set to 13 and 01 02 must be set to 4 The next time Drive power is cycled the digital operator displays U1 13 Elapsed Time U1 14 Flash ID and U1 15 Term AI Level DRIVE Elapsed Time Active Monitor Title Active Monitor U1 13 Flash ID Next two U1 14 03010 sequential U1 15 51 2 Term Al Level Programming 5 53 01 03 Digital Operator Display Scaling C o ie Gerry def 1 RPM Enter the of Motor Poles 40 39999 User Display Parameter 01 03 allows the programmer to change the units in which the speed monitors and some speed parameters are displayed The 01 03 parameter will change the units of the following UI1 01 Frequency Reference Monitor e UI 02 Output Frequency Monitor e U1 20 Output Frequency after Soft Start e di 01 through 41 17 Preset Frequency References and Jog Reference The table below details how the setting of 01 03 will affect the way the listed monitors and parameters will be displayed Oo o Y O 2 through 39 0 RPM enter the of motor poles 40 through 39999 Engineering Units The factory default setting 01 03 0 sets the Drive up to display the affected monitors and parameters in terms of hertz Hz If the speeds seem more natural in terms of percentage of maximum set 1 03 1 If the speeds are easier to work with when displaying the equivalent synchronous motor RPM set 01 03 the number of motor poles
227. n to insure optimum torque production Set E2 01 to the full load amps FLA value stamped on the motor s nameplate During Auto tuning it is required for the operator to enter the motor rated current in parameter T1 04 on the Auto Tuning menu If the Auto tuning operation completes successfully the value entered into T1 04 will be also written into E2 01 Programming 5 32 For applications employing a Drive that is oversized for the motor E2 01 may be set as low as 10 of the Drive output current rating The AMP value in E2 01 however must always be greater than the No Load Current value in parameter E2 03 or an OPEO02 error will be displayed B E2 03 No Load Current Setting Range Model Dependent see Appendix B Factory Default Model Dependent Set E2 03 to the motor no load current at rated voltage and rated frequency Consult the motor manufacturer for the proper value if the no load current is not stated on the motor nameplate F6 Com OPT Setup applies only to the LonWorks option B F6 01 Operation Selection After Communication Error Coast to Stop factory default Alarm Only If a serial communication option board is attached to the Drive at the 2CN connector the Drive will automatically monitor the card for any type of communication errors F6 01 is applicable no matter whether a run command or speed command is com ing via the option board digital operator or terminal input The setting of F6 0
228. n when Digital Operator is Disconnected Oper Detection Programming Parameters A 24 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued ee _ Parameter Name Setting Factory Menu Sets how time is accumulated for the elapsed timer Cumulative Operation Time 02 07 0 Power On Time 2 08 Selection 1 1 Programming Time accumulates whenever drive is powered Elapsed Time Run 1 Running Time Time accumulates only when drive is running Determines parameter values after a drive initialization A1 03 is executed This should always be set to 1 American Spec 1 American spec A WARNING Parameter 02 09 should always be set to 1 American Initialization Specification Spec Do not set This parameter does not normally 02 09 Selection require adjustment Possible damage to equipment or 1 1 Programming Init Mode Sel injury may occur if this setting is changed from 1 American Spec 02 09 is a macro parameter that can change the default values of terminal I O and many other parameters in the drive Consult the Yaskawa fac tory for details This parameter is not available in software versions gt 4010 Cumulative Cooling Fan 02 10 Operation Time Setting Sets the initial value of the heatsink fan operation time 0 to 65535 0 hours Programming Fan ON Time Set Clears the fault memory contained in the U2 and U3 Fault Trace Fault History Clear monitors 02 12 Function 0 Disabled no effect Oorl Programming
229. nd RTS control H5 07 RTS Control Sel 0 Disabled RTS is always on 1 1 Programming 1 Enabled RTS turns on only when sending c Selects the communication protocol Communication Protocol 0 Memobus Modbus Selection 0 to 2 Programming Protocol Select 1 N2 Metasys 2 FLN APOGEE 0 to 10 0 Communication Error Determines how long communications must be lost PIS D Detection Time before a fault is annunciated Works in conjunction with H 5 08 1 2 0sec Programming CE Detect Time parameters H5 05 and H5 04 0 to 90 0 5 08 2 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running After these parameters are changed drive power must be cycled before the changes will take effect Hex see page A 30 Parameters A 18 Parameter No L1 01 L1 02 L1 03 L1 04 L1 05 L2 01 L2 02 L2 03 L2 04 L2 05 Motor Overload Protection Selection MOL Fault Select Motor Overload Protection Time MOL Time Const Motor Overheat Alarm Operation Selection Mtr OH Alarm Sel Motor Overheat Fault Operation Selection Mtr OH Fault Sel Motor Temperature Input Filter Time Mtr See Filter Momentary Power Loss Detection Selection PwrL Selection Momentary Power Loss Ride thru Time PwrL Ridethru t Momentary Power Loss Mini mum Base Block Time PwrL Baseblock t Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time PwrL V F Ramp t Undervoltage Detection Level PUV Det Level Table A
230. nd broadcast data Reference Data The reference data table is shown below Reference data can be read and written to Register No Bi Bia Bis Bi Bis BRA Bits B to F Not used an Bird Bit 7 Fault contact terminal MA MC 1 ON 0 OFF 000AH to 000EH Not used Bird sn E F Note Write 0 to all unused bits Also do not write data to reserved registers Communications D 9 Monitor Data The following table shows the monitor data Monitor data can only be read Table D 5 Monitor Data Register No Drive status Bit 0 Operation 1 Operating 0 Stopped Bit 1 Reverse operation 1 Reverse operation 0 Forward operation Bit 2 Drive startup complete 1 Completed 0 Not completed Bit 3 Fault 1 Fault Bit 4 Data setting error 1 Error Bit 5 Multi function digital output 1 terminal M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 6 Multi function digital output 2 terminal M3 M4 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 7 Not used Bits 8 to F Not used Fault details Bit 0 Overcurrent OC Ground fault GF Bit 1 Main circuit overvoltage OV Bit 2 Drive overload OL2 Bit 3 Drive overheat OH1 OH2 Bit 4 Not used Bit 5 Fuse blown PUF Bit 6 PI feedback reference lost FbL Bit 7 External error EF EFO Bit 8 Hardware error CPF Bit 9 Motor overload OL1 or overtorque 1 OL3 detected Bit A PG broken wire detected PGO Overspeed OS Speed deviation DEV BitB Main circuit undervoltage UV
231. nd the terminal status is MEMOBUS Reg 06H _ 110 ON PI target value Reg OFh bit 1 Lower limit 1 jo PI Set Point Fmax x109 Constant b5 19 b5 20 55 18 U1 38 Scaling 1 0 i Differential o 0 Sealing Fdbk H3 09 16 b5 20 PISFS cancel Characteristic XX l limit H1 xx 35 Hime b5 04 PI delay time PI Output 0 g 5909 A b5 08 Gain T k Pleo Ut po 8 H b510 PI Feedback PI SFS FQ Proportional 1 L 1 21 0 my gal Integral Hold zi PI Output Terminal A1 65 02 Rasat Characteristic T PI Feedback ee bos PI Differential U1 24 1 0 Fdbk H3 09 16 Scaling PI Differential o b5 20 Fdbk H3 09 16 1 0 Sleep function b5 28 1 0 H3 09 16 selection b5 21 PI Snooze Function b5 07 55 40 0 2 T 2 offset Terminal A2 1 b5 29 O or 1o H3 09 0 1 THe j 65 24 PI output monitor PI Differential PI Differential 1 1 Wake Up Level i U1 37 Fdbk H3 09 16 Fdbk H3 09216 1 7 700000078 Feedback 2 Pl offset U1 53 b5 07 Fig 5 15 PI Block Diagram The analog feedback to the Drive for the PI control is via the A2 terminal The Drive must be programmed H3 09 B PI Feedback to use terminal A2 as feedback for the PI functionality of the Drive The PI setpoint can be configured to come from one of many different inputs or parameters The table below describes the options for originating the PI setpoint Table 1 PI Setpoint O
232. nding surfaces Ground the cable shields at both ends Ground the motor of the machine application Grounding A Remove varnish or paint Metal plate ia um Duo EMC Filter Cable length Maximum of 15 75 Motor cable Maximum of 82 feet Grounding Remove varnish or paint Fig G 2 EMC Filter Layout EMC Compatibility F 4 A A TUNE menu 4 sere oret 3 7 3 14 AC Reactor see ete ttes E 4 Accel Decel Parameters onem aite A 7 Tite S eoe eer conte hes EA WEB ORE RARIUS 5 25 Acceleration Stall Prevention Level during 5 40 6 17 A 20 ic ie cete eer e tede P Cer or Tee dee 5 25 A 7 Troubleshooting 6 17 ACCESS LEVEL p Eee 5 2 A 2 ADV menus 3 7 3 13 Alarm Displays amp Processing esses 6 9 AEARM Indicator in entente e hito 3 5 Altitude Rer eri e ETHER C 4 Ambient 1 13 C 4 Analog Inputs tete nie EP ERREUR 5 33 5 38 A 16 Connection Diagram esee 2 18 Control Circuit Terminals esses 2 14 5 33 5 38 16 Parameters ere S nts A 4 A 9 A 16 Troubleshooting see 6 15 Analog Outputs IE A 17 A 18 Connection 2 18 Control Circuit Terminals sss 2 14 Gal
233. nect wiring while the power is on Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on Do not remove or insert the digital operator while power is on Before servicing disconnect all power to the equipment The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off Status indicator LEDs and Digital Operator display will be extinguished when the DC bus voltage is below 50 VDC To prevent electric shock wait at least five minutes after all indicators are OFF and measure DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the unit This equipment uses sensitive devices and may be damaged by high voltage The Drive is not suitable for circuits capable of delivering more than the specified RMS symmetrical amperes Install adequate branch short circuit protection per applicable codes Refer to the specification Failure to do so may result in equipment damage and or personal injury Do not connect unapproved LC or RC interference suppression filters capacitors or overvoltage protection devices to the output of the Drive These devices may generate peak currents that exceed Drive specifications To avoid unnecessary fault displays caused by contactors or output switches placed between Drive and motor auxiliary contacts must be properly integrated into the control logic circuit YASKAWA is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user doing so
234. nes the number of decimal places IfDigit5 0 number format is XXXX If DigitS 1 number format is XXX X If DigitS 2 number format is XX XX If DigitS 3 number format is X XXX Programming 5 21 For example If b5 20 10425 then at 100 setpoint feedback the digital operator would display 42 5 for monitor U1 38 or U1 24 B b5 21 Sleep Source Seg i 0o e SFS Input Output of PI block PI Setpoint factory default Parameter b5 21 selects the sleep function characteristic action When b5 21 0 SFS Input the sleep function start level b5 15 is compared to the Drive s output Speed Command after PI block This is the setting that should be used for open loop or closed loop control It is also possible to have the sleep function start level b5 15 compared to the Drive input or setpoint For this special application set b5 21 1 PI Setpoint When b5 21 2 Snooze a variation of the sleep function called Snooze is enabled see parameter b5 22 to b5 27 IMPORTANT The sleep function can be used even if the PI function is disabled b5 01 0 Disabled B b5 22 PI Snooze Level Setting Range 0 to 100 Factory Default 0 05 23 PI Snooze Delay Time Setting Range 0 to 3600 Seconds Factory Default 0 Seconds B b5 24 PI Snooze Deactivation Level Setting Range 0 to 100 Factory Default 0 The Snooze Function is a variation on the Sleep Function The Snooze function must be selecte
235. ng is exceeded Lower the motor s ambient temperature to within its acceptable range B The withstand voltage between the motor phases is insufficient When the motor is connected to the Drive output Voltage surges are generated by standing waves that can occur with certain combinations of drive carrier frequency and motor cable length Normally the maximum surge voltage is three times the Drive s input power supply voltage 1 1200 for a 480Vac Be sure to use a motor with a withstand voltage between the motor phases that is greater than the maximum surge voltage In particular when using a 480Vac Drive use an inverter duty NEMA MGI Parts 30 amp 31 motor Motor protection filter can also be an effective measure If Peripheral Devices Like DDCs or Others are Influenced by Starting or Running Drive If noise is generated by Drive switching implement the following countermeasures 1 Change the Drive s Carrier Frequency Selection C6 02 to lower the carrier frequency This will help to reduce the amount of internal switching Install an Input Noise Filter at the Drive s input power terminals Use metal conduit Electric waves can be shielded by metal so encase the Drive and power wires in metal Ground the Drive and motor Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring Sy Ras Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 18 If a Stand alone Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Drive is Run The Dr
236. ngs above 120 0 Hz are currently not supported Factory Default 0 0 Hz Programming 5 31 B 1 12 Mid Output Voltage E1 13 Base Voltage Setting Range 0 0 to 255 0V 240V Models 0 0 to 510 0V 480V Models Factory Defaults 0 0V 240V Models 0 0V 480V Models To set up a custom V f pattern program the points shown in the diagram below using parameters E1 04 through E1 13 Be sure that the following condition is true E1 09 E1 07 E1 06 EI 11 E1 04 Max Voltage E 1 05 E Mid Voltage E1 12 ss Base Voltage E1 13 Mid Voltage 1 08 Min Voltage E1 10 E109 1 07 Et 06 E141 1 04 Frequency Min Mid Base Mid Max Freq FreqA Freq FreqB Freq Fig 5 22 Custom V f Pattern Programming Curve Increasing the voltage in the V f pattern increases the available motor torque However when setting a custom V f pattern increase the voltage gradually while monitoring the motor current to prevent Drive faults as a result of motor over excitation e Motor overheating or excessive vibration E2 Motor Setup B E2 01 Motor Rated Current Setting Range Model Dependent see Appendix B Factory Default Model Dependent The Motor Rated Current parameter E2 01 is necessary information for the Drive motor protection function The motor over load protection parameter L1 01 is enabled by default In addition motor rated current is used by the torque compensation functio
237. nse back to the master Fig D 1 Example of Connections between Master and Drive Communication Specifications The Modbus communication specifications are shown below Table D 1 Modbus Communication Specifications Specifications Interface RS 422 RS 485 Communications Cycle Asynchronous Start stop synchronization Baud rate Select from 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 bps Datalength 8 bits fixed Communications Parameters Parity Select from even odd or none Stop bits 1 bit selected Communications Protocol Modbus Number of Connectable Units 31 units max Communications D 2 Communication Connection Terminal Modbus communication uses the following terminals S S R and R The terminating resistance must be turned ON only if the Drive is at the very end of the Serial Communication chain Set the terminating resistance by turning ON pin 1 of switch 51 5 4 5 d S1 Lr RS 422A 222220 Terminating OFF or 85 485 Sop Econ resistance Q gt D2 Switch y H DIP Switch S1 1 located on R 1 lt gt terminal board Terminating resistanc 1 2W 110 Ohms R mmo Fig D 2 Communication Connection Terminals and Terminating Resistance 1 Separate the communication cables from the main circuit cables and control circuit wiring IMPORTANT 2 Use shielded cables for the communication cable and use p
238. ntation Fig 5 20 Frequency Reference Upper and Lower Limit Effects on the Speed Command B 42 03 Master Speed Reference Lower Limit Setting Range 0 0 to 110 0 Factory Default 0 0 Unlike Frequency Reference Lower Limit d2 02 which will affect the speed command no matter where it is sourced from i e analog input preset speed jog speed etc the Master Speed Reference Lower Limit d2 03 sets a low speed threshold that will only affect the analog input that is the active master speed frequency as determined by parameter H3 13 and H3 09 This parameter allows a minimum speed to be programmed for the master reference while allowing a lower speed to be set as a jog reference If the speed commanded by the active master speed frequency is below the setting of d2 03 then the Drive will operate at the speed specified by d2 03 Programming 5 27 d3 Jump Frequencies d3 01 Jump Frequency 1 d3 02 Jump Frequency 2 d3 03 Jump Frequency 3 Setting Range 0 0 to 200 0 Hz Factory Default 0 0 Hz 43 04 Jump Frequency Width Setting Range 0 0 to 20 0 Hz Factory Default 1 0 Hz In order to avoid continuous operation at a speed that causes resonance in driven machinery the Drive can be programmed with jump frequencies that will not allow continued operation within specific frequency ranges If a speed is commanded that falls within a dead band or Jump Frequency the Drive will clamp the frequency reference just below the dead
239. o Selection Closed Hand Open Auto Option Inv Sel Selects source of speed command and sequence Closed b1 01 amp b1 02 Open Option Card Multi Step Ref 1 Closed speed command from d1 02 or Aux Terminal Open speed command determined by b1 01 Multi Step Ref 2 Closed speed command from d1 03 or d1 04 0 to 6E 24 Programming Open speed command determined by b1 01 Jog Freq Ref Closed speed command from d1 17 Open speed command determined by b1 01 Multi Acc Dec 1 Closed Accel amp Decel Ramps determined by C1 03 amp C1 04 Open Accel amp Decel Ramps determined by C1 01 amp C1 02 Ext BaseBlk N O Closed Output transistors forced off Open Normal operation Ext BaseBlk N C Closed Normal Operation Open Output transistors forced off Acc Dec Ramp Hold Closed Acceleration suspended and speed held Open Normal Operation Term A2 Enable Closed Terminal A2 is active Open Terminal A2 is disabled Term Not Used Terminal has no effect MOP Increase Closed Speed Command Increases Open Speed Command Held Must be set in conjunction with MOP Decrease and b1 02 must 0 to 6E 14 Programming be set to 1 MOP Decrease Closed Speed Command Decreases Open Speed Command Held Must be set in conjunction with MOP Increase and b1 02 must be set to 1 Continued on following page Parameters A 12 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued pane Parameter Name Setting Factory Menu 1
240. o as not to reduce the cooling efficiency When installing the Drive always provide the following installation clearances to allow normal heat dissipation For 3HP 208V 240V CIMR E7U22P2 and below or 2HP 480V CIMR E7U41P5 and below ensure that the heatsink is against a closed surface to avoid diverting cooling air around the heatsink 4 s 4 75 in 120 mm minimum Air amp 7 T eas itt Vi m 12 in ale 12 30 5 mm minimum 30 5 mm minimum 4 75 in 120 mm minimum i 2 0 4 75 50 mm minimum ir Horizontal Clearance Vertical Clearance Fig 1 8 Drive Installation Orientation and Clearance 1 The same clearance is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis 00 and NEMA Type 1 Drives IMPORTANT 2 Always remove the top and bottom protection covers before installing a CIMR E7U2018 4018 and smaller Drive in a panel Always provide enough clearance for lifting eye bolts and the main circuit wiring when installing a CIMR E7U2022 4030 and larger Drive in a panel Physical Installation 1 14 Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover Remove the terminal cover to connect cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals Prior to removing any protective cover or wiring any part of the Drive remove all power sources including main input power and control circuit power Wait a minimum of 5 minutes a
241. o the rectifier circuit within the Drive Noise filter Use a noise filter exclusively for the Drive if radio noise generated from the Drive causes other control devices to malfunction Peripheral Devices E 6 Appendix F EMC Compatibility EMC Compatibility ooo F 2 Electromagnetic Compatibility F 3 EMC Compatibility F 1 EMC Compatibility Introduction This section describes the measures necessary to comply with the EMC Electro Magnetic Compatibility Directive The manual s installation and wiring instructions must be followed for compliance Yaskawa products are tested by authorized organizations using the standards listed below Product standard EN 61800 3 1996 EN 61000 3 2 Al A2 A14 2000 Measures to Ensure Conformity of Installed Yaskawa Drives to EMC Directive Yaskawa Drives are not required to be installed in a switch cabinet It is not possible to give detailed instructions for all possible types of installations therefore this manual provides general guidelines All electrical equipment produces radio and line borne interference at various frequencies The power leads pass this on to the surrounding environment like an antenna Connecting an item of electrical equipment e g Drive to a supply without a line filter can allow High Frequency HF or Low Frequency LF interference to penetrate the power distribution system The basi
242. o three prohibited 0 0 Programming Freauencv 2 frequency points for eliminating problems with resonant vibration of d3 02 7 ied Ens 2 y the motor machine This feature does not actually eliminate the 0 0 to 200 0 0 0Hz Programming ump 4 selected frequency values but will accelerate and decelerate the d3 03 Jump Frequency 3 motor through the prohibited bandwidth 0 0Hz Programming Jump Freq 3 Jump Frequency Width This parameter determines the width of the deadband around each d3 04 PU selected prohibited frequency point A setting of 1 0 will result in 0 0 to 20 0 1 0Hz Programming Jump Bandwidth deadband of 1 0 Hz Emm MOP and Trim Contro ETE 0 Disabled dko vee Moped 1 Enabled oer Programming 44 02 Trim Control Level Set the percentage of maximum speed to be added or subtracted via 0 to 100 10 Programming Trim Control Lvl multi function inputs Parameters A 9 Parameter No Parameter Name Rl Setting Factory Setting Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Menu Location Say VIF Pattern aaa 240V Quick Setting 480V 230 0V Programming 460 0V 05 08 Input Voltage Setting Input Voltage V F Pattern Selection V F Selection Maximum Output Frequency Max Frequency Maximum Output Voltage Max Voltage Base Frequency Base Frequency Mid Output Frequency A Mid Frequency A Mid Output Voltage A Mid Voltage A Minimum Output Frequency Min Frequency Mid Output Vo
243. oad OL1 Closes before a motor overload occurs 90 of time OH Prealarm Closes when the Drive s heatsink temperature exceeds the setting of parameter L8 02 Drive Enable Closes when the drive enable input is active Waiting to Run Closes during the time after a run command is issued but the Drive is not running due to the time set in parameter b1 10 OH Freq Reduce Run Sre Com Opt Cooling Fan Err Closed during internal cooling fan failure Parameters A 15 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name Dasetiptior Setting Factory Menu No Digital Operator Display Range Setting Location aaa CEPIT SSS H3 02 Terminal Al Gain Setting Sets the speed command when 10V is input as a 0 0 to 100 0 Terminal A1 Gain percentage of the maximum output frequency E1 04 1000 0 S H3 03 Terminal A1 Bias Setting Sets the speed command when OV is input as a 100 0 to 0 0 E Terminal A1 Bias percentage of the maximum output frequency 1 04 100 0 adr Fogramming Terminal A2 Signal Level Selects the signal level of terminal A2 H3 08 Selection 0 0 IOVDC switch S1 2 must be in the off position 0 or2 2 Programming Term A2 Signal 2 4 20 mA switch S1 2 must be in the on position Selects what effect the Aux terminal A2 has on the drive 0 Frequency Bias 0 100 bias 2 Aux Reference H3 09 ER gos mE B PI Feedback 0to1F 2 Programming D Fre
244. on is disabled but not Energy Savings itself Programming 5 25 C1 Accel Decel B C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 C1 03 Acceleration Time 2 C1 04 Deceleration Time 2 Setting Range 0 0 to 6000 0 Seconds Factory Default 30 0 Seconds C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum speed E1 04 C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 sets the time to decelerate from maximum speed to zero C1 01 and C1 02 are the factory default active accel decel pair Another accel decel pair C1 03 and C1 04 exists that can be activated by a multi function digital input 1 0 7 or specified by a switch over frequency as programmed in parameter 1 11 Note If fan applications employing duct high pressure safety limit switches it may be necessary to further adjust the deceleration time to avoid high pressure limit trips due to damper closure as the system is shut down An alternate solution in this situation is to set parameter b1 03 to Coast to Stop B C1 09 Fast Stop Time Setting Range 0 0 to 6000 0 Seconds Factory Default 10 0 Seconds A special deceleration parameter is available for use with emergency or fault operations Parameter C1 09 will set a special deceleration that can be operated by closing a digital input configured as H1 0x 15 or 0 17 A digital input configured as H1 0x 15 will look for a switch closure before initiating the Fast Stop operation A digital in
245. on method Parameters L2 03 and L2 04 also affect the current detection method of Speed Search operation B b3 01 Speed Search Selection This parameter is effective only when the Drive is given a new RUN command Seting 0 SpdsrchF Disable SpdsrchF Enable Spdsrchl Disable factory default SpdsrchI Enable Speed Estimation Method b3 01 0 or 1 The speed estimation method will calculate the speed using measurements of residual motor fields The speed estimation version is bi directional and will determine both the motor speed and direction To enable speed estimation Speed Search at start set b3 01 1 SpdsrchF Enable If the speed estimation method of Speed Search is to be used then Auto tuning must be performed prior to IMPORTANT using Speed Search If the length of cable between the Drive and motor is ever changed after Auto tuning then Auto tuning should be performed again Performing auto tuning energizes the motor so that identification of key motor characteristics can be deter IMPORTANT mined Output filters may affect the accuracy of measured characteristics and or result in drive damage Therefore it may be necessary to remove output filters completely prior to executing tuning procedures Consult the factory with questions regarding filter compatibility Programming 5 12 IMPORTANT The speed estimation mode cannot be used when there are multiple motors operated by one Drive or the motor is two or
246. one e g set all 16 bits to 1 2 Calculate CRC 16 using MSB as slave address LSB and LSB as the MSB of the final data 3 Calculate CRC 16 for response messages from the slaves and compare them to the CRC 16 in the response messages Communications D 6 Modbus Function Code Details Reading Holding Register Contents 03H Read the contents of the storage register only for specified quantities The addresses must be consecutive starting from a specified address The data content of the storage register are separated into higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits The following table shows message examples when reading status signals error details data link status and frequency references from the slave 2 Drive Command Message Response Message Response Message During Normal Operation During Error Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Function Code 03H Function Code 03H Function Code 83H Start Higher 00H Data quantity 08H Error code 03H Address Lower 20H Ist storage Higher 00H CRC 16 Higher FIH Higher 00H register Lower 65H Lower 31H Lower 04H Next storage Higher 00H Higher 45H register Lower 00H CRC 16 Lower FOH Next storage Higher 00H register Lower 00H Next storage Higher 01H register Lower F4H Higher AFH CRC 16 Lower 82H Fig D 6 Function Code 03H Message Example Write In Single Holding Register
247. ooting checks make sure that the three phase power is disconnected and locked out With power removed from the unit the DC bus capacitors will stay charged for several minutes The Charge LED in the Drive will glow red until the DC bus voltage is below 10Vdc To ensure that the DC bus is completely discharged measure between the positive and negative bus with a DC voltmeter set to the highest scale Table 6 6 Main Circuit Test Procedure Set the digital multi meter to its highest VDC scale Measure between 1 and for the following check Measure DC Bus Voltage Place the positive red meter lead on 1 Place the negative black meter lead on Ifthe measured voltage is lt 10Vdc it is safe to work inside the Drive If not wait until the DC Bus has completely discharged The input diodes rectify or transform the three phase input AC voltage into a DC voltage Set a digital multi meter to the Diode Check setting Place the positive red meter lead on terminal R L1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal S L2 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal T L3 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal R L1 Place the n
248. or a phase to ground short Check the output current with a clamp on meter to verify the DCCT reading Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 4 Table 6 1 Fault Displays and Processing Digital Description Cause Corrective Action Operator Display There is a broken wire in the output cable Check the wiring to the motor There is a broken wire in the Check the motor for phase to motor winding ground short Output Open phase The output terminals were loose LF An open phase occurred at the Drive output Output Phase Loss This fault is detected when output current has exceeded 5 imbalance The motor being used has a capacity less than 5 ofthe Check the motor and Drive capacity Drive s maximum motor capacity pacity Low impedance motor was used Add additional impedance Parameter E2 03 set incorrectly Adjust E2 03 to a lower value Ensure the values in L6 02 and LL3 Loss of Load Detection 1 eC L6 03 are appropriate Loss of Load Det 1 Drive output current lt L6 02 for more than OO UTOS ae the time set in 116 03 Check application machine status to eliminate fault Remove the motor and run the Shorted Drive output phase to Drive without the motor phase shorted motor locked rotor load too heavy accel Overcurrent decel time too short contactor oc Drive output current exceeded the on the Drive output is opened Check the Drive for a phase to Over Current overcurrent detection level app
249. or wiring terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 1 2 and 3 and other high power lines Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA MB MC M1 M2 M3 and M4 digital outputs from wiring to other control circuit terminals If using an optional external power supply ensure it is a UL Listed Class 2 power supply source Use twisted pair or shielded twisted pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults Prepare cable ends as shown in Fig 2 7 Connect the shield wire to terminal E G Insulate the shield with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment Shield sheath Insulation Do not connect here Connect to shield sheath terminal E G at Drive Insulate with tape Fig 2 7 Preparing the Termination of Shielded Twisted pair Cables Electrical Installation 2 19 Field Wiring Diagram Use this diagram to document field wiring It may be helpful to copy this page H1 0 1 H1 02 H1 03 H2 01 H1 04 H1 05 H2 02 15VDC 20mA 0 10VDC 20K Q H3 08 H4 01 FM 4 20mA 250 0 to 10VDC 20K H4 04 AM Terminating Resistance Fig 2 8 Field Wiring Diagram Electrical Installation 2 20 Chapter 3 Digital Operator This chapter describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator Digital Operator
250. ortional Integral control function is built into the Drive Speed Command PI Setpoint D1 04 LLL Frequency Reference ee Sleepfunction 1 D1 02 ed 152 Selection b5 21 61 01 701 DEAS PUN E 150 Delay on off D1 01 Frequency reference b5 01 0 Timer 01 01 55 15 F Enable Disable reverse operation Option Card when PI output is negative Sleep Level 2 Scalin Sleep Function Serial Com 2 SFS cancel a b5 01 3 1 34 01 08 Upper limit 01 1 Fmax 109 110 it i b5 01 1 OFF 0 PI Differential Output Fdbk H3 09 16 Leg 0 po gt e gt gt Nj frequency PISES M b5 11 SFS PI control is OFF under the following Lower limit 0 b5 17 1 i Terminal A1 conditions Sleep function b5 01 0 Upper limit selection b5 21 i During JOG command input Fmax x109 29 00 o 1 PI Setpoint H1 xx 19 a
251. ory Default 0 00 1 2 4 Parameter 5 19 is for a PI Setpoint value When b5 18 1 Enabled the value of b5 19 will take precedent over any other PI setpoint unless the Drive is set up for Differential Feedback in which case b5 18 and b5 19 have no affect on the PI function Displayed units are determined by b5 31 regardless of b5 20 setting This does not affect the value programmed into the drive Example if b5 20 1 b5 31 0 then b5 19 will be displayed in WC Inches of Water Column The value set in b5 19 will be in percent feedback 05 20 PI Setpoint Display Scaling Setting Range 0 to 39999 lt 3020 gt Factory Default 1 Setting U1 24 and U1 38 Display Increments 0 orm 00075 2 39 enter of um motor poles 40 through 39999 Engineering Units The PI Setpoint Display Scaling value b5 20 is a scaling factor that is applied to the monitor display for both the PI Setpoint U1 38 and the PI Feedback U1 24 and b5 19 PI Setpoint Display text for the units is set by b5 31 PI Unit Selection If the monitors seem more natural in terms of percentage set b5 20 1 If the monitors are easier to work with when displaying the equivalent synchronous RPM set b5 20 the number of motor poles If another engineered unit such a fpm or cfm is desired set b5 20 xxxxx where Digit5 Digit4 Digit3 Digit2 Digit 1 Digits 1 through 4 set the desired number to be displayed at 100 feedback Digit 5 determi
252. otor waits for the minimum lt gt Speed Search Wait Time b3 05 Oe Fig 5 13 Speed Search Current Detection Method after momentary power loss where the power loss time is less than the minimum baseblock time AC power supply ON OFF Output fi bef pu frequency efore power loss Set frequency eceleration time set in b3 03 reference Output frequency i b3 02 peed search operating time a EY Output current 4 Speed search wait time 63 05 Minimum baseblock time L2 03 Fig 5 14 Speed Search Current Detection Method after momentary power loss where the power loss time exceeds the minimum baseblock time Programming 5 14 Setting of Automatic Speed Search for Speed Search Method b3 01 all RUN commands and Used for Multi function momentary power loss inputs Speed Estimation B b3 02 Speed Search Deactivation Current Setting Range 0 to 200 of Drive rated output current Factory Default 120 of Drive rated output current When using the current detection method of Speed Search parameter b3 02 sets the current level that will determine when the search is complete and the rotor and output speeds match When the output frequency is higher than the actual rotor speed the slip causes the current to be high As the output frequency is lowered the closer it comes to the rotor speed the lower the current draw will be When the output current drops
253. poya O e aun B L6 02 Torque Detection Level 1 Setting Range 0 to 300 of Drive rated output current Factory Default 1596 of Drive rated output current B L6 03 Torque Detection Time 1 Setting Range 0 0 to 10 0 Seconds Factory Default 10 0 Seconds The Drive can be programmed to indicate when either an overtorque or an undertorque conditions exist A digital output must be programmed for Torque Detection H2 01 H2 02 Trq Det 1 or 17 Trq Det 1 N C A warning of an overtorque condition can indicate a jam and an undertorque condition can indicate a broken belt no water in a pump or other loss of load To configure Torque Detection requires the following decisions 1 Do you wish to check for overtorque condition or an undertorque condition 2 Do you wish to check for the torque condition whenever the drive is running or only at speed agree Nuisance detection during acceleration when variable torques are normally required can be avoided 3 Do you want the drive to fault if the torque condition is detected or only alarm and continue operation The following table can help choose the proper setting for Torque Detection Selection 1 to get the wanted results Table 6 L6 01 Setting Choices L6 01 Overtorque Undertorque Fault Alarm Always Only Detected __ Detected Spd Agree Torque Detection a x Suggested settings for Loss of Load in
254. ptions Status of The PI Setpoint Status of Modbus Status of will be read from Register b1 01 OFh bit 1 Parameter b5 19 Modbus Register 06H D1 01 Terminal A1 Serial Comm Option PCB Programming 5 16 In some situations there are two feedback inputs Air handling unit return fan speed control in a volume matching strategy for building pressure control is an example The drive can be programmed to maintain a set differential between two analog signals If input A2 is configured as a PI Differential Mode H3 09 16 PI Differential then the Drive will maintain a set differ ence between the measurements read on inputs A1 and A2 This differential setpoint is programmed by parameter b5 07 b5 01 PI Mode Sating flO Disabled factory default Enabled Fro Pl The Drive can be used as a stand alone PI controller If PI functionality is selected by parameter b5 01 the Drive will adjust its output to cause the feedback from a transmitter to match the PI setpoint b5 19 The setting of b5 01 will determine whether PI functionality is disabled b5 01 0 Disabled enabled b5 01 1 Enabled or enable with the output of the PI function used to trim a Speed Command b5 01 3 Fre PT 05 02 Proportional Gain Setting Setting Range 0 00 to 25 00 Factory Default 2 00 The proportional gain will apply a straight multiplier to the calculated difference error between the P
255. put configured as H1 0x 17 will look for the switch opening before initiating the Fast Stop operation Unlike a standard deceleration time once the Fast Stop operation is initiated even momentarily the Drive cannot be re operated until the deceleration is complete the Fast Stop input is cleared and the Run command is cycled Programming 5 26 d2 Reference Speed Command Limits d2 01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit Setting Range 0 0 to 110 0 Factory Default 100 0 d2 02 Frequency Reference Lower Limit Setting Range 0 0 to 110 0 Factory Default 0 0 The use of parameters d2 01 and d2 02 places limitations on the speed command that the Drive will accept The parameters are set in units of percentage of the maximum frequency E1 04 and provide limits on any remote speed command input By entering upper or lower frequency limits the Drive programmer can prevent operation of the Drive above or below levels that may cause resonance equipment damage or discomfort see also parameter d3 0X For example limits may be needed to prevent low speed operation of Cooling tower fans with gear boxes pumps with pressure dependent seals or AHUs with minimum delivery requirements Internal Soeed Command d2 01 A Frequency Reference Upper Limit Operating Range Frequency Reference Lower Limit d2 02 Set Speed Command Note See also the Sleep function in Fig 19 for alternate lower limit impleme
256. quency Bias 2 0 100 bias E Motor Temperature See parameters L1 03 amp L1 04 16 PI Differential 1F Not Used H3 10 Terminal A2 Gain Setting Sets the level of the A2 function corresponding to a 0 0 to 100 0 Terminal 2 Gain 10V input in 1000 0 S 5 H3 11 Terminal A2 Bias Setting Sets the level of the A2 function corresponding to a 100 0 to 0 0 2 Terminal 2 Bias OV input in 100 0 PS Te EES Analog Input Filter Time Constant Used to smooth out erratic or noisy analog input 0 00 to H3712 Filter Avg Time signals 2 00 0 30sec Programming Determines which terminal will be the main reference source 0 Main Fref TAI Terminal TAI is the main speed Master Frequency Reference command and Terminal TA2 is the Aux speed H3 13 Terminal Selection command Oorl Programming TA1 A2 Select Main Fref TA2 Terminal TA2 is the main speed command and Terminal TA1 is the Aux speed command Only effective when H3 09 is set to 2 Aux Reference Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running Menu location is Quick Setting when b5 01 1 and Programming when b5 01 0 Factory setting changes to B when b5 01 1 Parameters A 16 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory Menu Setting Location a rupem tI Analog Outputs ae Selects which monitor will be output on terminals FM and AC Frequency Ref 100 max
257. r address for 5 08 0 Drive Node Address 0 to FF terminals R S S 1F Programming Serial Comm Adr p 5 08 1 An address of 0 disables serial com 0 to 63 H5 08 2 Selects the baud rate for terminals R R S and S 0 1200 Baud Communication Speed Selection 1 2400 Baud 0104 3 Serial Baud Rate 2 4800 Baud APOGEE FLN 5 5 3 9600 Baud Metasys 2 4 19200 Baud Selects the communication parity for terminals R R C ication Paritv Selecti S and S MUR AR 0 No Parity 0 to 2 Programming Serial Com Sel 1 Even Parity 2 Odd Parity Selects the stopping method when a communication error is detected Stopping Method after 0 Ramp to Stop ee oa Coast to Stop Communication Error 3 Programming Serial Fault Sel a Alarm Only Run at d1 04 available when H5 08 1 N2 METASYS or 2 FLN APOGEE Enables or disables the communications timeout detection function Communication Error Detection 0 Disabled A communications loss will NOT cause a Selection communications fault 1 Programming Serial Flt Dtct 1 Enabled If communications are lost for more than the time specified in parameter H5 09 a communications fault will occur 5 06 Drive Transmit Wait Time Sets the time from when the drive receives data to when 51065 5ms Prosrammin Transmit WaitTIM the drive sends data RTS Control Selection Enables or disables request to se
258. r Supply Undervoltage External load connected CTL PS Undervolt Undervoltage of the control circuit when pulling down the Drive power Repair Of replace the Power PCB running supplies Gate Drive PCB Remove all control wiring and test Drive Cycle power off and on to the Drive Contacts on the soft charge Soft Charge Circuit Fault contactor are dirty and the soft Check the condition of the soft The pre charge contactor opened while the charge contactor does not charge contactor MC Answerback Drive was running function mechanically Repair or replace the Power PCB Gate Drive PCB Some features within the PI function group cause the Drive to shut down momentarily e g Sleep Function Snooze Function Feedback Loss feature etc Upon recovery from the conditions that activate these features WARNING 4 the Drive may start unexpectedly Therefore when enabling these features take appropriate measures to notify personnel working with this equipment that unexpected starting may occur Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 8 Alarm Detection Alarms are Drive protection functions that does not operate the fault contact The Drive will automatically return to its original status once the cause of the alarm has been removed During an alarm condition the Digital Operator display flashes and an alarm output is generated at the multi function outputs H2 01 to H2 02 if programmed When an alarm occurs take appropriate corr
259. r at least the Sleep Delay Time b5 16 the internal Run command returns and the Drive output begins again The b5 16 Delay Time prevents oscillation about the sleep level Note The sleep function can be used even if the PI function is disabled b5 01 0 Disabled Output Upper Limit d2 01 Sleep Level 47 b5 15 Speed Command Fig 5 18 Sleep Function Response B b5 17 Accel Decel Time Setting Range 0 0 to 25 5 Seconds Factory Default 0 0 Seconds This is a soft start function that is applied to the PI setpoint analog input Instead of having nearly instantaneous changes in signal levels there is a programmed ramp applied to level changes When changing setpoints the error can be limited by gradually ramping the setpoint through the use of parameter b5 17 B 05 18 Setpoint Selection Setting Description Disabled factory default Fabled Programming 5 20 In order to use parameter b5 19 as the PI Setpoint set parameter b5 18 1 Enabled If b5 18 0 Disabled the PI Setpoint will either be e Modbus Register 06H If Register OFH bit 1 is high The active speed command i e Determined by the setting of b1 01 See Table 1 Setpoint Options B b5 19 PI Setpoint Value Setting Range dependant on parameter b5 20 B5 19 Setting Range Example 55 20 Seting S 3 939 3 9189 Fact
260. ramming Programming Programming Programming Programming User Parameter 17 Programmin User Param 17 i User Parameter 18 User Param 18 Selects the parameters to be available in the User Access Level User Param 19 A1 01 1 These are the only parameters accessible for the user o5 User Parameter 20 level These parameters are not related to the User Initialize User Param 20 function User Parameter 21 2 21 User Param 21 User Parameter 22 222 User Param 22 User Parameter 23 22 02 User Param 23 User Parameter 24 A2 24 User Param 24 User Parameter 25 A225 User Param 25 User Parameter 26 12226 User Param 26 User Parameter 27 2227 27 User Parameter 28 228 User Param 28 User Parameter 29 2129 User Param 29 User Parameter 30 A230 User Param 30 User Parameter 31 ann User Param 31 User Parameter 32 User Param 32 Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming A2 32 Programming Parameters A 3 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Menu Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory No Setting Location Sea Sequence Say 0103 Quick Setting Selects the speed command frequency reference input source 0 Operator Digital preset speed d1 01 1 Terminals Analog Input Terminal A1 or Terminal A2 see parameter H3 13 2 Se
261. re applied the Drive will stop and will not start until the Operation Menu is selected U1 Monitor List Follow the key operations below Fig 3 3 to access the Operation Menu DRIVE DRIVE Rdy Frequency Ref Main Menu u i Operation U1 03 Fig 3 3 U1 Monitor List Access Procedure Use and keys to scroll through the U1 Monitor parameter list See Appendix A for functional description Table 3 8 U1 Monitor List Monitor 1 01 Frequency Ref 1 20 SFS Output Soft Starter Signal 1 02 Output Freq 1 24 PI Feedback 1 03 Output Current 1 28 CPU ID 1 06 Output Voltage 1 29 kWh 1 07 DC Bus Voltage 1 30 MWh 1 08 Output kWatts 1 34 OPE Detected 1 10 Input Term Sts 1 36 PI Input 1 1 Output Term Sts 1 37 PI Output 1 12 Int Ctl Sts 1 1 38 PI Setpoint 1 13 Elapsed Time 1 39 Transmit Err 1 4 FLASH ID 1 40 FAN Elapsed Time 1 15 Term Al Level 1 51 Auto Mode Fref 1 16 Term A2 Level 1 52 Hand Mode Fref 1 18 Mot SEC Current Secondary Current 1 53 PI Feedback 2 lt U c G Digital Operator 3 9 B U2 Fault Trace List After viewing the Monitor parameter list in order to view the Fault Trace parameter list follow the key operations below Fig 3 4 DRIVE Rdy DRIVE Rdy DRIVE Rdy Monitor Fault Trace Current Fault ESC M 01 None gt U2 M None U1 02 0 00Hz U1 03 0 00A U2 03 0 00Hz U2 03 0 00Hz Fig 3 4 U2 Fault Tr
262. removed even if it s not outputting to the motor The reset key on the digital operator will need to be pressed after reconnecting the digital operator to reset the fault and continue normal operation If 02 06 0 Disabled then the Drive will not fault if the digital operator is disconnected but the Drive will discontinue motor operation If full Drive operation is required while the digital operator is removed set 02 06 0 Disabled and 02 15 0 Disabled Hand Key Function If both 02 06 and 02 15 are disabled then the digital operator can be disconnected with out disturbing Drive operation B 02 07 Cumulative Operating Time Setting Setting Range 01065535 Hours Factory Default 0 Hours B 02 08 Cumulative Operation Time Selection Seting Running Time factory default The Drive features an Elapsed Timer monitor that records in units of hours The Elapsed Timer monitor is U1 13 Parameter 02 08 programs this function to either accumulate elapsed hours based on time the Drive is powered 02 08 0 Power On Time or time the Drive is running 02 087 1 Running Time The Drive is considered running anytime there is an active run command or when the Drive is outputting voltage i e including during deceleration DRIVE Elapsed Time Ui 13 0H Ui 14 03010 U1 15 34 1 Parameter 02 07 allows manual adjustment of the Elapsed Timer primarily to accommodate maintenance or con
263. requency detection 2 Output frequency gt 14 01 Bit 6 Drive startup completed Startup completed Bit 7 Low voltage detection Detected Bit 8 Baseblock Drive output baseblock Bit 9 Frequency reference mode Not communication 0 Communication Bit A Run command mode Not communication 0 Communication Bit B Overtorque detection Detected Bit C Frequency reference lost Lost Bit D Retrying error 1 Retrying Bit E Error including Modbus communications time out 1 Error occurred Bit F Modbus communications time out 1 Timed out Multi function digital output status Bit 0 Multi function digital output 1 terminal M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 1 Multi function digital output 2 terminal M3 M4 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 2 Not used Bits 3 to F Not used 002 0030 Not used 0031H Main circuit DC voltage 0032H 0037 Not used 0038H PI feedback level Input equivalent to 100 Max output frequency 10 196 without sign 0039H PI input level 4100 Max output frequency 10 196 with sign 003AH PI output level 4100 Max output frequency 10 196 with sign 003BH CPU software number 003CH Flash software number Communication error details Bit 0 CRC error Bit 1 Invalid data length Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 Parity error Bit 4 Overrun error Bit 5 Framing error Bit 6 Time out Bits 7 to F Not used 003EH KVA setting 003FH Control
264. rial Com RS 485 terminals R R S and S 3 Option PCB Option board connected at 2CN Frequency Reference Selection Reference Source Selects the run command input source 0 Operator Hand and Off keys on digital operator 1 Terminals Contact Closure on Terminal S1 2 Serial Com RS 485 terminals R R S and S 3 Option PCB Option board connected at 2CN Run Command Selection Run Source Selects the stopping method when the run command is removed 0 Ramp to Stop Stopping Method Selection Stopping Method Coast to Stop DC Injection to Stop Coast w Timer A new run command is ignored if input before the time in C1 02 expires 0103 n Quick Setting Determines the forward rotation of the motor and if reverse operation is disabled 0 Reverse Enabled 1 Reverse Disabled 2 Exchange Phase Change direction of forward motor rotation 3 Exchange Phase Reverse Disabled Change direction of forward motor rotation and disable reverse operation Reverse Operation Selection Reverse Oper Local Remote Run Selection LOC REM RUN Sel Cycle External RUN If the run command is closed when switching from hand local mode to auto remote mode the drive will not run Accept External RUN If the run command is closed when switching from hand local mode to auto remote mode the drive WILL run Run Command Selection 0 Disabled Run command accepted only in the operation menu
265. ring Run N O contact Multi function digital output Function set by H2 01 CLOSED during operation Remote Auto Operation N O contact Multi function digital output Function set by H2 02 CLOSED when local control Dry contacts Contact capacity 1 A max at 250Vac 1 A max at 30Vdc Fault output signal SPDT MA MC CLOSED during fault condition MB MC OPEN during fault condition Dry contacts Contact capacity 1 A max at 250Vac 1 A max at 30Vdc Analog output signals Multi function analog output Multi function analog monitor 1 Function set by H4 01 output frequency 0 to 10Vdc 100 frequency Analog common Multi function analog output Multi function analog monitor 2 Function set by H4 04 output current 0 to 10Vdc 100 Drive s rated output current 0 to 10Vdc max 5 2 mA max RS 485 422 Modbus communication input Modbus communication output For 2 wire RS 485 jumper R and S and jumper R and S Differential input PHC isolation Differential input PHC isolation Signal common Electrical Installation 2 14 DIP Switch S1 DIP Switch S1 is described in this section The functions of DIP switch S1 are shown in Table 2 9 51 Terminating A Lf 1 BONG resistance lt gt 2 E DIP Switch S1 located on gt terminal board Fig
266. rive enclosure 3 Are all terminal screws tight Electrical Installation 2 13 Control Circuit Terminal Functions The factory default functions of the control circuit terminals for 2 wire control are shown in Table 2 8 Table 2 8 Control Circuit Terminals Signal Name Signal Level Digital input signals Forward run stop command Forward run when CLOSED stopped when OPEN Reverse run stop command Reverse run when CLOSED stopped when OPEN External fault input Fault when CLOSED Fault reset Reset when CLOSED Multi function Multi step speed reference 1 Master auxiliary switch Auxiliary frequency reference digital inputs when CLOSED Multi step speed reference 2 Functions set by Multi step setting 2 when H1 01 to H1 05 CLOSED Jog frequency reference Jog frequency when CLOSED 24 Vdc 8 mA Photocoupler isolation Digital input common Refer to Table 2 10 for connection details Analog input signals 15Vdc power supply 15Vdc power supply for analog inputs or transmitters 15Vdc Max current 20 mA Analog input or Speed Command 0 to 10Vdc 100 0 to 10 V 20 kQ Multi function analog input 4 to 20 mA 100 Function set by 0 to 10Vdc 100 H3 0 H3 09 4 to 20 mA 250Q 0 to 10 V 20kQ Analog common Shield wire optional ground line connection point Digital output signals Du
267. roper shield clamps 3 When using RS 485 communication connect S to R and S to R on the control circuit terminal board See Fig D 3 below 4 Shield at one end only Fig D 3 RS 485 Communication Connection Procedure for Setting Up Communication Use the following procedure to perform communication with the DDC Turn OFF the input to the Drive power and connect the communication cable between the PLC and the Drive Turn ON the input power to the Drive Set the required communication parameters H5 01 to H5 09 using the Digital Operator Turn OFF the input to the Drive power and check that the Digital Operator display has completely disappeared Turn ON the input power to the Drive once again Perform communication with the DDC Ur am Mua Communications D 3 B Related Parameters Table D 2 Serial Communication Related Parameters Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display Frequency Reference b1 01 Selection Reference Source b1 02 Run Command Selection Run Source Drive Node Address 52 Serial Comm Adr Communication Speed Selection H9702 Serial Baud Rate Communication Parity Selection H503 Serial Com Sel Stopping Method after H5 04 Communication Error Serial Fault Sel Communication Error Detection H5 05 Selection Serial Flt Dtct Drive Transmit Wait Time Sets the time from when the drive receives data to 5 to 65 5ms Transmit WaitTIM when the drive sends data RTS Contro
268. roximately and closed a special motor or phase short at the output 180 of Drive rated output current a motor with a FLA rating Check the motor for a phase to phase short Verify C1 01 and C1 02 are set larger than Drive rated output correctly current Check load conditions Cooling Fin Cooling Fin Fan Overheat Check for dirt build up on the OH1 The temperature of the Drive cooling fin fans and cooling fins Heatsnk MAX Temp exceeded the temperature programmed in parameter L8 02 and L8 03 0 2 Cooling fan s are not working high ambient Reduce the ambient temperature temperature a heat source is around the Drive too close to the Drive 7 2 Remove the heating unit Replace Drive Internal Cooling Fan the cooling fan Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load Recheck the accel decel time OH3 Motor Overheating Alarm Overheating of motor as C1 01 and C1 02 The Drive stops or continues operation Motor Overheat 1 ea according to the setting of L1 03 measured by motor thermistor Recheck the V F pattern E1 01 thru E1 13 Recheck the motor rated current value E2 01 Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 5 Table 6 1 Fault Displays and Processing Digital Operator Display Corrective Action Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load Recheck the accel decel time C1 01 and C1 02 Recheck the V F pattern E1 01 thru E1 13 Recheck the motor rated current value E2 01 Re
269. ry Default 2096 of Drive rated output current The Stall Prevention During Running function will attempt to avoid a Drive OC fault occurrence while the Drive is operating at a constant speed If L3 05 0 Disabled the Drive may fault if the load increases sufficiently to cause the output current to reach the OC fault level 18096 of Drive rated output current If L3 05 1 General Purpose the Drive is outputting a constant speed and the Drive s output current level exceeds the level set by parameter L3 06 for more than 100 ms the Drive will begin to decelerate at the rate specified by parameter C1 02 The Drive will continue to decelerate until the output current level drops below the L3 06 level less a 2 hysteresis Once the output current drops below the L3 06 2 level the Drive will begin to accelerate at the currently active acceleration rate either C1 01 or C1 03 If L3 05 2 Decel Time 2 the Drive will function as described above except C1 04 will be used instead of C1 02 as the deceleration rate used when the output current exceeds L3 06 for more than 100 ms The following figure demonstrates acceleration when L3 0520 a Decel time C1 02 or C1 04 Output Frequency b Active Accel time Output Current Fig 5 35 Time Chart for Stall Prevention Level During Running The L3 06 parameter is set as a percentage of the Drive rated output current If the Drive still faults when L3 0520 then either lower the L3
270. s set by parameter b5 07 PI Differential Setpoint and can be set so that A2 is held less than A1 65 07 lt 0 A2 is held greater than A1 b5 07 gt 0 When PI Differential operation is chosen the Al feedback level can be monitored by U1 24 PI Feedback and the A2 feedback level can be monitored by U1 53 PI Feedback2 Function Not Used Setting 1F When H3 09 1 Not Used any signal applied to the A2 analog input will be ignored by the Drive H3 10 Terminal A2 Gain Setting Setting Range 0 0 to 1000 0 Factory Default 100 096 B H3 11 Terminal A2 Bias Setting Setting Range 100 0 to 100 0 Factory Default 0 096 Parameters H3 10 and H3 11 perform the same function for the A2 analog input that parameters H3 02 and H3 03 perform for the A1 analog input Please refer to the parameter description for H3 02 and H3 03 for information about H3 10 and H3 11 These parameters could be used for final calibration of a factory or field installed pressure to electric transducer input connected to terminal A2 and AC This field calibration may be needed if there is a job site variation from the typical 3 to 15 PSIG pneumatic signal input range B H3 12 Analog Input Filter Time Constant Setting Range 0 0 to 2 00 Seconds Factory Default 0 30 Seconds An analog input filter can be used to prevent erratic Drive control when a noisy analog reference is used Parameter H3 12 sets the time constant for a first order fi
271. s set too Extend the time in 1 01 Flashing 208 240Vac Trip point is lt 190Vdc 480Vac Trip point is lt 380Vde Voltage fluctuation of the input Check the input voltage power is too large Cycle power off and on to the UV2 Control Power Supply Undervoltage of the External load connected pulling Drive CTL PS Undervolt down the Drive power supplies Repair or replace the Power PCB Gate Drive PCB meo Contacts on the soft charge Cycle power off and on to the UV3 Soft Charge Circuit Fault contactor are dirty and the soft Drive The pre charge contactor opened while the MC Answerback Drive was running charge contactor does not Check the condition of the soft function mechanically charge contactor Low input voltage at R L1 S L2 and T L3 Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 11 Operator Programming Errors OPE An Operator Programming Error OPE occurs when an inapplicable parameter is set or an individual parameter setting is inappropriate The Drive does not operate until the parameter is set correctly Alarm output and fault contact do not operate If an OPE occurs change the appropriate parameter by checking the cause shown in Table 6 3 Table 6 3 OPE Error and Fault Displays Digital Operator Display 01 kVA Selection t Drive KVA setting error The control board was replaced and the kVA parameter is set incorrectly Corrective Action Enter the correct KVA setting 02 04 by referring to
272. se Output the output of the PI function causes the motor to slow down when the feedback is below the setpoint This is referred to as reverse acting response Programming 5 18 05 10 Output Gain Setting Setting Range 0 0 to 25 0 Factory Default 1 0 Applies a multiplier to the output of the PI function Using the gain can be helpful when the PI function is used to trim the Speed Command Increasing b5 10 causes the PI function to have a greater regulating affect on the speed command B b5 11 PI Reverse Selection Seting 0 Limit factory default Parameter b5 11 determines whether reverse operation is allowed while using PI control b5 0140 The factory default setting will not allow the Drive to run in reverse This parameter does not need to be changed from factory default for a majority of HVAC applications Refer also to b5 09 B b5 12 PI Feedback Reference Missing Detection Selection Setting 0o 1 Disabled factory default Loss of feedback can cause problems to a PI application The Drive can be programmed to turn on a digital output whenever a loss of feedback occurs Feedback Loss Detection is turned on by b5 12 When b5 12 1 Alarm the Drive acknowledges the loss of feedback without stopping or turning on the fault output MA MB If b5 12 2 Fault the Drive coasts to a stop and turns on the fault output 1f the feedback is determined to be lost B b5 13 Feedback Loss Detection
273. start is disabled estimated speed method is used at other times 1 SpdsrchF Enable Speed search is enabled estimated speed method 2 SpdsrchI Disable Speed search at start is disabled Speed Search Selection current detection method is used at other times 0103 2 Prostrani SpdSrch at Start 3 SpdscrhI Enable Speed search is enabled 5 5 current detection method Estimated Speed Method Actual motor speed and direction is estimated then the motor is ramped from that speed to the commanded speed Current Detection Method Current level is monitored while output frequency is ramped down Spred Search Deactiyation Used only when b3 01 3 Sets the speed search operation current a Current s 0 to 200 120 Programming SpdSrch Current as a percentage of drive rated current Speed Search Deceleration se mE Time when 03 01 3 Sets the deceleration time during speed 0 1 to 10 0 2 0sec Programming SpdSrch Dec Time EA b3 05 Speed Search Delay Time Delays the speed search operation after a momentary power loss to 0 0 to 02sec Programming Search Delay allow time for an external output contactor to re energize 20 0sec Bidirectional Speed Search 0 Disabled Selection 1 Enabled 1 Programming Bidir Search Sel Saray ae Timer Function ON Delay Used in conjunction with a multi function digital input and a 0 0 to Time multi function digital output This sets the amount of time between 3 00 0 0 0 0sec Programming Delay
274. t charge resistor works in conjunction with the soft charge contactor to slowly charge the DC bus capacitors to minimize the inrush current when power is applied to the Drive Soft Charge Resistor Check 1 Conduct a visual inspection Check for physical damage R1 R2 6PCB 2 Set a digital multi meter to the x 1 scale 3 Ifthe resistor is damaged the measured value will be infinite ohms The purpose of the soft charge contactor is to bypass the soft charge resistor after the DC bus voltage has reached its normal operating level Conduct a visual inspection Check for physical damage Seta digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale On Drives with a board mounted contactor verify that each contact resistance measures infinite ohms On Drives without a board mounted contactor press the plunger in and verify that each contact measures zero ohms On Drives without a board mounted contactor release the plunger and verify that the Soft Charge Contactor resistance is the ohmic value of the soft charge resistor K1 On Drives with a board mounted contactor verify that the contactor coil measures about 300 ohms The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate voltage to verify the contacts change states On Drives without a board mounted contactor verify that the 230Vac contactor coil measures about 175 ohms The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate voltage to verify the contacts change states On Drives witho
275. t of frequency reference reduction when an Overheat Pre alarm OH is detected Selects the drive response upon failure of the internal cooling fan 0 Disabled FAN alarm is displayed 1 Enabled OHI fault occurs Parameters A 22 kVA Input Phase Loss Detection Level Monitors the DC Bus current ripple and activates when 0 0 to 25 0 kVA P Ph Loss In Lvl one of the input phases is lost PF dodo Dependent Iogramming bm i 3 WE 0 0 to 20 0 Programming 100 0 1 1 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name e Setting Factory No Setting pL Hunting Prev epu puce peur nl 01 1 02 High Slip 3 01 igh Slip n3 02 SB Current High Slip n3 03 Stop 7 HSB OL Tim 01 02 Power Up 01 03 01 05 LCD Brightne Hunting Prevention Selection Hunt Prev Select Hunting Prevention Gain Setting Hunt Prev Gain king Deceleration requency Width HSB Decel Width king Current Limit Ref king Dwell Time at HSB DwelTim Stp High Slip Braking Overload Time e User Monitor Selection After Power On Monitor Digital Operator Display Selection Display Scaling ss Adjustment LCD Contrast 0 Disabled Hunting prevention function disabled 1 Enabled Hunting prevention function enabled If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded hunting prevention may reduce the vibration There is a loss o
276. t value is suitable B The stall prevention level during running is too low If the value set for L3 06 Stall Prevention Level during Running is too low the motor speed and torque will be limited Check to be sure that the set value is suitable If the Motor Operates at a Higher Speed Than the Speed Command Use the following information 1f the motor operates at a higher speed than the Speed Command B A signalis being input to the Speed Command current terminal 2 If a preset frequency reference is selected the preset reference takes priority over the normal reference If the PI mode of operation is enabled the drive output frequency will change to regulate the process variable to the desired setpoint Then the Drive speed may go to maximum Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 17 If the Motor Overheats Take the following steps 1f the motor overheats The load is too high If the motor load is too high and the motor is used when the effective torque exceeds the motor s rated torque the motor will overheat Reduce the load amount by either reducing the load or increasing the acceleration deceleration times Also consider increasing the motor size The ambient temperature is too high The motor rating is determined by a particular ambient operating temperature range The motor will overheat if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment where the maximum ambient operating temperature rati
277. ted below Parameter Parameter Name Description Setting Factory Menu No Digital Operator Display Range Setting Location Terminal FM Signal Level 0 0 10 H4 07 Selection 2 4 20 mA 0or2 Programming AO Level Select Terminal AM Signal Level 0 0 10 V H4 08 Selection 2 4 20 0or2 Programming AO Level Select2 Electrical Installation 2 16 Sinking Sourcing Mode The input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode OV common and sourcing mode 24V common by using the terminals SN SC and SP An external power supply can also be connected providing more freedom in signal input methods Table 2 11 Sinking Sourcing Mode and Input Signals Internal Power Supply Sinking Mode a es g 1 24 24V SP Factory Default External Power Supply Sinking Mode E R 1 External 24V exc Internal Power Supply Sourcing Mode Yael tiok IP24V 24 External Power Supply Sourcing Mode PE External 24V LN sc 1 24 424V SP Electrical Installation 2 17 Terminal Connections Connections to Drive terminals are shown in Fig 2 6 D
278. ters per line User parameter settings can be recovered at any time via user initialization Optional software allows upload download as well as graphing and monitoring of drive parameters from a PC for ease of drive management Built in PI control eliminates the need for closed loop output signals from a building automation system It includes feedback display inverse square root and differential control functions and maintains setpoint for closed loop control of fans and pumps for pressure flow or temperature regulation This manual is applicable to E7 Drives defined by model numbers CIMR E7U_____ This manual reflects the Software Ver sion 4010 This manual is subject to change as product improvements occur The latest version of the manual can be obtained from the Yaskawa website www drives com The date shown on the rear cover is changed when revisions are made Introduction iii This manual may describe trademarked equipment which is the property of other companies These trademarks are the property of the registered owner companies and may include the following APOGEETM FLN trademark of Siemens Building Technologies Inc Metasys trademark of Johnson Controls Inc Modbus trademark of Schneider Automation Inc LONWORKS trademark of Echelon Corporation Other Documents and Manuals are available to support special use or installation of this product These documents may be provided with the product or upon request
279. the Drive model number in Appendix B OPE02 Parameter set above the allowable Constant data out of range Verify the program settings OPE03 Terminal 05 Sequence Select OPE09 PID Selection OPE10 V f Ptrn Setting OPE11 CarrFrq On Delay ERR EEPROM R W Err Duplicate functions are selected up down commands or trim control increase decrease are not set simultaneously Speed search from maximum frequency and set frequency are set simultaneously Emergency override FWD H1 0X 81 and Emergency Override REV H1 0X 82 are set simulta neously Multi function input selection fault Serial communication option board is not installed option board is installed incorrectly The run command selection parameter 1 02 is set to 3 and option board is not installed Run command is selected through serial communication at 2CN but option board is not installed The following settings have been made at the same time b5 01 PID Control Method Selec tion has been set to a value other than 0 b5 15 PID Sleep Function Start Level has been set to a value other than 0 b1 03 Stopping Method Selection was set to 2 or 3 PID Control Setup Error V f parameter settings are not set V f data setting fault correctly Carrier frequency data setting fault Carrier frequency proportional gain C6 05 gt 6 and C6 04 gt C6 03 Upper lower limit error of C6 03 to 5 0kHz Parameter setting incorrect
280. the command function contents Slave address Function code Error check Fig D 4 Message Format The space between messages must support the following DDC to Drive Drive to DDC DDC to Drive Time Seconds le 24 bits long sj t 15 06 24 bits long 4 te 5 ms min setting Fig D 5 Message Spacing Slave Address Set the Drive address from 0 to 32 If 0 is selected commands from the master will be broadcast 1 e the Drive will not return responses Function Code The function code specifies commands There are four function codes as shown below Table D 3 Modbus Function Codes Function Code a Hexadecimal Function Min Max Min Max Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Reading Holding Register Contents i eee 7 Write In Single Holding Register 8 8 Minimum bytes for normal Response Message error response message is always 5 bytes Data Configure consecutive data by combining the storage register address test code for a loopback address and the data the register contains The data length changes depending on the command details Communications D 5 Error Check Errors are detected during communication using CRC 16 Perform calculations using the following method 1 factory setting for CRC 16 communication is typically zero but when using the Modbus system set the factory set ting to
281. this section as a reference and apply the appropriate measures Ifa fault is displayed on the digital operator refer to Fault Detection Table 6 1 If Parameter Cannot Set Use the following information if a Drive parameter cannot be set W The display does not change when the INCREASE and DECREASE keys are pressed The following causes are possible The Drive is operating drive mode There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation Remove the run command and then set the parameters Parameter write enable is input This occurs when parameter write enable set value 1B is set for a multi function digital input terminal H1 01 to H1 05 If the parameter write enable input is OFF the parameters cannot be changed Turn it ON and then set the parameters Passwords do not match Only when a password is set If the parameter A1 04 Password and A1 05 Password Setting numbers are different the parameters for the initialize mode cannot be changed Enter the correct password in A1 04 If you cannot remember the password display A1 05 Password Setting by pressing the Shift Reset Key and the MENU Key simultaneously while in the A1 04 display Reset the password and input the reset password in parameter 1 04 B OPEO01 through OPE11 is displayed The set value for the parameter is wrong Refer to Operator Programming Errors in this chapter and correct the setting 00 or CPF01 is displaye
282. tive during Speed Agree and operation contin ues after detection LL at RUN Alm Undertorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection LL SpdAgree Flt Undertorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault LL At RUN Flt Undertorque Detection is always active and drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault Torque Detection Level 1 Sets the overtorque undertorque detection level as a s d Load Det Lvl percentage of Drive rated current 119300 13 Programming Torque Detection Time 1 Loss Det Time Sets the length of time an overtorque undertorque condition must exist before being recognized by the drive OL3 is then displayed Parameters 21 Parameter Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Name Setting Factory No Setting Menu Location a PUER Hawe Protection a Internal Dynamic Braking Resistor Protection Selection DB Resistor Prot Overheat Pre Alarm Level OH Pre Alarm Lvl Overheat Pre Alarm Operation Selection OH Pre Alarm Sel L8 06 Output Ground Fault Detection Selection Ground Fault Sel Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Selection Fan On Off Sel Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Delay Time Fan Delay Time L8 11 Ambient Temperature Setting Ambient Temp OL2 Characteristic Selection at Low Speeds OL2 Sel L Spd Soft CLA Selection Soft CLA Sel OH Frequency Reference Re
283. top Decel Time C1 09 atari Only 4 OH Alarm and Reduce factory default The Drive is capable of warning the operator of an impending heatsink over temperature fault via an OH pre alarm The level at which the pre alarm will activate is determined by the setting of parameter L8 02 Measurement of the heatsink temperature is done with several strategically mounted thermistors If any of the heatsink thermistors measure a temperature in excess of the setting of L8 02 the Drive will fault OH2 and either ramp to stop using the C1 02 deceleration rate L8 03 0 Ramp to Stop coast to stop L8 03 1 Coast to Stop ramp to stop using the C1 09 fast stop deceleration rate L8 03 2 Fast Stop alarm OH and continue running L8 03 3 Alarm Only alarm OH and continue running but at a reduced speed L8 03 4 Alarm amp Reduce If L8 03 4 Alarm and Reduce the Drive will continue to run but will reduce the speed to the level determined by parameter L8 19 Refer to the description for parameter L8 19 If a digital output is configured for OH PreAlarm 2 01 20 OH PreAlarm it will close whenever the heatsink tempera ture is greater than the L8 02 level no matter what the setting is of L8 03 B 18 06 Input Phase Loss Detection Level Setting Range 0 0 to 25 0 of Drives OV Trip point Factory Default KVA Dependent The Drive checks for a lost input phase by monitoring the DC Bus voltage ripple After an
284. tors If 01 06 User Monitor Selection Mode is set to 1 3 Mon Selectable those two monitors are locked as specified by parameters o1 07 and 01 08 and will not change as the top parameter is scrolled with the INCREASE and DECREASE keys DRIVE PI Feedback Active Monitor Title Active Monitor PI Output 01 07 37 2 50 PI Setpoint 01 08 38 For Example The Display above showing PI Feedback PI Output and PI Setpoint would be useful when setting up a PI Control Loop Programming 5 55 02 Key Selections B 02 03 User Parameter Default Value Seting Set Defaults Clear All The Drive gives the option of configuring any and all of the programming parameters and then saving the parameters as User Initialization Values After configuring the Drive set parameter 2 03 1 Set Defaults to save the parameters to a User Initialization memory location Once this has been done the Initialize Parameters parameter 1 03 will offer the choice of 1110 User Initialize Choosing 1 03 1110 User Initialized will reset all modified parameters back to what they were the last time they were saved using 02 03 The choice of setting 1 03 1110 User Initialized is unavailable until first setting the User Initialization parameters using 02 03 Once a User Initialization is set saved it can be cleared by setting 02 03 2 Clear All After clearing the User Initialization parameters the choice o
285. tput of the 100 0 to PI Offset PI function in a non Differential PI loop Every time the PI output 100 0 0 0 Programming is updated the offset is summed with the PI output This can be used to artificially kick start a slow starting PI loop If the Drive is configured for Differential PI Regulation H3 09 16 then the PI Offset is the targeted maintained differen tial between the signal measured on analog input A1 and the signal measured on analog input A2 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running Menu location is Quick Setting when b5 01 1 and Programming when b5 01 0 Parameters A 5 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory Menu b5 08 b5 09 b5 10 PLOutput Gain Setting Sets the output gain of the PI controller 0 0 to 25 0 Output Gain b5 11 b5 19 b5 22 PI Primary Delay Time Constant PI Delay Time PI Output Level Selection Output Level Sel PI Output Reverse Selection Output Rev Sel PI Feedback Reference Missing Detection Selection Fb los Det Sel PI Feedback Loss Detection Level Fb los Det Lvl PI Feedback Loss Detection Time Fb los Det Time Sleep Function Start Level Sleep Level PI Setpoint Value PI Setpoint PI Setpoint Display Scaling Setpoint Scaling PI Sleep Input Source PI Sleep Source PI Snooze Level Snooze Level PI Snooze Delay Time Snooze Delay Time PI Snooze Deactivation Level
286. trol PCB properly meet at connector CN8 before insertion The connector pins may be bent if the terminal card is forced into place possibly preventing correct Drive operation Mounting Screw Mounting Screw Fig 7 3 Terminal Card Removal Procedure Maintenance 7 6 Appendix A Parameters This appendix lists all the parameter numbers and names along with a description of each Also below the parameter name in bold type is the abbreviated name as it appears on the digital operator display keypad Parameter List A 2 e EP C A 26 Fault Trace List ui ROO RE A 28 Fault History si ii debe ce i Een A 29 Decimal to Hex Conversion 444422222211 A 30 Parameters A 1 Parameter List Table A 1 Parameter List Parameter Parameter Name e Setting Factory Menu Setting Location A initialization Language selection for digital operator display English Deutsch Language Selection Francais Select fave Italiano Uto Programming Espanol Portugues Not returned to factory setting by initialization This setting determines which parameters are accessible Access Level Selection 0 Operation Only Access Level 1 User Level 2 2 Programming 2 Advanced Level Used to return all parameters to their factory or user setting 0 No Initialize 1110 User Initialize The user must set their own para
287. trol board replacement in the event of damage To reset the Elapsed Timer back to zero set 02 07 0 Programming 5 57 Digital Operator Copy Function 03 01 Copy Function Selection Sting COPY SELECT factory default OP SINV WRITE Note The copy function is disabled when serial communication is active 03 02 Read Allowed Selection 0 Disabled factory default Enabled The digital operator has parameter COPY capabilities via built in non volatile memory The digital operator can READ all of the parameters in the Drive and store them for later WRITE back to the Drive or into a Drive with the same product code and software number In order to read the parameter values and store them in the digital operator select 03 02 1 Enabled If you attempt to READ the data which overwrites any previously stored data without first setting 03 02 1 Enabled you will get the following error PRE READ IMPOSSIBLE After setting 03 02 1 Enabled it is possible to store parameter values in the digital operator by setting 03 01 1 INV OP READ A successful READ of the parameter values will display READ READ COMPLETE An error may occur while saving the parameter values to the digital operator s memory If an error is displayed press any key to cancel the error display and return to parameter 03 01 Error displays and their meanings are covered in Chapter 6 Dia
288. uct warranty Consult the factory for application assistance Remove power from the Drive Disconnect the motor Shorted output transistor s or Perform the checks without PUF DC Bus Fuse terminals power in Table 6 6 DC Bus Fuse Open Detects if the DC bus fuse has opened Replace the shorted component s Replace the defective fuse Verify dynamic braking duty Overhauling load extended cycle Dynamic Braking Resistor dynamic braking duty cycle RH The protection of the dynamic braking defective dynamic braking Monitor DC bus voltage DynBrk Resistor resistor based on setting of L8 01 resistor resistor Shorted dynamic braking Drive Dyna Transistr_ The dynamis baking not oper Voltage defective dynamic ating properly braking resistor braking transistor or resistor Monitor DC bus voltage Check the input circuit and Low input voltage at R L1 hei ithi S L2 and T L3 increase the input power to within DC Bus Undervoltage specifications The DC bus voltage is lt 12 05 The acceleration time is set too DC Bus Undervolt 298 240Vac Trip point is lt 190Vdc Pender 480Vac Trip point is lt 380Vdc fl fthei Vo tage fluctuation of the input Check the input voltage power is too large Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 7 Table 6 1 Fault Displays and Processing Digital Operator Display Description Cause Corrective Action Cycle power off and on to the Drive UV2 Control Powe
289. un is disabled regardless of L3 05 set This function is enabled when L3 05 is 1 or 2 Drive rated current is set as 100 Normally changing the setting is not required Decrease the set value if stalling occurs at factory setting Parameters A 20 0 to 200 30 to 200 Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter No _ Parameter Name Setting Factory Setting Menu Location eee Ref Detection 14 01 Speed Agreement Detection Level Spd Agree Level 14 02 Speed Agreement Detection Width Spd Agree Width Frequency Reference Loss Detection Selection Ref Loss Sel Frequency Reference Level at Loss Frequency Fref at Floss L4 01 and L4 02 are used in conjunction with the multi function outputs H2 01and H2 02 as a setpoint and hysteresis for a contact closure Determines how the drive will react when the frequency reference is lost 0 Stop Disabled Drive will not run at the frequency reference 1 Enabled of PrevRef Drive will run at a percentage L4 06 of the frequency reference level at the time frequency reference was lost If Frequency Reference loss function is enabled L4 05 1 and Frequency Reference is lost then the drive will run at reduced frequency reference deter mined by L4 06 New Fref Fref at time of loss x L4 06 0 to 100 0 80 0 ae ee Fault Restart Eu SEE IE Em sem 9
290. ut Voltage This parameter selects the nominal input voltage the Drive will receive To set this parameter for the application Press the DATA ENTER key once Use the A V and P keys and the DATA ENTER key to set this parameter per the application Start Up 4 5 Table 4 2 Input Voltage Setting Parameter Parameter Name Setting R Factory Setti M Digital Operator Display bI wae 155 0 to 255 0 240 0 Input Voltage Setting 208 240Vac 208 240Vac Quick Setting 1 01 Li 9 10 or Input Voltage 310 0 to 510 0 480 0 Programming 480Vac 480Vac Ensure the DATA ENTER key is pressed to enter the selection in the Drive Entry Accepted briefly appears and the display is now no longer flashing Press the A key once to display E2 01 Motor Rated FLA This parameter is the foundation of motor protection It can be entered when auto tuning is performed Set this parameter according to the motor rated current FLA Press the DATA ENTER key once Use the A V and P keys to adjust E2 01 to the motor rated full load amps Table 4 3 Motor Rated Current Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory Menu No Digital Operator Display Range Setting Location E2 01 Motor Rated Current kVA kVA Quick Setting Motor Rated FLA Dependent Dependent ve Programming Ensure the DATA ENTER key is pressed to enter the value in the Drive Entry Accepted briefly appears and your display is now flashing
291. ut a board mounted contactor verify that the 24Vdc auxiliary coil measures about 2 2M ohms The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate voltage to verify the contacts change states The DC bus fuse is located in the negative portion of the DC Bus The DC bus fuse is used to protect the main circuit components if the output transistors short If the DC bus fuse is open at least one of the output transistors has failed When a transistor fails there is a short between the positive and negative portions of the DC Bus The DC bus fuse does not protect the transistors but protects the rest of the main circuit from the high current present during a short DC Bus Fuse F1 Never replace the DC bus fuse without first checking all of the output transistors Seta digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale Place one lead of the multi meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the multi meter on the other side of the fuse Ifthe fuse is good the measured value will be zero ohms If the fuse is bad the measured value will be infinite ohms Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 22 Table 6 6 Main Circuit Test Procedure The output transistors are used to switch the DC bus voltage to allow current to flow to the motor Set a digital multi meter to the Diode Check setting Place the positive red meter lead on terminal U T1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts
292. vanced Level then all menus and all parameters are shown If the Access Level Selection is set to Advanced all parameters should be adjustable unless 1 The Drive parameters are password protected A1 04 which will prevent access to A1 00 through A1 03 and all A2 parameters 2 A digital input has been configured as a Program Lockout H1 0X 1B is active 3 During serial communication writing if a parameter change is also attempted via the digital operator a BUSY WRITE PROTECTED message will display Parameter change will not be possible from the digital operator until an Enter command is received via the serial communication to finish the serial writing process B 1 03 Initialize Parameters Seting o 0 No Initialize factory default 2220 2 Wire Initialize 3330 3 Wire Initialize The Drive can be set back to one of three default states via the A1 03 parameter User Initialization 1110 The modified Drive parameters are returned to the values selected as user settings User settings are stored when parameter 02 03 1 Set Defaults 2 2 Wire Initialization 2220 The Drive parameters are returned to factory default values with digital inputs S1 and S2 configured as Forward Run and Reverse Run respectively 3 3 Wire Initialization 3330 The Drive parameters are returned to factory default values with digital inputs S1 S2 and S5 configured as Run Stop and Forward Reverse respectively Aft
293. ve acceleration rate C1 01 or C1 02 is ignored Acceleration is completed in the shortest amount of time w o exceeding the current value set in L3 02 This function is enabled when L3 01 is 1 or 2 Drive rated current is 100 Decrease the set value if stalling occurs at factory setting Disabled The drive decelerates at the active decel eration rate C1 02 or C1 04 If the load is too large or the deceleration time is too short an OV fault may occur General Purpose The drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate C1 02 or C1 04 but if the main cir cuit DC bus voltage reaches the stall prevention level the output frequency will clamp Deceleration will continue once the DC bus level drops below the stall prevention level Intelligent The active deceleration rate is ignored and the drive decelerates as fast as possible w o hitting OV fault level Disabled Drive runs a set frequency A heavy load may cause the drive to trip on an OC fault Decel Time 1 In order to avoid stalling during heavy loading the drive will start to decelerate at Decel time 1 C1 02 if the output current exceeds the level set by L3 06 Once the current level drops below the L3 06 level the drive will accelerate back to its set frequency at the active acceleration rate Decel Time 2 Same as setting 1 except the drive decelerates at Decel Time 2 C1 04 For 6Hz or less frequency stall prevention function during r
294. ve cover Fig 1 4 Drive Appearance gu 5 up for oc fv pe ac Jee i Fo ts Ss fs 5 gt folie bo 0 Control circuit terminals 1 1 AINE 422 Main circuit terminals __ Charge indicator Ground terminal Ground terminal Fig 1 5 Terminal Arrangement Terminal Cover Removed Physical Installation 1 5 Models CIMR E7U2022 thru 2110 30HP and above 208V 240V and 4030 thru 4300 40HP and above 480V The external appearance component names and terminal arrangement of the Drive are shown in Fig 1 6 and 1 7 _ Mounting holes Drive cover Front cover _ Cooling fan Digital Operator d MA yj Nameplate Terminal cover Fig 1 6 Drive Appearance Charge indicator LU U Em Control circuit l LE terminals U Main circuit terminals E H gt
295. voltage falls below the UV trip level L2 05 Base 1 Closed when the drive is not outputting voltage Operator Reference Closed when the speed command is coming from the digital operator Remote Auto Oper Closed when the run command is coming from the digital operator Trq Det 1 N O Closes when the output current exceeds the value set in parameter L6 02 for more time than is set in parameter L6 03 Loss of Ref Closes when the drive has detected a loss of analog speed command Speed command is considered lost when it drops 90 in 0 4 seconds Parameter L4 05 determines drive reaction to a loss of speed command DB Overheat Fault Closes when the drive experiences a major fault Not Used Minor Fault Closes when drive experiences a minor fault or alarm Reset Cmd Active Closes when the drive receives a reset command from terminals or serial comms Timer Output Output for independent timer con trolled by b4 01 and b4 02 Used in conjunction with a multi function digital input Trq Det 1 N C Opens when the output current Terminal M3 M4 Function exceeds the value set in parameter Selection L6 02 for more time than is set in parameter L6 03 A Programming Term M3 M4 Sel A Reverse Dir Closes when the drive is running in the reverse direction E Restart Enabled Closes when the drive is performing an automatic restart Automatic restart is configured by parameter L5 01 Overl
296. wer Active factory default 12 02 Momentary Power Loss Ride Thru Time Setting Range 0 0 to 25 5 Seconds Factory Default Model Dependent The Drive allows different responses to momentary power losses The setting of L2 01 determines whether the Drive attempts to restart after a short loss of incoming AC power and for what length of time this capability remains active If L2 01 0 Disabled the Drive detects a UV1 fault 15ms after power loss and automatic restarting is disabled The Drive cannot restart until the external run command is removed and the UV1 fault is reset Programming 5 40 If L2 01 1 PwrL Ride Thru t the Drive restarts without the UV1 fault if power is returned within the time specified in L2 02 the Momentary Power Loss Ride thru Time During the power loss but before the fault trip the digital operator will display a UV alarm If L2 02 is set for a time longer than the control power supply can be sustained a UV fault will not occur and the Drive restarts upon the return of AC power The time that the control power supply can be maintained varies with Drive size The larger the Drive the greater the potential ride thru time If L2 01 2 CPU Power Active the Drive ignores L2 02 and attempts a restart as long as the control power supply is still able to maintain a minimal voltage level In effect setting L2 01 2 CPU Power Active factory default is programming the Drive for maximum Power
297. will void the warranty This product must not be modified Verify that the rated voltage of the Drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying power To meet CE directives proper line filters and proper installation are required Warnings i AWARNING Some drawings in this manual may be shown with protective covers or shields removed to describe details These must be replaced before operation Observe electrostatic discharge procedures when handling circuit cards to prevent ESD damage The equipment may start unexpectedly upon application of power Clear all personnel from the drive motor and machine area before applying power Secure covers couplings shaft keys and machine loads before energizing the Drive Please do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in this manual B Intended Use Drives are intended for installation in electrical systems or machinery For use in the European Union the installation in machinery and systems must conform to the following product standards of the Low Voltage Directive EN 50178 1997 10 Equipping of Power Systems with Electronic Devices EN 60201 1 1997 12 Machine Safety and Equipping with Electrical Devices Part 1 General Requirements IEC 60204 1 1997 EN 61010 1997 11Safety Requirements for Information Technolog
298. x 1 Inside rear cover Table of Contents viii Chapter 1 Physical Installation This chapter describes the requirements for receiving and installing the E7 Drive E7 Model Number and Enclosure 1 2 Confirmations upon Delivery 1 3 Component 1 5 Exterior and Mounting 5 1 7 Heat Loss Dalai edo donis edere tad den ci 1 11 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site 1 13 Installation Orientation and 1 14 Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover 1 15 Removing Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover 1 16 Physical Installation 1 1 E7 Model Number and Enclosure Style Input Voltage 3 Phase 208 240 Vac 208 230Vac 480 Vac Table 1 1 E7 Model Numbers and Enclosure Style E7 EnclosureStyle Rated Output Current Nominal Hp CIMR E7U20P4 EMA Type 1 IP20 0 5 0 75 MR E7U20P7 EMA Type 1 IP20 C CIMR E7U21P5 EMA Type 1 IP20 1 5 2 MR E7U22P2 EMA Type IP20 MR E7U25P5 EMA 1 IP20 CIMR E7U27P5 EMA Type 1 IP20 7 510 CIMR E7U23P7 EMA Type 1 IP20 C CIMR E7U2018 EMA Type IP20 I I I I I I I I CI MR E7U2022 EMA Type 1 IP20 CIMR E7U2030 NEMA Type 1 I
299. y Equipment IEC 950 1991 A1 1992 A2 1993 A3 1995 A4 1996 modified CE certification per EN 50178 can be achieved using the line filters specified in this manual and following the appropriate installation instructions B Other The E7 Drive is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 000 RMS symmetrical amperes 240Vac maximum 240V Class and 480Vac maximum 480V Class Warnings ii Introduction This Section describes the applicability of the Manual The E7 Drive is a Pulse Width Modulated Drive for 3 Phase AC induction motors This type of Drive is also known as an Adjustable Frequency Drive Variable Frequency Drive AC Drive AFD ASD VFD and Inverter In this manual the E7 Drive will be referred to as the Drive The E7 Drive is a variable torque AC drive designed specifically for HVAC applications in building automation including fans blowers and pumps A new benchmark for size cost performance benefits and quality the E7 includes numerous built in features such as network communications H O A PI parameter storage and copy functions The E7 has embedded communications for the popular building automation protocols Johnson Controls Metasys and Siemens APOGEE FLN as well as Modbus An optional LONWORKS interface card is also available The LCD keypad operator is equipped with Hand Off Auto functions copy feature 7 language choices and 5 lines of display with 16 charac
300. y Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory DriveModel Nominal Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default CIMR Hp for for for for for for for for for for b8 04 C6 02 E2 01 E2 03 E2 05 L2 02 L2 03 L2 04 L8 02 L8 06 40P4 0 5 0 75 576 40 15kHz 1 0 0 6 38 198 0 1 0 1 0 3 95 C 5 40P7 1 447 40 15kHz 1 6 0 8 22 459 0 1 0 2 0 3 95 C 7 5 41P5 1 5 2 338 80 15kHz 3 1 1 4 10 100 0 2 0 3 0 3 95 C 10 42P2 3 313 60 15kHz 4 2 1 5 6 495 0 3 0 4 0 3 90 C 10 43P7 5 245 80 15kHz 7 0 2 3 3 333 0 5 0 5 0 3 95 C 12 45P5 7 5 189 50 15kHz 13 3 2 6 1 595 1 0 0 6 0 3 95 C 10 47P5 10 145 38 15kHz 19 9 4 0 1 152 1 0 0 7 0 3 90 C 20 49P0 15 145 46 15kHz 21 0 5 6 0 922 2 0 0 8 0 3 95 C 23 4011 20 140 88 8kHz 26 5 5 6 0 922 2 0 0 8 0 3 95 C 23 4015 25 126 26 10kHz 32 9 7 6 0 550 2 0 0 9 0 3 95 C 17 4018 30 115 74 10kHz 52 3 7 8 0 403 2 0 1 0 0 6 98 C 17 4024 40 89 08 10kHz 52 0 8 6 0 269 2 0 1 1 0 6 85 C 20 4030 50 92 54 8kHz 65 6 10 9 0 269 2 0 1 1 0 6 85 20 4037 60 76 32 8 2 79 7 19 1 0 155 2 0 1 1 0 6 85 20 4045 75 71 56 8kHz 95 0 22 0 0 122 2 0 1 2 0 6 90 C 20 4055 100 67 20 SkHz 130 0 24 0 0 088 2 0 1 2 1 0 90 C 20 4075 125 46 20 5kHz 130 0 36 0 0 092 2 0 1 3 1 0 98 C 16 4090 150 38 91 8kHz 156 0 40 0 0 056 2 0 1 5 1 0 108 C 16 4110 200 36 23 SkHz 190 0 49 0 0 046 2 0 1 7 1 0 100 C 16 4160 250 30 13 SkHz 270 0 70 0 0 029 2 0 1 8 1 0 108 C 14 4185 300 350 30 57 2kHz 310 0 81 0 0 025

Yaskawa E7 Drive O&M - Coward Environmental Systems

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Yaskawa E7 Drive O&amp;M - Coward Environmental Systems

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Yaskawa E7 Drive O&M - Coward Environmental Systems